Dis

Dissertation2

DisAdvisorCorrespondence

 

http://www.tccns.org/matrix/index.asp

Texas Common Course Numbering System (to compare courses from different institutions)

http://www.thecb.state.tx.us/AAR/UndergraduateEd/fos.cfm

Coordinating Board

http://statecore.its.txstate.edu/

Compare institutions

Abilene Christian University
Angelo State University
Baylor University
Dallas Baptist University
East Texas Baptist University
Hardin-Simmons University
Howard Payne University
Lamar University
Midwestern State University
Saint Mary's University of San Antonio
Sam Houston State University
Southern Methodist University
Southwestern University
Stephen F. Austin State University
Tarleton State University
Texas A&M University - Commerce
Texas A&M University - Corpus Christi

Texas A&M University - Kingsville
Texas Christian University
Texas State University - San Marcos
Texas Tech University
Texas Wesleyan University
Texas Woman's University
University of Houston
University of Mary Hardin-Baylor
University of North Texas
University of Texas at Arlington
University of Texas at Austin
University of Texas at Brownsville
University of Texas at El Paso
University of Texas at San Antonio
Wayland Baptist University
West Texas A&M University
 

3 Documents

Qualitative Data Analysis Software

Criteria for coding:

  1. When timelines are given, the proportion of time spent on each element is calculated.

  2. When grading percentages are specified,

Preparation of documents

  1. All institution and instructor policy information is excluded.  This would include (disability, dates of final exams, policies for absences, academic dishonesty, office hours) student instructions, housekeeping info

  2. Information included:  grade distributions, texts required

Abilene Christian University

www.acu.edu/music  website

http://www.acu.edu/catalog/2007_08/departments/cas/music.html  degree plans

http://www.acu.edu/catalog/2007_08/courses/must.html  courses

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 

MUST 111

Elementary Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training

1

MUST 111 Elementary Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training (1-1-1), fall. Singing in treble, bass, alto, and tenor clefs; major and minor modes, elementary melodic and harmonic diction. Prerequisite: concurrent enrollment in MUST 131.

 

MUST 112

Elementary Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training

1

MUST 112 Elementary Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training (1-1-1), spring. Prerequisites: MUST 111, 131; concurrent enrollment in MUST 132.

 

MUST 131

Elementary Theory II: Analysis and Keyboard

3

MUST 131 Elementary Theory I: Analysis and Keyboard (3-0-3), fall. Introduction to analysis, part-writing, figured bass realization, and harmonization using diatonic harmony. Prerequisite: A Music Entrance Exam score of greater than 40 percent or satisfactory completion of MUST 120. Concurrent enrollment in MUST 111 required.

 

MUST 132

Elementary Theory II: Analysis and Keyboard

3

MUST 132 Elementary Theory II: Analysis and Keyboard (3-0-3), spring. Continuation of analysis, part writing, figured bass realization and harmonization covering the harmonic vocabulary of 18th century music including diatonic chords, secondary dominants, and modulation. Prerequisites: MUST 111, 131; concurrent enrollment in MUST 112.

 

MUST 211

Advanced Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training

1

MUST 211 Advanced Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training (1-1-1), fall. Includes chromaticism and modulations to closely related keys. Prerequisites: MUST 112, 132.

 

MUST 212

Advanced Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training

1

MUST 212 Advanced Theory: Sight Singing and Ear Training (1-1-1), spring. Continuation of MUST 211 with modulations to all keys. Emphasis on development of improvisational skills. Prerequisite: MUST 211.

 

MUST 231

Advanced Theory I: Analysis and Keyboard

3

MUST 231 Advanced Theory I: Analysis and Keyboard (3-0-3), fall. Analysis, part-writing, and figured bass realization and harmonization covering the extended harmonic vocabulary of the nineteenth century including modulation, altered chords, chromatic harmony, and modes. Prerequisites: MUST 112, 132; concurrent enrollment in MUST 211 required.

 

MUST 232

Advanced Theory II: Analysis and Keyboard

3

MUST 232 Advanced Music Theory II: Analysis and Keyboard (3-0-3), spring. Literature, analysis and theoretical concepts of music since 1900. Emphasis will be placed on computer applications in music. This course satisfies the computer literacy requirements for music majors seeking teacher certification. Prerequisite: MUST 231; concurrent enrollment in MUST 212 required

 

MUST 332

Forms and Analysis

2

MUST 332 Forms and Analysis (2-0-2), spring. An analytical study of selected compositions from the late 17th through the early 20th centuries. Prerequisite: MUST 232.

 

MUST 432

Orchestration and Arranging

2

MUST 432 Orchestration and Arranging (2-0-2), fall. Ranges, transpositions, timbres, and individual characteristics of band and orchestra instruments, with experience in scoring for small ensembles, full band, and orchestra. Prerequisites: 12 hours of music including MUST 231, 232, or by permission.

 
  

0

MUST 120 Music Fundamentals (2-0-2), fall. A review of the fundamentals of music including clefs, key signatures, time signatures, and notation. Designed to prepare students for the music theory sequence.

 
 

Total

20

  

Angelo State University

www.angelo.edu/dept/artmusic  website

http://www.angelo.edu/dept/artmusic/music_maj_all_level.html  degree plans

http://www.angelo.edu/dept/artmusic/courses_in_music.html  courses

Music 1451, 1452, 2343, 2344, 2451, 2452 = 22 hours
Music 3163, 3164, 3251, 3252, 3263, 3264, 3341, 3342, 4281, 4282, 4253 = 22 hours

Don't know exactly how many credit hours for all courses.

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 

MUS 1361

Fundamentals of Music

0

1361 Fundamentals of Music (3-0). This course is concerned with elementary musical materials and is designed for non-music majors. However, entry-level music majors may take the course to gain a working knowledge of music fundamentals, but it does not meet requirements for the music major.

 

MUS 1451

Comprehensive Musicianship I

4

1451 Comprehensive Musicianship I (3-2). A study of music fundamentals followed by a stylistic approach to the diatonic harmony of the 17th and 18th centuries. Training in sight-singing and ear-training of rhythms, intervals, scales, melodies, and harmony parallels written assignments.
Prerequisite for 1451: Successful completion of freshman theory placement examination.

 

MUS 1452

Comprehensive Musicianship I

4

1452 Comprehensive Musicianship I (3-2). A study of music fundamentals followed by a stylistic approach to the diatonic harmony of the 17th and 18th centuries. Training in sight-singing and ear-training of rhythms, intervals, scales, melodies, and harmony parallels written assignments.
Prerequisite for 1452: Successful completion of 1451.

 

MUS 2451

Comprehensive Musicianship II

4

2451 Comprehensive Musicianship II (3-2). A study of the harmonic and melodic techniques of the 19th and 20th centuries with emphasis on the changes in musical style from romanticism to the present time. Training in ear training and sight singing skills is coordinated with the study of harmony.
Prerequisite for 2451: successful completion of freshman theory.

 

MUS 2452

Comprehensive Musicianship II

4

2452 Comprehensive Musicianship II (3-2). A study of the harmonic and melodic techniques of the 19th and 20th centuries with emphasis on the changes in musical style from romanticism to the present time. Training in ear training and sight singing skills is coordinated with the study of harmony.
Prerequisite for 2451: successful completion of freshman theory.

 

MUS 3251

Analytic Techniques

2

3251 Analytic Techniques (0-3). A study of methods of analysis currently being applied to music of all periods. Students will learn to approach a piece of music with tools for understanding the work as a whole and the relationship of its parts.
Prerequisite: Successful completion of sophomore evaluation.

 

MUS 3252

Counterpoint

2

3252 Counterpoint (0-3). An introduction to the contrapuntal techniques of the sixteenth, eighteenth, and twentieth centuries, based primarily on learning to write in these styles. The class will include in-class performance of contrapuntal music being studied.
Prerequisite: Successful completion of sophomore evaluation.

 

MUS 4253

Orchestration

2

4253 Orchestration (0-3). A study of the capabilities of voices and all orchestral and wind ensemble instruments, including arranging and transcribing music for vocal and instrumental ensembles. This course includes a lab portion with hands-on experience.
Prerequisite: Successful completion of sophomore evaluation.

 
 

Total

22  

Baylor University

http://www.baylor.edu/music/  website

http://www.baylor.edu/content/services/document.php/70570.pdf  degree plans

http://www.baylor.edu/music/theory/index.php?id=48165  courses

Required theory courses for Music Ed majors:  Theory I, II, III, IV, V, (all 3 hours) Musicianship I, II, III, IV (all 1hours)

Introductory courses do not count towards degree.  total hours required = 19

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 

MUS 1100

Introductory Musicianship

0

The aural skills complement to MUS 1200; emphasizes rudimentary skills in sight singing, rhythm reading, and ear training. Prerequisite(s): Concurrent enrollment in MUS 1200 or 1301, or a passing score on the Theory Placement Exam, or divisional consent.

II. MUS 1100 Introductory Musicianship

             MUS 1100 is designed as the aural complement to MUS 1200 and emphasizes rudimentary skills in sight singing, rhythm reading, and ear training.

This course will enable students to:

  • match pitch
  • sing and identify any melodic interval, P1 through P8, ascending or descending
  • distinguish aurally between different forms of major and minor scales
  • recognize basic melodic figures—runs, neighbor figures, arpeggios
  • take melodic and rhythmic dictation of examples up to 15 notes long
  • read rhythms and sing melodies at sight
  • distinguish aurally between major and minor triads

 

 

MUS 1101

Musicianship I

1

The aural skills complement to MUS 1301, this course emphasizes solfège singing of major and minor melodies at sight, rhythm reading in both simple and compound meters, and melodic, rhythmic, and harmonic dictation. Prerequisite(s): MUS 1100 or a passing score on the aural portion of the Theory Placement Exam; and credit or concurrent enrollment in MUS 1301.

IV. MUS 1101 Musicianship I

             MUS 1101 is the aural skills complement to MUS 1301.  This course emphasizes solfège singing of major and minor melodies at sight; rhythm reading in both simple and compound meters; melodic, rhythmic, and harmonic dictation; and error detection.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • conduct basic meter patterns
  • sing and aurally identify any melodic interval within the octave, ascending or descending
  • sing and aurally identify scale degrees in any order in any major or minor key
  • recognize basic melodic figures and their placement in the scale
  • sight-sing non-modulating melodies in major and minor keys using solfège syllables (movable-do, do-minor)
  • perform while conducting rhythms in simple and compound meter, including elementary subdivisions of the beat  (both prepared and at-sight, with rhythm syllables)
  • perform two-part rhythm examples by tapping both parts and by vocalizing one part while tapping the other
  • take rhythmic dictation in simple and compound meter, including examples that contain divisions of the beat
  • take melodic dictation of non-modulating, diatonic melodies up to 20 notes long
  • sing (arpeggiate) and aurally distinguish various triad qualities and inversions
  • take harmonic dictation (bass, melody and chords) including all diatonic triads in root position and first inversion
  • take dictation of 1:1 two-part examples
 

MUS 1102

Musicianship II

1

A continuation of MUS 1101, designed as the aural skills complement to MUS 1302. Prerequisite(s): A minimum grade of C in MUS 1101, and either credit or concurrent enrollment in MUS 1302.

VI. MUS 1102 Musicianship II

            MUS 1102 is a continuation of MUS 1101 and is designed to be the aural skills complement to MUS 1302.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • aurally recognize any harmonic interval within the octave
  • sing in any order and identify in any register scale degrees in any major or minor key
  • take melodic dictation of non-modulating melodies up to 30 notes in length,  including 7th-chord arpeggiations
  • sing melodies including 7th-chord arpeggiations using solfège syllables
  • perform while conducting rhythms in simple and compound meters, including subdivisions, triplets, duplets, and syncopation, using rhythmic syllables (both prepared and at-sight examples)
  • take rhythmic dictation and error detection in simple and compound meters, including features listed above
  • perform two-part rhythm examples by tapping both parts and by reading one part while tapping the other
  • sing (arpeggiate) and aurally identify root position seventh chords in isolation
  • take harmonic dictation (bass, melody and chords) of progressions including all diatonic triads and seventh chords in all inversion and including non-chord tones
  • take dictation of two-voiced 2:1 contrapuntal examples
  • take dictation and analyze phrase structure of non-chorale excerpts from the literature

 

 

 

MUS 1200

Introductory Music Theory

0

The study of rudiments of written theory, including notation, scales, key signatures, music terminology, intervals, rhythm and meter, chord construction, and music reading. Does not count as credit toward a degree with a major in music.

I. MUS 1200 Introductory Theory

            MUS 1200 is the study of the rudiments of written theory, including notation, scales, key signatures, music terminology, intervals, rhythm and meter, chord construction, and music reading.  This course does not count for credit toward a degree with a major in music.

 

This course will enable students to understand the following concepts:

  • pitch notation—staff, clefs, ledger lines, accidentals, enharmonic pitches,

octave registers

  • rhythm and meter—note and rest values, the beat and its division, meter

types, metronome and tempo indications, time signatures, beaming, meter

identification

  • major and minor scales

  • key signatures

  • intervals

  • major and minor triads

 

MUS 1301

Theory I

3

The first course in a systematic study of the organization of music of the Common Practice Period. Students acquire a basic understanding of the structure of tonal music through analysis and written exercises in harmony and counterpoint. Prerequisite(s): MUS 1200, or a passing score on the Music Theory Placement Exam.

III. MUS 1301 Theory I

             MUS 1301 is the first course in a systematic study of the organization of music of the Common Practice Period.  Students acquire a basic understanding of the structure of tonal music through analysis and written exercises in harmony and counterpoint.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • build speed and confidence in writing and identifying intervals, scales, key signatures, and triads through timed drills
  • write and identify any triad or seventh chord by root, quality and inversion
  • write and identify any diatonic triad or seventh chord by roman numeral and inversion symbol
  • identify chords by root and quality from a given figured bass or lead sheet
  • write diatonic melodies with attention to contour, tendency tones and harmonic implications
  • write 1:1 counterpoint
  • learn principles of harmonic progression including types of root movement, chord function, common progressions, and harmonic sequence
  • part-write harmonic progressions of root-position and first-inversion triads in a variety of exercises in three and four voices, including bass harmonization, melody harmonization, and figured bass
  • perform harmonic analysis of tonal examples from the literature
 

MUS 1302

Theory II

3

A continuation of MUS 1301, including non-chord tones, 2:1 counterpoint, seventh chords, and basic formal structure. Prerequisite(s): Minimum grade of C in MUS 1301.

V. MUS 1302 Theory II

             MUS 1302 is a continuation of MUS 1301, and includes units on second inversion triads; 2-to-1 counterpoint; seventh chords; and cadences, phrases, and phrases in combination.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • build speed and confidence in writing and identifying diatonic triads and seventh chords in various inversions through timed drills
  • write and identify non-chord tones
  • write and identify cadences by type
  • identify and diagram phrases in combination
  • write diatonic melodies based on a given motive, chord progression or period form
  • write 2:1 counterpoint giving attention to implied harmony and to the use of dissonance as non-chord tones
  • part-write harmonic progressions in three and four voices, including second inversion triads and diatonic seventh chords in a variety of exercises including bass harmonization, melody harmonization, and figured bass
  • perform harmonic analysis of tonal, diatonic examples from the literature which include seventh chords in various inversions

 

 

MUS 2101

Musicianship III

1

A continuation of MUS 1102, designed as the aural skills complement to MUS 2301. Prerequisite(s): Minimum grade of C in MUS 1102; and credit or concurrent enrollment in MUS 2301.

VIII. MUS 2101 Musicianship III

            MUS 2101 is a continuation of MUS 1102, and is designed as the aural skills complement to MUS 2301.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • aurally recognize any simple interval presented melodically or harmonically
  • sing and recognize diatonic and altered scale degrees in any order in any major or minor key
  • perform rhythms (both prepared and at-sight) and take rhythmic dictation in simple, compound, and irregular meters, including subdivisions, triplets, duplets, syncopation, and simple cross-rhythms
  • sing melodies (both prepared and at-sight) including chromaticism and modulation
  • take melodic dictation of examples up to 40 notes in length including chromaticism and modulation
  • take harmonic dictation (bass, melody and chords) of progressions including altered chords and modulation
take contrapuntal dictation of two-voice examples, including rhythmic independence, sequence, imitation and chromaticism

 

 

MUS 2102

Musicianship IV

1

A continuation of MUS 2101, designed as the aural skills complement to MUS 2302. Emphasizes singing and dictating melodies, rhythms, and chords commonly encountered in late nineteenth and twentieth-century music. Prerequisite(s): Minimum grade of C in MUS 2101; and credit or concurrent enrollment in MUS 2302.

X.   MUS 2102 Musicianship IV

            MUS 2102 is a continuation of MUS 2101, and is designed as the aural skills complement to MUS 2302.  This course emphasizes identifying, singing, and/or transcribing by ear melodies, rhythms, and chord progressions/successions commonly encountered in music from the late nineteenth century to the present.

 

This course will enable students to identify and/or transcribe by ear:

  • compound intervals presented both melodically and harmonically
  • melodies up to 50 pitches in length, based on diatonic modes and chromatic, pentatonic, octatonic, whole tone, and lydian-mixolydian scales
  • atonal melodies up to 25 pitches in length, based on a limited number of interval-class types, pitch-class set types, and 12-tone rows
  • passages of  2-voice polyphony featuring the types of melodies listed above
  • harmonic progressions using common-practice diatonic and altered chords, presented in the context of remote modulations, enharmonic modulations, and passages of shifting or suspended tonality
  • chord progressions/successions using triads, added-note chords, seventh chords and commonly used ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth chords, including chords and successions encountered in jazz and popular music
  • basic types of sonorities encountered after 1900, including open fifths, quintal chords, quartal chords, extended tertian chords, split-member chords, added-note chords, polychords, secundal chords, and whole-tone chords
  • rhythms containing/expressing the following features:  changing between simple and compound meter with the division of the beat constant, changing between simple and compound meter with the beat constant, three notes in two beats, two notes in three beats, four against three, four notes in three beats, three notes in four beats, quintuplets and septuplets, five-eight and other asymmetrical meters

 

By the end of Musicianship IV students will be able to perform at sight:

  • one-part and two-part rhythms containing/expressing the features listed immediately above, plus cross-rhythms and tempo modulation
  • from a given pitch, diatonic modes and pentatonic, octatonic, whole tone, and lydian-mixolydian scales
  • melodies containing/expressing the following features:  modulation to distantly related keys, diatonic modes, changing clefs, exotic (pentatonic, whole tone, lydian-mixolydian, octatonic) scales, post-1900 interval successions, and serialism

 

 

MUS 2301

Theory III

3

A continuation of MUS 1302, emphasizing chromaticism in tonal harmony and introducing standard musical forms. Prerequisite(s): Minimum grade of C in MUS 1302.

VII. MUS 2301 Theory III

            MUS 2301 is a continuation of MUS 1302, emphasizing chromaticism in tonal harmony.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • spell, write, and identify altered chords, including secondary functions, borrowed chords, and Neapolitan and augmented-sixth chords
  • build speed and confidence in the activities listed above through timed drills
  • write melodies including chromaticism and modulation
  • write two-voice contrapuntal examples including implied altered chords and modulation
  • part-write progressions incorporating altered chords in a variety of exercises, including figured bass, unfigured bass, and melody harmonization
  • analyze and part-write modulating examples including common-chord modulation to closely related keys, modulation to remote keys through altered pivot chords, and enharmonic modulation

 

 

 

MUS 2302

Theory IV

3

A survey of late nineteenth and twentieth-century compositional techniques and methods of analysis, including scales, chords, rhythmic techniques, approaches to tonality, set theory, and serialism. Prerequisite(s): Minimum grade of C in MUS 2301.

IX. MUS 2302 Theory IV

            MUS 2302 is a survey of late nineteenth and post-1900 compositional materials, techniques, and methods of analysis.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • identify common characteristics of late nineteenth-century extended tonality
  • spell and analyze 20th- and 21st-century scale types
  • spell and analyze 20th- and 21st-century chord types, using lead-sheet notation and descriptive labels as appropriate
  • analyze and write melodies in 20th- and 21st-century styles using appropriate pitch collections, melodic and rhythmic characteristics, and methods of construction
  • analyze and employ 20th- and 21st-century rhythmic techniques
  • analyze and employ 20th- and 21st-century harmony, voice-leading techniques, and tonal techniques, including both tertian and non-tertian pitch-centricity, parallelism, polytonality, and pandiatonicism
  • place any pitch collection in best normal order, identify its prime form, construct its interval-class vector, and select its set-class from a list of set classes
  • analyze and compose music employing nonserial atonality using pitch-class set theory
  • construct a twelve-tone row and analyze its properties, construct a matrix, and analyze and compose music employing serial atonality

 

 

MUS 3301

Theory V

3

Harmonic and structural analysis of larger forms, including variations, rondo, sonata, and contrapuntal forms. Prerequisite(s): MUS 2302 and credit or concurrent enrollment in 2102.

XI. MUS 3301 Theory V Form and Analysis

            MUS 3301 emphasizes recognition and analysis of the structure of music, from the motivic level to the form of entire pieces.

 

This course will enable students to:

  • analyze phrase structures such as periods, phrase groups, and phrase expansion; and locate cadences and structural closures
  • recognize formal structures and sectional layouts of works, including binary, ternary, rondo, sonata, and sonata-rondo form
  • recognize works constructed from contrapuntal techniques and variation procedures
  • identify tonal plans in relation to forms
  • analyze the structural function of musical passages and discuss the melodic/harmonic techniques employed; i.e., sequence, motivic treatment, pedal, and circle-of-fifths
  • discuss thematic process, motivic development, and imitative procedures
  • analyze and discuss text-music relationships in vocal music
  • recognize adaptations of traditional formal procedures and new formal approaches in twentieth-century examples (e.g., golden mean, indeterminacy, moment form)
provide verbal or written description of formal structures and processes with the use of appropriate analytical terminology

 

 
 

Total

19

  

 

Dallas Baptist University

http://www.dbu.edu/fine_arts/music.asp

http://www.dbu.edu/fine_arts/m_choral_with_cr.asp

http://www.dbu.edu/academics/course_description.asp?course_num=MUSI

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
MUSI 1111Musicianship I1MUSI 1111   (1-2-0)   Musicianship I
A skill-building course in sightsinging and ear-training, to include solfege singing of major and minor melodies in both simple and compound meters, aural and rhythmic reading exercises, and melodic and harmonic dictation. Fall, Spring, Summer. Prerequisite: MUSI 1300 or a passing score on the Music Theory Placement Exam; and MUSI 1311, or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 1311.

MUS 1111:  Musicianship I

Course Design

 

Catalog Description:  A skill-building course in sightsinging and ear-training, to include solfege singing of major and minor melodies in both simple and compound meters, aural and rhythmic reading exercises, and melodic and harmonic dictation. Fall.

Prerequisites: Theory Placement Exam, MUSI 1100, or passing score on the Theory Placement Exam; MUSI 1300, and 1311; or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 1311.

 

Textbooks:

        A New Approach to Sightsinging, 4th ed., by Berkowitz, Fontrier, & Kraft (Norton)

        Developing Aural Skills, Vol. 1, by Barbara Wallace (Kees Academic Press)

        Studying Rhythm, 2nd ed., by Ann C. Hall (Prentice-Hall)

 

Course Content (Material to correspond to Chapters 1-8 of Tonal Harmony):

        Review of MUSI 1100 content

Review of (or introduction to) solfége in moveable do; minor do

        Rhythmic reading in simple meter (1 e & a) and in compound meter (1 la li 2 la li)

        Rhythmic dictation and error detection to include ties, rests, and dotted values; in simple meter (down to beat subdivision) and compound meters (down to beat division)

        Sing and identify all intervals (played melodically ascending and descending)

   Sightsing melodies in major and minor keys in solfége, both prepared and at sight, no syllables written in music (stepwise and with skips in I, IV, V, and V7)

        Melodic dictation and error detection of 4- to 6-measure melodies (stepwise and with skips in I, IV, V, and V7) in major and minor keys, played without break

        Harmonic dictation of progressions in major and minor keys, with 4 to 10 chords, using all diatonic triads, root position and first inversion.  (Omit minor key variants – subtonic [VII], minor v, and major IV.)

 

Skill Mastery:

        Sing melodies at sight in moveable do solfége

        Tap rhythm at sight

        Speak rhythm at sight in rhythmic syllables

        Dictation of rhythmic phrases, melodies, and harmonic progressions in 5-6 playings, 4-6 measures at a time

 

 
MUSI 1112Musicianship II1MUSI 1112   (1-2-0)   Musicianship II
A continuation of MUSI 1111. Fall, Spring, Summer. Prerequisite: MUSI 1111, 1311, 1312, or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 1312.
 

MUS 1112:  Musicianship II

Course Design

 

Catalog Description:  A continuation of MUSI 1111. Spring

Prerequisites:  MUSI 1111, 1311, and either 1312, or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 1312.

 

Required Textbooks:

        A New Approach to Sightsinging, 4th ed., by Berkowitz, Fontrier, & Kraft (Norton)

        Developing Aural Skills, Vol. 2, by Barbara Wallace (Kees Academic Press)

        Studying Rhythm, Ann C. Hall (Prentice-Hall)

 

Course Content (Material to correspond to Chapters 9-15 of Tonal Harmony):

        Rhythmic reading in simple and compound meters, through subdivision of the beat.  (Students will read single-line rhythmic patterns in rhythmic syllables, tap single-line rhythmic patterns at reasonable performance tempo, tap two-line rhythmic patterns, or speak one line and tap the other simultaneously.)

        Rhythmic dictation and Error Detection of examples in simple and compound meters, through beat subdivision, including ties, syncopation, and triplets and duplets

        Sing and identify all intervals (played melodically and harmonically, ascending or descenging)

        Sing in solfège at sight melodies with all diatonic skips and with chromatic pitches

        Melodic dictation and Error Detection of 4- to 8-measure melodies (comparable to difficulty level of sightsinging) played without break

        Sing from any chord member all types of seventh chords

        Identify all types of seventh chords

        Harmonic dictation of progressions with 4 to 10 chords, including all diatonic triads and seventh chords, root position and all inversions

        Aural recognition of cadences and NCTs

        Sing and identify chromatically altered scale degrees.

 

Skill Mastery:

        Sing melodies at sight in moveable do solfège without syllables or rhythm written in the music.  Be able to:

·         maintain key feeling

·         sing accurate intervals

·         perform rhythm accurately and at a reasonable tempo

        Tap rhythm at sight, both single-line rhythm and rhythmic duets.

 

Solfège System used:  Moveable do; do-based minor:

            do  re  me  fa  sol  la  ti  do  te  le  sol  fa  me  re  do

 

Rhythmic Syllables used:

        Simple:        1                   2

                           1      &           2      &

                           1  e  &  a       2  e  &  a

 

        Compound: 1                         2  

                           1       la      li       2       la      li

                        1          ta         la         ta         li          ta         2          ta         la         ta         li          ta

 
  3MUSI 1311   (3-3-0)   Music Theory I
A step-by-step study of the basic organization of music, from scale and chord structure to traditional four-part harmony. Students develop skills in analyzing music, writing elementary tonal music, and improvising written harmonizations to melodic lines. Fall, Spring, Summer. Prerequisite: MUSI 1300 or a passing score on the Music Theory Placement Exam.
 

MUSI 1311:  Theory I

Course Design

 

Catalog Description:  A step-by-step study of the basic organization of music, from scale and chord structure to traditional four-part harmony. Students develop skills in analyzing music, writing elementary tonal music, improvising written harmonizations for melodic lines, and playing and transposing chord progressions. Fall.

Prerequisite: MUSI 1300 or passing Music Theory Placement Examination.

 

Textbooks:

        Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008

        Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008

 

Course Content (Chapters 1-8 of Tonal Harmony):

        Review of fundamentals of music theory

        Triads and seventh chords

        Figured bass and inversion symbols

        Lead Sheet symbols

        Analysis of diatonic triads and seventh chords (Roman Numerals)

        Part-writing root position and first inversion triads

        Understanding typical Common-Practice period harmonic progression

        Writing and analyzing harmonic sequences

 

Skill Mastery:

        Pass five timed Skill Tests with score of at least 80% in order to pass course:

            1.  Major and Minor Scales (add accidentals)

            2.  Key Signatures (identify and write)

            3.  Intervals (analyze numeric value of intervals)

            4.  Diatonic Triads (notate major triads on the staff in root position)

            5.  Diatonic Triads (notate minor triads on the staff in root position)

        Thorough knowledge of part-writing principles

        Completion of semester tests in a one-hour time limit

        Completion of Keyboard Tests in a set time limit

 

Technology Applications:

        Four computer notation projects in Sibelius to include the following:

·         basics of computer notation

·         note entry

·         copy/paste

·         editing

·         lyrics

·         score formatting

 
  3MUSI 1312   (3-3-0)   Music Theory II
A continuation of MUSI 1311. Fall, Spring, Summer. Prerequisite: MUSI 1311.

 

MUS 1312:  Theory II

Course Design

 

Catalog Description:  A continuation of MUSI 1311.

        Prerequisite:  MUS 1311

 

Textbooks:

        Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008

        Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008

 

Course Content (Chapters 9-15 of Tonal Harmony):

        Part-writing second inversion triads

        Form (cadences, phrase structure, periods)

        Non-Chord Tones

        Part-writing seventh chords

        Harmonic sequences with seventh chords

        Hemiola

        Extended figured bass

        Melody harmonization in three- and four-voice textures

 

Skill Mastery:

        Pass four timed Skill Tests with a score of at least 80% in order to pass course:

            1.  Notate diatonic triads on the staff

            2.  Analyze diatonic triads

            3.  Analyze seventh chords in block format

            4.  Analyze chord root and quality in musical context

 

Technology Applications:

        Four computer notation projects in Sibelius:

·         realization of lead sheet symbols

·         arranging for instruments

·         harmonization of an original melody, arranging an accompaniment

orchestrating the original melody and accompaniment

 
  1MUSI 2111   (1-2-0)   Musicianship III
A continuation of MUSI 1112. A skill-building course in solfege sightsinging and ear-training. Emphasis will be placed on sightsinging and aural exercises that involve chromaticism, altered chords, and modulations. Fall. Prerequisite: MUSI 1112, 1312, 2311, or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 2311.
 

MUSI 2111:  Musicianship III

Course Design

 

Catalog Description

A continuation of MUSI 1112. A skill-building course in solfege sightsinging and ear-training. Emphasis will be placed on sightsinging and aural exercises that involve chromaticism, altered chords, and modulations. Fall.

Prerequisites: MUSI 1112, 1312, and either 2311, or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 2311.

 

Textbooks:

        A New Approach to Sightsinging, 4th ed., by Berkowitz, Fontrier, & Kraft (Norton)

        Developing Aural Skills, Vol. 3, by Barbara Wallace (Kees Academic Press)

        Studying Rhythm, Ann C. Hall (Prentice-Hall)

 

Course Content  (Material to correspond to Chapters 16-22 of Tonal Harmony):

        Rhythmic reading involving syncopation, more difficult rhythm patterns, triplets and duplets together, etc. (read single-line rhythmic patterns in rhythmic syllables, tap single-line rhythmic patterns at reasonable performance tempo; tap two-line rhythmic patterns, or speak one line and tap the other simultaneously)

        Rhythmic dictation and Error Detection of more advanced rhythmic patterns

   Sightsing (sing at sight) modulating melodies and melodies with chromatically altered tones

        Melodic dictation and Error Detection of 4- to 8-measure melodies (comparable to difficulty level of sightsinging) played without break

        Harmonic dictation of progressions with 4 to 10 chords, involving modulations to closely-related keys, secondary dominant and secondary leading tone chords, borrowed chords, and Neapolitan Sixth chords

 

Skill Mastery:

        Sing modulating melodies at sight in moveable do solfège, without syllables or rhythm written in the music.

·            maintain key feeling

·            be able to sing accurate intervals

·            be able to sing altered tones correctly

·            perform rhythm accurately and at a reasonable tempo

        Tap rhythm at sight, both single-line rhythm and rhythmic duets.

 
  1MUSI 2112   (1-2-0)   Musicianship IV
A continuation of MUSI 2111. Spring. Prerequisite: MUSI 2111, 2311, 2312, or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 2312.
 

MUSI 2112:  Musicianship IV

Course Design

 

Catalog Description

A continuation of MUSI 2111. Spring.

Prerequisites: MUSI 2111, 2311, and either 2312, or concurrent enrollment in MUSI 2312.

 

Textbooks:

        A New Approach to Sightsinging, 4th ed., by Berkowitz, Fontrier, & Kraft (Norton)

        Developing Aural Skills, Vol. 4, by Barbara Wallace (Kees Academic Press)

        Studying Rhythm, Ann C. Hall (Prentice-Hall)

 

Course Content  (Material to correspond to Chapters 22-28 of Tonal Harmony):

        Rhythmic reading difficult rhythm patterns, mixed meter, etc. (read single-line rhythmic patterns in rhythmic syllables, tap single-line rhythmic patterns at reasonable performance tempo; tap two-line rhythmic patterns, or speak one line and tap the other simultaneously)

        Rhythmic dictation and Error Detection of more advanced rhythmic patterns, changing meters, and assymetrical meters

   Sightsing (sing at sight) melodies with more chromaticism, modal melodies, melodies that modulate to foreign keys, melodies based on twentieth-century scale forms, and atonal melodies

        Melodic dictation and Error Detection of 4- to 8-measure melodies (comparable to difficulty level of sightsinging) played without break

        Harmonic dictation of progressions with 4 to 10 chords, involving modulations to remote keys, augmented sixth chords, enharmonic modulations, modal harmony, and bitonality

        Aural recognition of advanced altered chords, extended tertian harmony, and modal melodies

 

Skill Mastery:

        Sing advanced melodies at sight, without syllables or rhythm written in the music.

·            demonstrate precision of advanced melodies

·            perform advanced rhythm accurately and at a reasonable tempo

        Tap rhythm at sight, both single-line rhythm and rhythmic duets.

 
  3MUSI 2311   (3-3-0)   Music Theory III
The study of advanced harmony (including larger Baroque and Classical forms, modulations, altered chords, and the harmonic vocabulary of the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries) with emphasis on analysis, part-writing, improvisational composition projects in various styles. Fall. Prerequisite: MUSI 1312.

 

MUS 2311:  Theory III

Course Design

 

Catalog Description:  The study of advanced harmony (including larger Baroque and Classical forms, modulations, altered chords, and the harmonic vocabulary of the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries) with emphasis on analysis, part-writing, improvisational composition projects in various styles, and playing and transposing chord progressions. Fall.

Prerequisite:  MUSI 1312.

 

Textbooks:

        Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008

        Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008

 

Course Content (Chapters 16-23 of Tonal Harmony):

        Secondary dominant and secondary leading tone chords

        Modulations

        Binary and ternary forms

        Borrowed chords and mode mixture

        Neapolitan chords

        Augmented sixth chords

 

Technology Applications:

        Four computer notation projects in Sibelius covering more advanced notation concepts


 
 
  3MUSI 2312   (3-3-0)   Music Theory IV
Continuation of MUSI 2311. The study of late nineteenth-century and twentieth-century compositional techniques with emphasis on analysis, and improvisational composition projects in various styles. Spring. Prerequisite: MUSI 2311.

 

MUS 2312:  Theory IV

Course Design

 

Catalog Description:  A continuation of MUSI 2311. The study of late nineteenth-century and twentieth-century compositional techniques with emphasis on analysis, and improvisational composition projects in various styles.  Spring.

Prerequisite:  MUSI 2311.

 

Textbooks:

        Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008 (plus supplemental materials)

        Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., by Kostka and Payne, McGraw-Hill, 2008

 

Course Content (Chapters 24-28 of Tonal Harmony):

        Augmented sixth chords (unusual inversions, enharmonic spellings)

        Enharmonic spellings of various chords

        Enharmonic modulations

        Substitute dominants

        Ninth, eleventh, and thirteenth chords

        Late nineteenth-century harmony

        Diatonic church modes

        Non-diatonic scale forms

        Twentieth-century harmony

        Set theory

        The twelve-tone system

 

Technology Applications:

        Notate a composition on computer.

 

 
MUSI 3201Analysis of Musical Structure2MUSI 3201   (2-2-0)   Analysis of Musical Structure
An in-depth study of the analysis of musical forms, including sonata form, sonata-rondo, classical concerto, Baroque variation forms, and fugue. Fall. Prerequisite: MUSI 2312.
 

SYLLABUS

MUS 2301, Section 01 – Analysis of Musical Structure

Dallas Baptist University, Fall, 2008

Dr. Barbara K. Wallace, Professor

 

Office: Blackaby 302

Phone: 214-333-5314 (office)

Monday

Tuesday

Wednesday

Thursday

Friday

1:00-3:00

8:00-10:00

1:00-3:00

8:00-10:00

 

 

11:00-12:00

 

11:00-12:00

12:00-1:00

 

1:00-2:00

 

1:00-2:00

 

Email:  barbaraw@dbu.edu

Office Hours:  

(Subject to change –  Check my office door.  Other hours available by appointment.)

 

Class Time/Location:  TTh 12:00-12:50 p.m., Blackaby 306

 

D.B.U. Mission Statement:  The purpose of Dallas Baptist University is to provide Christ-centered quality higher education in the arts, sciences, and professional studies at both the undergraduate and graduate levels to traditional age and adult students in order to produce servant leaders who have the ability to integrate faith and learning through their respective callings.

 

Course Description:  An in-depth study of the analysis of musical forms, including sonata form, sonata-rondo, classical concerto, Baroque variation forms, and fugue. 

      Prerequisite: MUSI 2312.  Fall.

 

Learner-Centered Course Objectives and Outcomes:  The objective of Analysis of Musical Structure is for the student to demonstrate mastery of the various types of formal structure of tonal music, such as sonata form, sonata-rondo, classical concerto, Baroque variation forms, and fugue.  The overall learning experience will develop competencies that will lead to opportunities for music-related Christian service to God and mankind.  Upon successful completion of this course, students will be able to:

o   discuss the characteristics of the common formal structures of tonal music.

o   analyze various pieces in the Common Practice period.

o   complete an analytical paper, discussing the structure of music.

o   apply the above concepts in a historical framework.

 

Required Textbooks and Class Materials

Anthology for Musical Analysis, Postmodern Update, 6th ed., by Burkhart  (ISBN:  0-534-63828-7)

      Study Score:  Mozart, Symphonies 40 and 41

      Study Score:  Beethoven, Symphony No. 5

      Study Score:  Beethoven, Symphony No. 3

 

Course Outline:

 

      Aug. 25 –  Sep. 30         Unit I:  Bar form, strophic form, Baroque variation forms, Golden Ratio

      Oct 2 – Nov. 11             Unit II:  Sonata form

      Nov. 13 – Dec. 18          Unit III:  Sonata Rondo form, Rondo form, Concerto form

 

SEE HOMEWORK ASSIGNMENT/TEST SCHEDULE FOR SPECIFIC DATES.

 

Requirements for Credit:

 

      1. Homework:  Consistent and timely completion of homework is necessary in a course of this nature.  Homework will be assigned in almost every class period.  Students will be prepared to discuss their findings in each class session.

 

      2.  Participation:  The “Participation” points for this course will be earned by student preparation for class discussions, oral contribution, homework completion, and by attendance and punctuality.

 

      3.  Projects:  Two major analysis papers will be assigned as the two projects.  Projects may be accepted up to a week late, but will have a 10-point penalty.  Students not turning projects in at the class period due date will not be permitted to attend class that day, because of the discussion of the projects. 

 

      4.  Tests:  Major tests can be made up only for excused absences (illness with a note from a doctor or nurse, death in the family, or a university-excused absence).

Text Box: Final grades will be assigned as follows:
Grade:      Points:         Percentage       GPA Points:
A+        686 - 700        98-100%             4.00
A           651 - 685        93 - 97%             4.00
A-         630 - 650        90 - 92%             3.67
B+         609 - 629        87 - 89%             3.33
B           588 - 608        84 - 86%             3.00
B-         560 - 587        80 - 83%             2.67
C+         539 - 559        77 - 79%             2.33
C           518 - 538        74 - 76%             2.00
C-         490 - 517        70 - 73%             1.67
D+        476 - 489        68 - 69%             1.33
D           462 - 475        66 - 67%             1.00
D-         448 - 461        64 - 65%               .67
F                0 - 447           0 - 63%                  0

      5.  Grading:

              Homework and Participation     100

              Project 1                                     100

              Project 2                                     100

              Written Tests (2 @ 100 each)    200

              Final Exam                               200

              Total                                          700             

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Attendance:  According to DBU academic policy, attendance in class is considered a necessary factor in the learning process.  Therefore, absences for all reasons must be kept to a minimum and should not exceed 25 percent of the total class time.  Students are held responsible for all academic work required or performed during their absence regardless of the reasons for those absences. Students who register late are responsible for work missed. The policy concerning class attendance for individual courses, seminars, or other guided learning experiences will be determined by the faculty members in charge of such course, seminar, or learning experience.

Every student is expected to attend class.  Major tests can be made up for excused absences only.  Absences due to illness require a note signed by a doctor or nurse.  Classes will begin promptly.  University policy states that to receive course credit, a student should not miss more than 25% of the classes during a semester.  Seven (7) total absences will be allowed.  The eleventh (8th) absence (excused or unexcused) will result in an “F” for the course.  If you are absent, it is your responsibility to find out what material was covered and what assignments were made.

 

Learner-Centered Assessment of Outcomes:  The student will demonstrate development, progress, and mastery of musical structure and analysis.  He/She will be assessed according to the quality, and accuracy of their homework, class participation, projects, and tests.  (See details above.)

 

Methods of Instruction:  The primary type of instruction to be used is presentation of material, demonstration, student response and discussion, and sample analyses.

 

Bibliography:

Green.  Form in Tonal Music (MT 58.G75 1979)

      Spencer/Temko.  A Practical Approach to the Study of Form in Music  (MT S8 .S63 P7 1994)

Berry, Wallace.  Form in Music  (MT 58 .B34 1986)

      Sadie, Stanley, ed.  The New Grove Dictionary of Music and Musicians

      Diamond.  Music Analyses:  An Annotated Guide . . .  (ML 128 .A7 D5 1991)

      Rosen.  Sonata Forms  (ML 1156 .R67 1988)

      Tovey.  Essays in Musical Analysis  (MT 90 .T6 E5)

      Leichtentritt.  Musical Form  (MT 58 .L452)

      Morris.  The Structure of Music  (MT 58 .M88 S8 1966)

      Ulrich.  Symphonic Music  (ML 1260 .U4)

      Walker.  A Study in Musical Analysis  (MT 6 .W166 S8 1962)

      White.  The Analysis of Music  (MT 6 .W4147 A6 1984)

 

Financial Aid:  Students who are receiving federal, state, or institutional financial aid who withdraw or add hours during the semester may have their financial aid adjusted because of the withdraw or addition.  This change in schedule may affect the aid they are receiving during the current semester, and could affect their eligibility for aid in future semesters.

 

Disabilities:  The student has the responsibility of informing the Dean of Students, at (214) 333-5134, of any disabling condition for which the student will request course modifications.  Dallas Baptist University provides academic adjustments and auxiliary aid to individuals with disabilities, as defined under law, who are otherwise qualified to meet the institution’s academic requirements.  It is the student’s choice and responsibility to initiate any request for accommodations.  Required documentation must be provided before the university can make accommodations.

 

Honor Code and Appeals:  The faculty member endorses the University Honor Code and abides by the University’s Academic Appeal and Academic Misconduct Procedure as stated in the Student Handbook and the Schedule of Classes.

 

Academic Integrity:  Academic dishonesty will not be tolerated in any form (cheating, copying homework, plagiarism, etc.). Plagiarism shall be defined as the appropriation, theft, purchase, memorization, or obtaining by any means another’s work, and the unacknowledged submission or incorporation of that work as one’s offered for credit.  (Appropriation includes the quoting or paraphrasing of another’s work without giving credit therefore.) See D.B.U. catalog, Student Handbook, and the Music Department Handbook for general policies.

 

Posting of Final Course Grades:  Final course grades provided to a student by a faculty member may not be relied upon as official.  Students may access their official final grades online through the WebAdvisor System.  The Registrar’s Office will only mail grades to a student upon request.  The Dallas Baptist University undergraduate and graduate catalogs state that “All accounts must be paid in full before a student can...receive transcripts...”  According to FERPA, faculty may not provide final grade information to students via telephone, email, posting or any other source which might compromise student confidentiality.

 

Children in Classes and Unaccompanied Children:  Minor children of Dallas Baptist University students are not permitted to attend class with their parents.  Furthermore, minor children may not be unaccompanied at any location or property where Dallas Baptist University classes are taught.  If a minor child is brought to the DBU campus or any location where DBU classes are taught, the child must be accompanied by an adult at all times.  For their safety and welfare, unaccompanied children on the DBU campus will be escorted to the Campus Security Office and the parents or guardians will be summoned to pick them up immediately.

 

Cell Phone Policy:  Classroom disruption by cell phones or other electronic devices is prohibited. All cell phones and similar electronic devices must remain turned off and out of sight for the duration of class. Electronic devices utilized in a learning context, such as laptops and language interpreters, may be permitted at the professor’s discretion. A student may face a zero and/or failure in the class if an electronic device is used for cheating during a test. Cheating at Dallas Baptist University is not tolerated and may result in expulsion.

 

Graduating Students Grades:  It is the responsibility of the student to notify the instructor if graduating this semester.  Final exams for graduating students will be given on the morning of Monday, Dec. 15.  Final grades for graduates are due in the Registrar’s Office by noon on Monday, Dec. 15.  These grades are final.  The instructor will not submit late grades for graduate nor change grades once they are submitted.

 

Record Keeping: Please keep ALL papers and projects handed back.  Should there ever be a question about your grade, we will only be able to resolve it if you have documentation.

 

Important Dates:

Last day to add: 9-5-08

Last day to withdraw:  11-7-08

Final Exam:  Thursday, December 18, 10:00-noon.


 

 
  2MUSI 4201   (2-2-0)   Orchestration
Study of the capabilities and limitations of orchestral and band instruments, analysis of scores, and scoring projects for small and large instrumental ensembles. Fall. Prerequisite: MUSI 2312.
 
 
 Total20  
     

East Texas Baptist University

http://www.etbu.edu/Academics/Semester_by_Semester_Plans/School_of_Fine_Arts/Music/default.htm

http://www.etbu.edu/php/semesterplans/view.php?planid=400

https://www.etbu.edu/Forms/Catalogs/2008-2009.pdf

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

Required courses

MUSI 1100 Introduction to Music.......................................................................................................1

MUSI 1116, 1117 Elementary Ear Training I, II...............................................................................2

MUSI 2116, 2117 Advanced Ear Training I, II..................................................................................2

MUSI 1311, 1312 Elementary Harmony I, II....................................................................................6

MUSI 2312 Advanced Harmony...........................................................................................................3

MUSI 3303 Form and Analysis.............................................................................................................3

MUSI 3203 20th Century Analytical Techniques................................................................................2

 

 
MUSI 1100 Introduction to Music1MUSI 1100 Introduction to Music (1,0,1)
This course is designed to acquaint the beginning student with an overview of the field of classical music. It will
deal with styles, major periods, media of performance, textures, literature, and music research. It is designed for
majors and minors in music and any others interested in a brief survey of the field.

MUSI 1100:  Introduction to Music

Friday- 8:00-8:50 a.m.

Spring 2009

Dr. Virginia Lile Boaz, professor

Office: JG 104, x 2165; Home: 923-9545; email: vboaz@etbu.edu

Office Hours:  By Appointment

 

Catalog Description:  This course is designed to acquaint the beginning student with an overview of the field of music. It will deal with styles, major periods, media of performance, textures, literature, [employment opportunities, and aptitude testing].  It is designed for majors and minors in music and any others interested in a brief survey of the field.

 

I. Course Objectives:

·         to trace the development of Western Music from the Medieval through the Contemporary period

·         to become familiar with the most important terms, forms, instruments, and composers of Western art music

·         to develop a basic music vocabulary for describing music of all types

·         to understand the cultural and historical background of Western music

·         to understand music’s function in society

·         to develop listening skills in order to be able to recognize by sight and sound the music of particular eras

 

II. Course Requirements and Evaluation

 

A.   Quizzes (60%)-DAILY quizzes will be given at the beginning of each class period over reading and listening assignments. These will take approximately 5 minutes, so students who are regularly tardy will be in danger of missing quizzes.  Please be on time.  One assigned Take-Home Quiz will be worth two (2) quiz grades.

B.   Tests (40%)- Two (2) exams will be given during the semester over course materials. Exams will be a balance of both objective and subjective evaluation.

 

 

III. Course Policies

 

A.   According to ETBU policy, you are allowed 3 (25%) absences throughout the

semester, before failing the class based solely on your attendance.  On the fourth (4th) absence, you will be notified that you have failed the course and will receive a WX on your transcript. Attendance will be taken by turning in an index card at the beginning of each class period.

 

B. Quizzes and Exams

            1. There are NO MAKEUP QUIZZES.  The lowest three (3) quiz grades will automatically be dropped. 

            2. If you need to have a makeup exam, it is your responsibility to schedule it with the instructor at least a week in advance.  Failure to do so will result in a “zero” for that exam.  Only legitimate excuses, such as severe illness (requires a doctor’s note), death in the family, etc. will be considered for a makeup exam.

C. Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Office of Advising and Career Development in Scarborough Hall, Room 104, and providing the required documentation.  If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations. You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.

D. The instructor reserves the right to modify any portion of the syllabus as may become necessary due to events or circumstances that may occur during the semester.

 

IV. Required Texts/Materials

 

·                     Kamien, Roger.  Music:  An Appreciation.  Sixth Brief Edition. Boston,

            Mass.:  McGraw-Hill, 2008.

·                     Index Cards (Color, size, and style are up to you).

 

V. Optional Texts/Materials (On reserve in the Music Lab)

 

·                     CD set (5 CDs) Music: An Appreciation.  Ninth Edition/Sixth Brief Edition.                                      Boston, Mass.:  McGraw-Hill, 2008

·                     Poultney, David.  Studying Music History:  Learning, Reasoning, and Writing                     About Music History and Literature.  2nd ed.  Upper Saddle River, New                     Jersey:  Prentice Hall, 1996.

 

We will cover the following topics:

Unit II:  The Middle Ages and Renaissance (pp. 59-90)          

Unit III:  The Baroque Period (pp. 91-148)

Unit IV:  The Classical Period (pp. 149-206)

Unit V:  The Romantic Period (pp. 207-286)

Unit VI:  The Twentieth Century and Beyond (pp. 287-304)

 

 

VI. Course Schedule

 

F 1/16             Course Introduction/ Music in the Middle Ages (pp. 59-78)

 

F 1/23             Music in the Renaissance (pp. 78-89); The Baroque Period (pp. 90-100)               

F 1/30             Baroque, continued (pp. 100-129)

 

F 2/6               Baroque, continued (pp. 130-147)                       

 

F 2/13             TMEA- No Class

                        TAKE-HOME QUIZ DUE NEXT WEEK

                       

F 2/20             TAKE-HOME QUIZ DUE

The Classical Period (pp. 149-172

 

F 2/27             Classical, continued (pp. 172-192)

 

F 3/6               Classical, continued (pp. 193-205)

 

F 3/13             TEST #1

 

MARCH 16-20 SPRING BREAK

 

F 3/27             The Romantic Period (pp. 207-230)

 

F 4/3               Romantic, continued (pp. 231-255)

 

APRIL 10- GOOD FRIDAY HOLIDAY

 

F 4/17             Romantic, continued (pp. 256-277)

           

F 4/24             Romantic: Wagner (pp. 278-285)

                        The Twentieth Century (pp. 287-304 [up to Impressionism and Symbolism])

 

 

 

TEST #2- MONDAY, APRIL 27- 8:00-9:50

 

 
MUSI 1116Elementary Ear Training I1MUSI 1116 Elementary Ear Training I (1,0,1)
Elementary Ear Training I is an applied skills course designed to develop skills in sight singing, rhythmic reading, improvising short melodic and rhythmic phrases and notating melodies, rhythms and chords using
folk, western and non-western melodies. Prerequisites: MUSI 1311 or concurrent enrollment.

MUSI 1116 - Ear Training I

Fall 2008

Mr. Ray Herman                                                                                 rherman@etbu.edu

J.G. 103, Ext. 2161                                    Office Hours as posted on bulletin board

 

 

            I.      Catalog Description: Elementary Ear Training I is an applied skills course designed to develop skills in sight singing, rhythmic reading, improvising short melodic and rhythmic phrases and notating melodies, rhythms and chords using folk, western and nonwestern melodies.

 

         II.      Prerequisites:  MUSI 1311 or concurrent enrollment.

 

     III.      Curriculum requirement:  BA – Music Major; BM – Sacred Music Major, Vocal Performance Major, Piano Performance Major, All-Level Music Education Major; Minors – Music Theory, Conducting.

 

      IV.      Textbooks (required):

a.      Music for Sight Singing, 7th Edition. Ottman and Rogers

b.      Dictation Packet – provided on first class day

 

          V.      Course Objectives:

·         To demonstrate reliable singing and music reading using folk, western, and nonwestern classical music;

·         To notate melodies, rhythms and harmonic progressions;

·         To accurately identify harmonic intervals and chord types;

·         To develop the ability to use solfege syllables.

 

   VII.      Teaching Methodology/Course Requirements:

1. Sight Singing (Performance):  Activities will be given in class to develop the ability to read rhythms and pitches accurately.  Practice outside of class is expected. Quizzes may be given in any class period without prior notice.  Material for these quizzes may be taken from the textbook, computer assignments, or outside sources.  Three small group exams will be given according to the course schedule.

 

2. Ear Training (Written):  Class activities will be used to develop these skills.  Practice outside of class is expected. Quizzes may be given in any class period without prior notice.  Material for these quizzes may be taken from the textbook, computer assignments, or outside sources.  Students will also be given assignments on the Aurelia software program.  As only one attempt will be allowed on each Aurelia quiz activity, students are encouraged to repeat all these exercises until they have mastered the skill.  Three exams will be given according to the course schedule.

 

 

 

VIII.      Course Calendar

This course will meet three days per week for approximately two-thirds of the semester. During the remainder of the semester assignments and other activities will be given for any student(s) who need extra help or who would like to improve their grade.**

 

      IX.      Attendance/Participation Requirements:

According to the ETBU catalogue (p.21), “(t)o be eligible to earn credit in a course, the student must attend at least 75 percent of all class meetings.” The eighth absence, for any reason, will result in failure of the class and loss of course credit.  Any student who fails to be seated in the classroom by the beginning of the class will be counted as tardy. Two tardies will be equivalent to one absence. Prior notification of any absence will be expected when possible. No course work missed due to absence will be made up unless prior arrangements have been made and the absence is the result of either a University approved event or other reason deemed acceptable by the instructor. Neither hats nor caps are to be worn during class.

 

         X.      Electronic Devices:

The use of electronic communication devices, including but not limited to cell phones, blackberries and laptop computers, will not be permitted in class. Please confirm that these are turned off prior to the start of class.

 

      XI.      Grade Computation:

Participation:                          40%

         (In class, small group and outside assignments)   

Exams: 

         Small Group                   30%

         Dictation                         30%

              

A=90-100

B=80-89

C=70-79

D=60-69

F=59 and below

 

  XII.      Disability Accommodation Statement:

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation. If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations. You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.

 

 

 

 

Tentative Course Schedule

 

Aug 25                        Course Introduction / Distribution of Packets

Aug 25-29                  Introduction to Solfege – History / Chant

Sept 1-5                      Rhythm – Terms / Beat Patterns / Rhythm Chart

Sept 8-17                    Rhythm – Other time signatures

                                    Solfege – Other keys, Treble and Bass clefs

Sept 15-17                  Solfege – Major Pattern / M2/m2

Sept 17                      Dictation Exam

Sept 19                     Small Group Exam

Sept 22-26                 Major Triads

                                    M3/m3 – M6/m6

                                    Rhythm – Compound Meters (Ottman Unit 4)

Sept 29-Oct 3            Minor Triads

                                    P4 – P5

Oct 6-8                       Diminished Triads

                                    Tritone

                                    Rhythm – Subdivision of the Beat (Ottman Unit 10)

Oct 8                         Dictation Exam

Oct 10                       Small Group Exam

Oct 13-17                    Augmented Triads

Oct 20-24                  Seventh Chords

Oct 27                         Review

Oct 29                       Final Exam: Dictation and Small Group

                        *Final Exam will be given during normally schedule class time.

Dec 8                         Second Final Exam

                        ** Second Final Exam will be given 10:30 – 12:20.

 

 
MUSI 1311 Elementary Harmony I3MUSI 1311 Elementary Harmony I (3,0,3)
Elementary Harmony I is a study of the principal chords in both major and minor modes with emphasis upon
part-writing and keyboard harmony.

Elementary Harmoni I:  MUSI 1311

Fall 2008

MWF: 8:00-8:50

JGMB 138


 

 

Thomas R. Webster, Ph.D.

   Office:          JGMB 102

   Phone:          Ext. 2158

   E-mail:         twebster@etbu.edu

   Office Hours: 

                        MW:    11:00-12:00; 2:00-4:00

                        T:         8:00-11:00

                        Th:       1:30-4:00

                        F:         11:00-12:00

 

Instructor’s Assistant Data

Jennifer Shafer

Tutoring Hours: See Posted Lab Schedule

Tutoring Location: JGMB 114

sha0787@etbu.edu

 

Course Description

Elementary Harmony I is a study of the principal chords in both major and minor modes with emphasis upon part-writing and keyboard harmony.

 

Course Prerequisite

There are no prerequisites for this course.  However, students ill-prepared for college-level music theory study may choose to complete MUSI 1300 Fundamentals of Music before taking this course.  A decision to do so will put music students one year behind in their music study, and consequently may extend their college work beyond four years.

 

Textbook and Materials

            Kostka, Stefan and Dorothy Payne, Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., Boston:  McGraw-Hill, 2009.

 

Kostka, Stefan and Dorothy Payne, Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., Boston:  McGraw-Hill, 2009.

 


 

Course Outcomes and Objectives

Students completing this course should have a thorough understanding of the following areas:

·         Major and minor scales and key signatures

·         Melodic and harmonic intervals

·         Music terminology and vocabulary appropriate to the course content

·         Rhythm, meter, and time signatures

·         Triads and seventh chords

·         Functional use of chords in tonal harmony

·         Voice leading in four-part composition

·         Part writing in three- and four- part textures

·         Harmonic progressions

·         Composition techniques using all of the skills listed above

Students who complete this course will be prepared for additional study in music theory and upon completion of the entire theory curriculum will acquire:

·         An understanding of the common elements of organizational patterns of music and their interaction, and the ability to employ this understanding in aural, verbal, and visual analyses.

·         Sufficient understanding of musical forms, processes, and structures to use this knowledge in compositional, performance, scholarly, pedagogical, and historical contexts, according to the requisites of their specializations.

·         Rudimentary capacity to create derivative or original music in written form.

·         The ability to use music notation programs and to begin to develop an understanding of how these programs serve the field of music.

Students will:

·         Work independently on a variety of musical problems by combining their capabilities in performance; aural, verbal, and visual analysis; composition and improvisation; and history and repertory.

·         Begin to form and defend value judgments about music.

 

Expectations

In addition to the requirements and expectations listed elsewhere in this syllabus, students are expected to:

·         Arrive to class on time, if not early, with all materials including textbook, workbook, pencil, pen, notebook paper and staff paper

·         Come to every class having read the chapter, prepared to discuss the material

·         Work to master and increase speed of recall of the material cover in previous units/chapters.

 

Grade Computation

Each student’s grade will be computed based on the percentages below.

 

Homework Assignments         10%                 and                  25%

                        In-Class Quizzes                     10%                                         25%

                        Tests (6)                                  30%                                         25%

Final Exam                              50%                                         25%

 

The grade computation that most benefits the student will be used to determine the student’s final grade. 

 

Students who have successfully completed all TCAs (see below) prior to the last regularly scheduled class meeting may choose not to take the Final Exam.  In such cases the Test average will count 80% and 50% of the grade computations.

 

 

Timed Competency Assessments

In addition to the assignments, quizzes, Unit Tests, and Final Exam, each student will be required to successfully complete a timed competency assessment (TCA) on each topic within the chapters and units.  Each TCA will be given in class one time, but may be retaken as many times as necessary throughout the semester until the time of the final exam.  Students must successfully complete all the timed assessments in order to receive a passing grade for the class regardless of the grade earned. The assignments, quizzes and tests allow the student to demonstrate an understanding of the material, and the TCAs provide the student the opportunity to demonstrate mastery and application of that material sufficient to warrant its use in the subsequent music theory courses.  The TCAs do not affect the students’ grades, but they do affect successful completion of the course.

 

Assignments

Daily homework assignments will be given.  All assignments are to be completed before class begins and will be assessed during the class session in which each is due.  Students must be ready to turn in homework assignments at the beginning of each class period.  While students are encouraged to seek assistance from the instructor, the instructor’s assistant or other students, all assignments must be completed by the students turning in the work.  Homework assignments are not collaborative efforts of many students, and all assignments should represent the student’s individual work and understanding of the subject matter.

             

Quizzes

Short daily quizzes will be given at many class meetings.  These are designed to reinforce the students’ learning in previous classes and homework assignments, and to develop a greater speed in processing the information and course content.  All quizzes may be comprehensive, and all material from previous chapters may be covered at any time.

 

Tests

Unit tests will be given throughout the semester (see Tentative Course Schedule below).  Each test will be comprehensive and will require a thorough knowledge of the material presented in previous units.  Students are encouraged to solidify their understanding of the content in each unit and develop greater speed in processing and presenting that information throughout the semester.

 

Final Exam

The Final Exam will be administered on Wednesday, Dec 10, 2008 from 8:00-9:50 a.m.

 

Academic Integrity

“Academic integrity is one of the most important values maintained by the University.  Violations of academic policies, including ethical expectations are outlined in the course syllabus, the University Catalog, or other official University documents.  Violations are considered serious breaches of both personal integrity and the University’s student code of conduct.  Conflicts involving matters of academic integrity will follow the student grade appeals procedure.  These conflicts include:

A)    Plagiarism – This may be defined as the act of appropriating or giving out as one’s own the literary or artistic work of another.  (Facts of general knowledge are not considered to be covered by the definition of plagiarism.)

B)     Cheating – This is defined as falsifying work, copying work of another person, and use of unauthorized helps.

C)     Falsification of Records – Accuracy in completing forms for the permanent student records file is essential to the functioning of the University and to knowingly falsify or submit inaccurate data is a disciplinary offense.

D)    Use of unauthorized materials – for classroom and class use.”

 

Attendance Policy, Late Work, and Make-Up Work

Class attendance is critical to each student’s success in this course.  Attendance at every class meeting is expected.  Content information will be given in each class session; quizzes will be administered in many class sessions, and the discussion of course content is vital for the development of a complete understanding of the material. 

 

The University Class Attendance Policy (see page 21 of University Catalog) will be strictly enforced in this course.  No late work will be accepted and no quizzes or tests will be administered after a class has been missed except in extreme circumstances as determined by the instructor. 

 

Students who miss class due to illness or other personal matters must discuss the matter with the instructor who, if approved, will determine an alternate time to accept assignments and administer quizzes and tests.  In most cases these alternate times will be scheduled prior to the missed class, and students may be asked to produce verification of the situation (doctor’s note, etc.)

 

In the case of a University approved absence, the student must make arrangements to turn in assignments and take quizzes or tests prior to the missed class. 

 

Disability Statement

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.  If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor. 
 

Tentative Course Schedule

 

Changes will be made to the schedule below as needed throughout the semester.  Students will always receive at least 2 class meeting notice of a change in the test schedule.

 

Aug 25             Course Introduction

Aug 27-Sept 5 Chapter 1: Elements of Pitch

Sept 8              Test 1

Sept 10-12       Chapter 1: Elements of Pitch (continued)

Sept 15            Test 2

Sept 17-26       Chapter 3: Triads and Seventh Chords

Oct 1               Test 3

Oct 1-15          Chapter 4: Diatonic Chords

Oct 17             Test 4

Oct 20-Nov 3  Chapter 5: Principles of Voice Leading

Nov 5              Test 5            

Nov 7-Dec 1   Chapter 6: Root Position Part Writing

Dec 3               Test 6

Dec 5               Final Exam review/TCA make-ups

 

Final Exam

The Final Exam will be administered on Wednesday, Dec 12, 2007 from 8:00-9:50 a.m.

           

 
MUSI 1117Elementary Ear Training II1MUSI 1117 Elementary Ear Training II (1,0,1)
This course is an extension of MUSI 1116 in the development of sight singing and ear training ability. The
class meets two hours per week. Prerequisites: MUSI 1116 and 1311.

MUSI 1117 – Elementary Ear Training II

Spring 2009

Mr. Ray Herman                                                                                 rherman@etbu.edu

J.G. 103, Ext. 2161                                    Office Hours as posted on bulletin board

 

 

            I.      Catalog Description: This course is an extension of MUSI 1116 in the development of sight singing and ear training ability. The class meets three hours per week for ten weeks.

 

         II.      Prerequisites:  MUSI 1116 and 1311.

 

     III.      Curriculum requirement:  BA – Music Major; BM – Sacred Music Major, Vocal Performance Major, Piano Performance Major, All-Level Music Education Major; Minors – Music Theory, Conducting.

 

      IV.      Textbooks (required):

a.      Music for Sight Singing, 7th Edition. Ottman and Rogers

b.      Dictation Packet - provided

 

          V.      Course Objectives:

·         To demonstrate reliable singing and music reading using folk, western, and nonwestern classical music;

·         To notate melodies, rhythms and harmonic progressions;

·         To accurately identify harmonic intervals and chord functions;

·         To detect melodic, rhythmic, and harmonic errors;

·         To develop the ability to use solfege syllables.

 

      VI.      Teaching Methodology/Course Requirements:

1. Sight Singing (Performance):  Activities will be given in class to develop the ability to read rhythms and pitches accurately.  Quizzes may be given in any class period without prior notice.  Material for these quizzes may be taken from the textbook, computer assignments, or outside sources.  Five tests, to include four unit tests plus the final exam, will be given according to the course schedule.

 

2. Ear Training (Written):  Class activities will be used to develop the ability accurately to identify and notate rhythmic, melodic and harmonic examples.  Quizzes may be given in any class period without prior notice.  Material for these quizzes may be taken from the textbook, computer assignments, or outside sources.  Students also will be given assignments on the Aurelia software program.  As only one attempt will be allowed on each Aurelia quiz activity, students are encouraged to repeat all these exercises until they have mastered the skill.  Three Aurelia tests and five in class written tests, to include four unit tests plus the final exam, will be given according to the course schedule.

 

   VII.      Attendance/Participation Requirements:

According to the ETBU catalogue (p.21), “(t)o be eligible to earn credit in a course, the student must attend at least 75 percent of all class meetings.” The ninth absence, for any reason including but not limited to school activities, will result in failure of the class and loss of course credit.  Any student who fails to be seated in the classroom by the beginning of the class will be counted as tardy. Two tardies will be equivalent to one absence. Prior notification of any absence will be expected when possible. No course work missed due to absence will be made up unless prior arrangements have been made and the absence is the result of either a University approved event or other reason deemed acceptable by the instructor.

 

VIII.      Cell Phone Policy: As a courtesy to the instructor and the other students, please turn-off all cell-phones and other electronic paging devices before rehearsal. A student expecting an emergency call may leave his/her phone on silent (vibrate) if he/she has communicated with the instructor before the beginning of class. Any student whose cell-phone rings during class may be asked to leave.

 

      IX.      Grade Computation:

Tests:

            Ear Training             30%

            Sight Reading           30%

            Aurelia                       20%   

Assignments:                                   20%   

A=90-100

B=80-89

C=70-79

D=60-69

F=59 and below

 

 

         X.      Disability Statement: Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.  If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor. 

 

                       

 

MUSI 1117 Semester Schedule (Tentative)

 

January 12                Course Introduction / Distribution of Packets /Review

January 14-16           Review

 

Date

New Items Studied

 

Intervals / Tones

Harmony

Rhythm

January 19-23

7th

Major/Minor

sonorities

Triplet

Test 1 – January 23

January 26-30

 

Diminished/Augmented sonorities

 

February 2-6

Tritone

I, V (+ cadence)

Inversions

Duplet

Test 2 – February 6     Aurelia Test 1 Closed

February 9-13

 

IV (+ cadence)

Inversions

 

February 16-23

Passing Tone

Neighbor Tone

II

Inversions

Syncopation

Test 3 – February 23     Aurelia Test 2 Closed

February 25-27

Band Tour

Aurelia Assignment

March 2-6

Suspension

Retardation

VI (+ cadence)

Inversions

 

March 9-13

 

III

Inversions

 

Test 4 – March 13     Aurelia Test 3 Closed

March 16-20

Spring Break

March 23-27

 

VII

Inversions

 

March 30

 

 

 

April 1           

Final Exam

 

Examples in the Ottman text will be studied which support the above outline.

 

 
MUSI 1312Elementary Harmony II3MUSI 1312 Elementary Harmony II (3,0,3)
This course is a continuation of MUSI 1311 with the addition of secondary chords, the dominant seventh, the
supertonic seventh, modulation to the closely related keys, and harmonization of chorale melodies based on the
study of harmonies and non-harmonic devices as used in the chorales of J. S. Bach. Prerequisites: Music 1311

MUSI 1312.01 Elementary Harmony II
Spring 2009

Professor:  Dr. Randall Sulton

 

Office:  Jenna Guest, Room 108

 

Phone:  923-2164

 

Office Hours:  TBA; check the bulletin board outside my office

 

Email:    rsulton@etbu.edu

 

Course Data:  MWF 9-9:50; JGMB 138

 

Course Prerequisite

Musi 1311

Catalog Description

This course is a continuation of MUSI 1311 with the addition of secondary chords, the dominant seventh, the supertonic seventh, modulation to the closely related keys, and harmonization of chorale melodies based on the study of harmonies and non-harmonic devices as used in the chorales of J. S. Bach.  Prerequisite: MUSI 1311

Course Textbook(s)

Tonal Harmony , 6th ed.- Stefan Kostka, Dorothy Payne
Copyright - 2004
ISBN – 0-07-285260-7

Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th ed. - Stefan Kostka, Dorothy Payne
Copyright - 2004
ISBN – 0-07-285261-5

Course Objectives

1.     to be able to label and to notate all diatonic triads and seventh chords in all possible inversions 

2.     to be able to organize the above-mentioned chords into strong harmonic progressions based on the principles and part-writing examples found in the chorales of J. S. Bach 

3.     to be able to label all non-chord tones and to use them in part-writing exercises

4.     to be able to label and notate secondary dominants and secondary leading-tone chords

5.     to be able to recognize and label cadences, phrases, and periods                                

Evaluation and Grade Computation

Tests 70%           
Final comprehensive exam 30%    

 

OR

 

Tests 60%

Final comprehensive exam 40%

 

The computation that most benefits the student will be used in determining the semester grade.

 

 

Final Exam

The final exam will be given on Monday, April 27 from 10:30-12:20 pm in accordance with the University Spring 2009 Exam Schedule.                 

Attendance / Participation Requirements

See p. 21 of the 2007-8 ETBU Catalog. Attendance and homework assignments are critical components of this class.  Miss class at your own risk.  You are responsible for any material discussed or assignments made in class even in you are absent.  I begin my classes on time--I will not repeat myself for latecomers.

 

Disability Statement

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.   If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee, the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.    

Course Outline / Material to be Covered

Tentative Schedule

 

1/12-23  Ch. 7     

1/26        Test 1

1/28- 2/4                Ch. 8, 9

2/6          Test 2

2/9-13    Ch. 11, 12

2/16        Test 3

2/18-25  Ch. 13-15

2/27        Test 4

3/2-25    Ch. 16

3/27        Test 5

3/30- 4/8                Ch. 17

4/13        Test 6

4/15-22  Ch. 10

4/24        Test  7

4/27        Final Exam at 10:30-12:20

 

 
MUSI 2116Advanced Ear Training I1MUSI 2116 Advanced Ear Training I (1,0,1)
Development of advanced sight singing ability and aural acuity relative to intervals, chords, and rhythms is
experienced in Advanced Ear Training I. This class meets two hours per week. Prerequisites: MUSI 1117.

MUSI 2116 – Advanced Ear Training I

MWF 9:00-9:50 a.m.

JGMB 147

Fall 2008

 

Dr. Douglas Lockard                                                                        Redwine 106, Ext 2167

dlockard@etbu.edu                                                                                                            Office hours as posted

 

 

I.      Course Description: Development of advanced sight singing and aural acuity relative to intervals, chords, and rhythms is experienced in Advanced Ear Training I. This class meets three hours per week for ten weeks.

 

II.      Prerequisites:  MUSI 1117.

 

III.      Curriculum requirement:  BM – Sacred Music Major, Vocal Performance Major, Piano Performance Major, All-Level Music Education Major; BA – Music Major.

 

IV.      Textbooks (required): Music for Sight Singing, 7th ed. by Ottman and Rogers

Ear Training: A Technique for Listening, 7th ed. By Benward and Kolosick

 

V.      Objectives:

·         To demonstrate reliable singing and music reading using folk, western, and nonwestern classical music;

·         To notate chromatic and modulating melodies, challenging rhythms and harmonic progressions;

·         To accurately identify harmonic intervals and chord functions;

·         To detect melodic, rhythmic, and harmonic errors;

·         To develop the ability to use solfege syllables  

VI.      Assignments:

1. Sight Singing (Performance):  Activities will be given in class to develop the ability to read rhythms and pitches accurately.  Quizzes may be given in any class period without prior notice.  Material for these quizzes will be taken from the textbook, computer assignments, and outside sources.  Four tests will be given during the semester according to the course schedule found on the Student Toolbox.

 

2. Ear Training (Written):  Class activities will be used to develop these skills.  Students will also be given practice assignments on the Aurelia software program.  Four written tests will be given during the semester according to the course schedule found on the Student Toolbox.

 

VII.      Attendance/Participation Requirements:

According to the ETBU catalogue (p.21), “(t)o be eligible to earn credit in a course, the student must attend at least 75 percent of all class meetings.” The eighth absence will result in failure of the class and loss of course credit. Any student who fails to be seated in the classroom by the beginning of the class will be counted as tardy. Three tardies will be equivalent to one absence. It is this instructor’s policy that two non-university/instructor approved absences will lower the student’s final grade by one letter, four non-university/instructor approved absences will lower the student’s final grade by two letters, and six non-university/instructor approved absences will lower the student’s final grade by three letters. Instructor approved absences will include a death in the family or the student’s doctor certified illness. All absences count when calculating credit for a course. No course work missed due to absence will be made up unless prior arrangements have been made and the absence is the result of a university/instructor approved event.

 

·         Grade Computation:

Quizzes:                                     35%                

Tests:                                          35%                

Assignments:                              15%                

Final Exam:                                15%                

              

A=90-100

B=80-89

C=70-79

D=60-69

F=59 and below

 

 

 

VII.     Disability Accommodation Statement:

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.  If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.

 


 

Advanced Ear Training I – Fall 2008

 

Course Schedule (Approximate)

August 25                         Course Introduction; Review of Unit 7

                  August 27                         Unit 8

                  August 29                         Unit 8

                  September 1                      Unit 8

                  September 3                      Unit 8

                  September 5                      Sight Singing Test 1

                  September 8                      Ear Training Test 1 

                  September 10                    Unit 9

                  September 12                    Unit 9

                  September 15                    Unit 9

                  September 17                    Unit 9

                  September 19                    Ear Training Test 2

                  September 22                    Sight Singing Test 2

                  September 24                    Unit 10

                  September 26                    Unit 10

                  September 29                    Unit 10

                  October 1                          Unit 10

                  October 3                          Unit 10

                  October 6                          Unit 10           

                  October 8                          Ear Training Test 3

                  October 10                                    Sight Singing Test 3

                  October 13                                    Unit 11

                  October 15                                    Unit 11

                  October 17                                    Unit 11

                  October 20                                    Unit 11

                  October 22                                    Unit 11

                  October 24                                    Unit 11           

                  October 27                                    Ear Training Test 4

                  October 29                                    Sight Singing Test 4

 

                  Final Exam – Monday, November 3, 2008; 9:00 a.m.

 

A student who wishes to improve his/her final grade may elect to attend class following the Nov. 3 final exam. Additional class and Aurelia assignments will be completed and a second final exam will be given on Wednesday, Dec. 10, 8:00-9:50 a.m.

 
MUSI 2312Advanced Harmony3

MUSI 2312 Advanced Harmony (3,0,3)
Through extensive analysis and part-writing exercises, this course examines the altered and chromatic harmonies
of the common practice period through the late 19th century. Prerequisite: MUSI 1312.

 

MUSI 2312.01 Advanced Harmony
Fall 2008

Professor:  Dr. Randall Sulton

 

Office:  Jenna Guest, Room 108

 

Phone:  923-2164

 

Office Hours:  TBA; check the bulletin board outside my office

 

Email:    rsulton@etbu.edu

 

Course Data:  MWF 11-11:50; JGMB 136

 

Course Prerequisite

MUSI 1312

Catalog Description

Through extensive analysis and part-writing exercises, this course examines the altered and chromatic harmonies of the common practice period through the late 19th century.

Course Textbook(s)

Tonal Harmony , 5th ed.- Stefan Kostka, Dorothy Payne
Copyright - 2004
ISBN – 0-07-285260-7

Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 5th ed. - Stefan Kostka, Dorothy Payne
Copyright - 2004
ISBN – 0-07-285261-5

Course Objectives

1. to be able to analyze music of the common practice era (through the late 19th century) 

2. to be able to apply correct part writing in the use of borrowed chords, Neapolitan chords, augmented-sixth chords, altered dominants, and expanded tertian sonorities (9th, 11th, 13th chords)


 

Grade Computation

Tests 70%                                                             AND       Tests 60%           
Final comprehensive exam 30%                                     Final comprehensive exam 40%

 

The computation that most benefits the student will be used in determining the semester grade.

Final Exam

The final exam will be given on Monday, December 8th, from 10:30-12:20 pm in accordance with the University Fall 2008 Exam Schedule.                 

 

 

Attendance / Participation Requirements

See p. 21 of the 2008-9 ETBU Catalog. Attendance and homework assignments are critical components of this class.  Miss class at your own risk.  You are responsible for any material discussed or assignments made in class even if you are absent.  I begin my classes on time--I will not repeat myself for latecomers.

 

Disability Statement

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.   If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee, the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.    

Course Outline / Material to be covered

Tentative Schedule

 

Daily readings and/or exercises will be assigned from the text and /or workbook.


8/25 Review Secondary dominants Ch. 16
8/27-9/1 More secondary functions Ch. 17
9/3 Test on secondary functions
9/5-9/12 Modulation Ch. 18
9/15 Test on Ch. 18
9/17-22 Ch. 19 More Modulation
9/24 Test on Ch. 19
9/26-10/3 Ch. 21 Mode mixture
10/6 Test on Ch. 21
10/8-10 Ch. 22 Neapolitan chord
10/13 Test on Ch. 22
10/15-24 Ch. 23 Augmented sixth chords
10/27 Test on Ch. 23

10/29-11/5 Ch. 24 More augmented sixth chords

11/7 Test on Ch. 24

11/10-11/14 Ch. 25 Enharmonic spellings and modulations
11/17 Test on Ch. 25
11/19-21 Ch. 26 Further elements of harmonic vocabulary
11/24-28 Thanksgiving Holidays

12/1-3 Continue Ch. 26
12/5 Test on Ch. 26
12/8 Comprehensive Final Exam:  Monday, 10:30-12:20 pm

 

 

 
MUSI 2117Advanced Ear Training II1MUSI 2117 Advanced Ear Training II (1,0,1)
This is an extension of MUSI 2116 in the development of advanced sight singing and ear training ability.
Advanced Ear Training II meets two hours each week. The student must make application for a degree plan
to avoid a grade of “I” (Incomplete) and to avoid losing music scholarships. Prerequisites: MUSI 2116 and
2312.

MUSI 2117.01 – Advanced Ear Training II

MWF 9:00-9:50 a.m.

JGMB 147

Spring 2009

 

Dr. Douglas Lockard                                                                        Redwine 106, Ext 2167

dlockard@etbu.edu                                                                                                            Office hours as posted

 

 

                   I.Course Description: This course is an extension of MUSI 2116 in the development of advanced sight singing and ear training ability.  Advanced Ear Training II meets three hours each week for ten weeks.     

          II.      Prerequisites:  MUSI 2116 and 2312.

 

       III.      Curriculum requirement:  BM – Sacred Music Major, Vocal Performance Major, Piano Performance Major, All-Level Music Education Major; BA – Music Major.

 

        IV.      Textbook (required): Music for Sight Singing, 7th ed. by Ottman and Rogers

Ear Training: A Technique for Listening, 7th ed. By Benward and Kolosick

 

           V.      Objectives:

·         To demonstrate reliable singing and music reading using folk, western, and nonwestern classical music;

·         To notate chromatic and modulating melodies, challenging rhythms and harmonic progressions;

·         To accurately identify harmonic intervals and chord functions;

·         To detect melodic, rhythmic, and harmonic errors;

·         To develop the ability to use solfege syllables  

 

     VII.      Assignments:

1. Sight Singing (Performance):  Activities will be given in class to develop the ability to read rhythms and pitches accurately.  Quizzes may be given in any class period without prior notice.  Material for these quizzes will be taken from the textbook, computer assignments, and outside sources.  Five tests will be given during the semester according to the course schedule found on the syllabus.

 

2. Ear Training (Written):  Class activities will be used to develop these skills.  Students will also be given practice assignments on the Auralia software program. Five written tests will be given during the semester according to the course schedule found on the syllabus.

   

  VIII.      Attendance/Participation Requirements:

According to the ETBU catalogue (p.21), “(t)o be eligible to earn credit in a course, the student must attend at least 75 percent of all class meetings.” The eighth absence will result in failure of the class and loss of course credit. Any student who fails to be seated in the classroom by the beginning of the class will be counted as tardy. Three tardies will be equivalent to one absence. It is this instructor’s policy that two non-university/instructor approved absences will lower the student’s final grade by one letter, four non-university/instructor approved absences will lower the student’s final grade by two letters, and six non-university/instructor approved absences will lower the student’s final grade by three letters. Instructor approved absences will include a death in the family or the student’s doctor certified illness. All absences count when calculating credit for a course. No course work missed due to absence will be made up unless prior arrangements have been made and the absence is the result of a university/instructor approved event.

 

 

        IX.      Grade Computation:

Quizzes:                                     35%                

Tests:                                          35%                

Assignments:                              15%                

Final Exam:                                15%                

              

A=90-100

B=80-89

C=70-79

D=60-69

F=59 and below

 

 

 

XI.       Disability Accommodation Statement:

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.  If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.


 

Advanced Ear Training II – Spring 2009

 

VIII. Course Schedule (Approximate)

January 12                         Review of Unit 11

                  January 14                         Unit 12

                  January 16                         Unit 12

                  January 19                         Unit 12

                  January 21                         Unit 12

                  January 23                         Sight Singing Test 1

                  January 26                         Ear Training Test 1 

                  January 28                         Unit 13

                  January 30                         Unit 13

                  Feb. 2                                Unit 13

                  Feb. 4                                Unit 13

                  Feb. 6                                Sight Singing Test 2

                  Feb. 9                                Ear Training Test 2

                  Feb. 11-13                         NO CLASS--TMEA  

                  Feb. 16                              Unit 14

                  Feb. 18                              Unit 14

                  Feb. 20                              Unit 14

                  Feb. 23                              Unit 14

                  Feb.25                               Auralia Assignment/Band Tour

                  Feb. 27                              Auralia Assignment/Band Tour

                  March 2                             Unit 14           

                  March 4                             Ear Training Test 3

                  March 6                             Sight Singing Test 3                         

                  March 9                             Unit 15

                  March 11                           Unit 15

                  March 13                           Unit 15                                              

                  March 16-20                     Spring Break                         

                  March 23                           Unit 15           

                  March 25                           Unit 15

                  March 27                           Sight Singing Test 4

                  March 30                           Ear Training Test 4

                   

                  Final Exam – Wednesday, April 1, 9:00-9:50

 

A student wishing to improve his/her final grade may elect to attend class following the April 1 final exam.  Additional class and Auralia assignments will be completed and a second final exam will be administered on Wednesday, April 29, 8:00-9:50 a.m. in JGMB 147.

 

 
MUSI 3303Form and Analysis3MUSI 3303 Form and Analysis (3,0,3)
This course is an introduction to the principle formal structures and processes of the 18th and 19th centuries,
including fugue, binary, ternary, rondo, variation, and sonata forms. Prerequisite: MUSI 2312.

 

MUSI 3303 Form and Analysis

Spring 2009

Instructor:

Dr. Thomas R. Webster

            Office: JGMB 102                   

            Phone:  923-2158                      

            Email:   twebster@etbu.edu           

            Office Hours:    MWF: 9:00-10:00; 11:00-12:00; 2:00-3:00

                                    T:  8:00-9:00

                                    R:  8:00-9:00; 2:00-3:00

 

Course Information

Description:  This course is an introduction to the principle formal structures and processes of the 18th and 19th centuries, including fugue, binary, ternary, rondo, variation, and sonata forms.  Prerequisite:  MUSI 2312.  

           

            Prerequisite:  MUSI 2312 Advanced Harmony

 

Curriculum requirement:  This course is a basic musicianship requirement on all ETBU music major programs.

 

Textbooks:    

            Tonal Harmony, 6th ed., Stefan Kostka and Dorothy Payne

This text is required in MUSI 1311, 1312, and 2312, all prerequisites for this course.  We will use only one chapter (Chapter 10) from this text as introductory material.  Students should already have this textbook and the supplementary workbook from previous courses.  Students who transfer credits for those courses to ETBU from another institution and do not have this book are not expected to purchase it.

 

Lessons in Music Form, Percy Goetschius

NOTE: The Goetschius text is out of print, but is available by permission of the publisher on Toolbox and at the following website: Project Gutenberg: Online Book Reader (http://www.gutenberg.org/catalog/world/readfile?fk_files=255586&pageno=1)

 

Anthology of Musical Analysis, 6th Edition, Charles Burkhart. (not required)

Electronic Resources (primarily “ebrary”) are available through the Jarrett Library.  These resources will be used extensively.  Students are encouraged to purchase the anthology listed above, however, the works to be used are available through the University Library.

 


 

Course Objectives: 

·         To further develop an understanding of the common elements and organizational patterns of music and their interaction, and the ability to employ this understanding in aural and visual analysis;

·         To acquire sufficient understanding of musical forms, processes, and structures to use this knowledge in compositional, performance, scholarly, pedagogical, and historical contexts, according to the requisites of their specializations;

·         To acquire the ability to place music in historical and stylistic contexts;

 

Also:

·         While synthesis is a lifetime process, by the end of undergraduate study students must be able to work on musical problems by combining, as appropriate to the issue, their capabilities in performance; aural, verbal, and visual analysis; composition and improvisation; history and repertory; and technology.

 

Assignments and Quizzes:

Reading and analysis assignments will be made for each class period.  Though these assignments will not be collected and graded, they will be used for class discussion and elaboration.  Students who attend class without their required resources and completed homework will not be prepared to participate in the class discussion and activities, and thus will benefit minimally from the discussion.  If it becomes necessary, the professor may choose to implement quizzes at the beginning of class to encourage improved class preparation and promptness.  In this case, all quizzes will be averaged together to account for one additional test grade.

 

Periodically the instructor will provide written evaluations of each student’s class participation and preparation grade.  This evaluation may be sent in the form of an email, a letter or note distributed in class, or a note written on a graded test or quiz.  Students are welcome to discuss this grade with the instructor at any time during the semester.  Students who attend class consistently, arrive on time, provide evidence that the reading assignments have been completed, complete written analysis assignments, and ask thoughtful questions regarding the material will receive a desirable “Preparation and Participation” grade. 

 

Assignments will be primarily of two types: 1) written responses to the questions in the text, and 2) analysis of music examples.  The written responses to the questions in the text should reflect the language used in the text.  The student may choose to add additional information in their own words to aid the their comprehension of the material.  The student may not seek outside sources to answer the question in an effort to avoid reading the textbook.  The analysis assignments will be taken primarily from the required anthology.  These examples allow the student to make practical application of the course objectives.  Students may choose to work in small groups to complete the assignments of both types. However, group work that allows students to complete assignments without understanding material is counterproductive and will only lead to a poor performance on in-class quizzes and tests. 

 

Tests:

Tests will focus primarily on the unit or chapters studied since the previous test, however, as is the nature of this discipline, the tests will require students to understand and successfully process the material covered throughout the course and including all prerequisite courses (MUSI 1311, 1312, 2312).

 


 

Final Exam:

The final exam for the course will be administered on Thursday, April 30, 2009 from 9:30-11:20.  Students may not request permission to take the exam earlier in order to facilitate an earlier departure from campus.  No reasons other than an unavoidable emergency will be acceptable for the purposes of making up the final exam.

 

Evaluation and Grade Computation:

Daily class preparation and participation  25%                

Tests                                                                50%                
Final exam                                                         25%     

           

A=90-100         B=80-89           C=70-79           D=60-69          F=0-59

 

Attendance/Participation Requirements: 

The nature of this course requires students to complete various types (reading, analysis, etc) of homework assignments and come to class prepared to discuss their work.  Missing class will be a tremendous detriment to the students understanding of the subject and success on the tests and final exam.  Thus, students are expected to attend every class, and to inform the professor if they need to miss for any reason.  Students may make up tests only when advance notice of the absence is given to the professor and when the professor deems the reason to be acceptable.  Students must make arrangements to make up quizzes and tests prior to any absence, even when that absence is approved by the University Office of Academic Affairs.  If a student has an emergency that prevents him/her from providing advance notice of an absence, the professor will consider those circumstances after the fact.  Students are responsible for any material discussed or assignments made in class.

 

In accordance with ETBU policy, “the student must attend at least 75% of all class meetings” (ETBU Academic Catalog, p. 21). Any student whose absences exceeds 75% (e.g. more than 7 absences for this course) will receive a failing course grade. Three tardies count as one absence.

 

In addition to the attendance and participation requirements listed above, students are expected to behave in manner that is not disruptive to the class.  While a student may choose not to participate or perhaps even sleep during class, such behavior typically does not hinder the educational opportunities of anyone other than that student.  However, behavior such as talking during class, arriving late, leaving early, or leaving during class to take care of personal business is very disruptive to the instructor and other students in the class.  This behavior will not be tolerated, and students who demonstrate this manner of behavior will be addressed privately by the instructor, and the participation grade will be negatively affected.  If the problem persists after the instructor has addressed the situation, then the instructor will ask the student to leave the class and make an official report to the Dean of Students. 

 

All cell phones should be turned off during class, and students will not be allowed to use cell phones during any class session.  Students will not be allowed to leave the class during the administration of a quiz or test. 

 


 

Academic Misconduct:

Any and all students engaging in academic misconduct will receive a failing grade on the exam in question, and the case may be referred to the Dean of Students for appropriate disciplinary action.

 

 

Tentative Course Outline

 

NOTE:  This schedule may change as needed throughout the semester.  Any changes to the test dates will be discussed in class, and students will be given sufficient notice of any exam.

                        

Jan 13-20          Course Introduction – Syllabus Review

                       

UNIT I: Fundamental Elements

                        Chapter 10: Cadences, Phrases and Periods (Kostka/Payne)

                                    Cadences

                                    Cadences and Harmonic Rhythm

\                                  Motives and Phrases

                                    Period Forms

                                    The Sentence

                        ASSIGNMENT:

                                    Checkpoint (page 160)

                                    Self-Test 10-1

                                    Exercise 10-1 (workbook)

 

                        Chapter I: Introduction (Goetschius)

                                    The Necessity of Form in Music

                                    The Evidences of Form in Music

                                    Unity and Variety          

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 1 (LiMF, pg. 10)

Jan 22            TEST 1

 

UNIT II: BINARY STRUCTURES

Jan 27-Feb 5    Chapter IX: The Two-Part Song-Form

                                    The Song-form or Part-form

                                    The Parts

                                    The First Part

                                    The Second Part

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 9

                                    Sonata; Beethoven

                                                Op. 57, Andante, Theme

                                                Op. 109, Andante, Theme

                                                Op. 111, last movement, Theme of Variations

                                                Op. 79, Andante, ms 1-8

                                                            Last movement, ms 1-16

                                                Op. 54, ms 1-24 (each Part repeated)

                                                Op. 31, No. 3, Menuetto (without Trio)

                                                Op. 26, “Trio” of Scherzo

                                                            Last movement, ms 1-28 (second part repeated)

                                                Op. 27, No. 2, “Trio” of Allegretto

                                    Sonata, No. 2, Andante, ms 1-20, 21-40; Mozart

                                    Schuman, Op 68, Nos. 7, 4, 35, 42, 23 (repeated; last 16 ½ measures, coda)

                                    Ach Gott und Herr, Chorale (pg.609)

                                    Symphony No. 101; Haydn

                                                III, Trio only

                                                Finale, mm. 1-28           

                                    Sonata, Op. 2. No. 1; Beethoven

                                                Menuetto only  

                                                Trio only

                                    Album for the Young; Schumann

                                                Nos. 1, 6

                                    Prelude No. 20; Chopin

                                    Symphony No. 100 (“Military”), III Trio only; Haydn

Feb 10        TEST 2

 

UNIT III: Ternary Structures

Feb 10-19         Chapter X: The Three-Part Song-Form

                                    Distinction between Bipartite and Tripartite Forms

                                    Part I

                                    Part II

                                    Part III

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 10

                                    Song Without Words, Mendelssohn

                                                Nos. 22, 35, 32, 45, 42, 31, 27, 46, 25, 20, 26, 36, 47, 12, 15, 3, 43,                                                             40, 37, 2, 33, 30, 1

                                    Schumann, Op. 68

                                                Nos. 3, 8, 12, 14, 16, 17, 21, 24, 25, 26, 28, 29, 33, 34, 37, 38, 40, 41

                                    Sonatas, Beethoven

                                                Op. 2, No. 1, III, both Menuetto and Trio

                                                Op. 2, No. 2, III, both Scherzo and Trio

                                                Op. 2, No. 2, last movement, ms 1-16 (see notes in text)

                                                Op. 7, Largo, ms 1-24

                                                            III, also the Minore

                                                            Last movement, ms 1-38

                                                Op. 10, No. 3, Menuetto

                                                Op. 14, No. 1, III; also the Maggiore

                                                Op. 14, No. 2, II, ms 1-20

                                                Op. 22, Menuetto; also the Minore

                                                Op. 26, ms 1-34

                                                            Scherzo

                                                            Funeral March (also the Trio, what is its form?)

                                    Sonatas, Mozart

                                                No. 15, Andante, ms 1-32

                                                No. 1, last movement, ms 1-50

                                                No. 12, ms 1-18

                                                            II, Trio (see notes in text)

                                                No. 13, Adagio, ms 1-16

                                    Mazurkas, Chopin

                                                Nos. 11, 22, 24, 40, 49

                                    Mendelssohn, Op. 72

                                                Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 6

                                    Mendelssohn, Etudes, Op. 104

                                                Nos. 1, 3

                                    Schumann, Op. 68

                                                No. 32 (see notes in text)

                                                Nos. 8, 9, 11; ms 1-24 (see notes in text)

 

                        Chapter XI: Enlargement of the Three-Part Song-Form

                                    Repetition of the Parts

                                    Exact Repetitions

                                    Modified Repetitions

                                    The Five-part Forms

                                    Group of Parts

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 11

                                    Song Without Words, Mendelssohn

                                                Nos. 3, 4, 8, 10, 11, 12, 15, 17, 19, 21, 23, 24, 27, 31, 34, 39, 43, 44,                                                            46,

                                    Schumann, Op. 68

                                                Nos, 5, 6, 10, 13, 15, 19, 22, 30, 36, 43

                                    Mendelssohn, Op. 72, No. 5

                                    Chopin, Prelude, Op. 28, No. 17

                                    Mozart, Sonata, No. 8, Andante

                                    Mozart, No. 18, Andantino (of the “Fantasia”)

                                    Mazurkas, Chopin

                                                Nos. 1, 2, 4, 5, 8, 15, 16, 18, 37, 44, 48

                                    Mazurkas, Chopin (see notes in text)

                                                Nos. 7, 14, 19, 20, 21, 27, 34, 39, 41,

                                    Momens musicals, Op. 94, No. 3; Schubert

 

Feb 19-Mar 3   Chapter XII: The Song-Form with Trio

                                    The Principal Song

                                    The “Trio” or Subordinate Song

                                    The “Da Capo”

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 12

                                    Sonatas, Beethoven

                                                Op. 2, No. 1, III Menuetto and Trio (see notes in text)

                                                Op. 2, No. 2, Scherzo and Trio

                                                Op. 2, No. 3, Scherzo and Trio

                                                Op. 7, III, Allegro and Minore

                                                Op. 10, No. 2, II, Allegretto (see notes in text)

                                                Op. 10, No. 3, Menuetto and Trio

                                                Op. 14, No. 1, II, Allegretto and Maggiore; a coda is added

                                                Op. 22, Menuetto and Minore

                                                Op. 26, Scherzo, and Trio

                                                Op. 27, No. 1, II Allegro molto (see notes in text)

                                                Op. 27, No. 2, Allegretto and Trio

                                                Op. 28, Scherzo and Trio

                                                Op. 31, No. 3, Menuetto and Trio

                                    Schumann, Op. 68, No. 11 (see notes in text)

                                                Nos. 12, 29, 39, 37 (see notes in text)

                                    Sonatas, Mozart

                                                No. 2, Andante cantabile (see notes in text)

                                                No. 9, II Menuettos (see notes in text)

                                                No. 12, Menuetto

                                    Momens musicals, Op 94, Nos. 1-4 and 6; Schubert

                                    Schumann, Op. 82 (Waldscenen)

                                                Nos. 7 and 8

                                    Mazurkas, Chopin

                                                Nos. 6, 12, 23, 47, 50

                                                Nos. 10, 45, 46, 51 (see notes in text)

Mar 5                        TEST 3

 

UNIT IV: RONDO FORMS

Mar 10-24         Chapter XIII: The First Rondo-Form

                                    Evolution

                                    The Rondo-forms

                                    The First Rondo-form

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 13

                                    Sonatas, Beethoven

                                                Op. 2, No. 1, Adagio

                                                Op. 7, Largo

                                                Op. 2, No. 3, Adagio

                                                Op. 79, Andante

                                                Op. 27, No. 1, Allegro molto

                                    Impromptus, Schubert

                                                Op. 90, Nos. 2 and 3

                                    Mazurka, No. 26; Chopin

                                    Nocturnes, Chopin

                                                Op. 27, No. 1

                                                Op. 32, No. 2

                                                Op. 37, No. 1

                                                Op. 48, No. 1 and No. 2

                                                Op. 55, No. 1

                                                Op. 62, No. 1

                                                Op. 72, No. 1 (E minor, posthumous)

 

                        Chapter XIV: The Second Rondo-Form

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 14

                                    Sonatas, Beethoven

                                                Op. 10, No. 3, last movement

                                                Op. 14, No. 2, last movement (Scherzo)

                                                Op. 79, last movement (very concise)

                                                Op. 13, Adagio (still more concise – not a Five-Part Song-Form)

                                    Polonaise, Op. 89, Beethoven

                                    Rondo in A minor; Mozart

 

                        Chapter XV: The Third Rondo-Form

                                    The Exposition

                                    The Middle Division

                                    The Recapitulation

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 15

                                    Sonatas, Beethoven

                                                Op. 26, last movement (very concise, not a perfect model)

                                                Op. 28, last movement

                                                Op. 7, last movement

                                                Op. 2, No. 3, last movement

                                                Op. 13, last movement

                                                Op. 22, last movement

                                                Op. 14, No. 1, last movement

                                                Op. 31, No. 1, Adagio

                                    Rondos, Beethoven

                                                Op. 51, No. 1

                                                Op. 51, No. 2

                                    Sonata, Mozart

                                                No. 4, last movement

                                                No. 3, last movement

Mar 26        TEST 4

 

UNIT V: SONATA FORMS

Mar 26-Apr 14  Chapter XVI: The Sonatine Form

                                    Classification of the Larger Form

                                    The Sonatine Form

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 16

                                    Sonatas, Beethoven

                                                        Op. 10, No. 1, Adagio

                                                Op. 31, No. 2, Adagio

                                    Andante cantabile in B-flat major; Mendelssohn

                                    Sonata, No. 17, Andante amoroso; Mozart (somewhat longer interlude)

                                    Presto agitato in B minor, Mendelssohn (see notes in text)

 

                        Chapter XVII: The Sonata Form

                                    Origin of the Name

                                    The Sonata Form

                                    The Exposition

                                    The Development, or Middle Division

                                    The Recapitulation

                                    Dissolution

                                    Relation to the Three-Part Song-form

                        ASSIGNMENT: Lesson 17

                                    Sonatas, Beethoven

                                                Op. 2, No. 1 in F Minor, first movement (see notes)

                                                Op. 2, No. 2, first movement

                                                Op. 10, No. 3, Largo

                                                Op. 22, first movement (four or five codettas)

                                                Op. 14, No. 1, first movement

                                                Op. 22, Adagio

                                                Op. 27, No. 2, last movement

                                                Op. 28, first movement

                                                Op. 31, No. 1, first movement

                                                Op. 31, No. 2, first movement

                                                Op. 31, No. 3, first movement (see notes in text)

                                                            Scherzo

                                                Op. 31, No. 2, last movement (see notes in text)

                                                Op. 78, first movement (diminutive)

                                                Op. 79, first movement

                                                Op. 90, first movement, (no “double bar”)

                                                Op. 57, first movement

                                                            Last movement

                                    Sonatas, Mozart

                                                No. 7, first movement

                                                No. 3, first movement

                                                No. 4, first movement; also Andante

                                                No. 8, first movement

                                                No. 6, first movement

                                                No. 1, Andante

                                                No. 6, last movement

                                                K.333,I, and II Andante cantabile

                                    Caprice, Op. 33, No. 2, Mendelssohn

                                    Sonatas, Mendelssohn

                                                Op. 6, first movement

                                                Op. 7, No. 7

                                    Fantasia, Op. 28, last movement

                                    Sonatas, Schubert

                                                Op. 143, first movement

                                                Op. 42, first movement

                                                Op. 120, first movement

                                                Op. 147, first movement

                                                Op. 164, first movement

                                    Beethoven

                                                Symphony, No. 5, first movement

                                                Symphony, No. 1, first Allegro; also second movement; Finale

Apr 14         TEST 5

 

UNIT VI: Imitative Procedures

April 14-23       Fugue and Related Genres

                                    Fugue and Form

                                    Characteristics of Fugue

                                    The Fugue Subject and Answer

                                    Contrapuntal Devices

                                    Fugal Procedure

                                    The Form of a Fugue

                                    The Invention

                        ASSIGNMENT

                                    Bach, Fugue No. 1 from WTC, mm. 14-20

                                    Bach, Fugue No. 2 from WTC

                                    Bach,  Fugue No. 8 from WTC, mm. 77-82

                                    Bach, Fugue No. 13 in F# Major

                                    Bach, Invention No. 1, 15

April 23      TEST 6

 

Final Exam:         Thursday, April 30, 9:30-11:20 A.M.

           

Disability Accommodation Statement

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.  If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.                          

 

 
MUSI 320320th Century Analytical Techniques2MUSI 3203 20th Century Music Analytical Techniques (2,0,2)
This course provides the student with the necessary language and techniques for analyzing a range of 20th
Century musical styles, from Impressionism to nonserial atonality, serialism, and integral serialism. Analysis
is supported by the writing of short compositions reflecting specific compositional styles. Prerequisite:
MUSI 3303.

MUSI 3203.01

20th Century Music Analytical Techniques

Fall 2008

 

Professor: Robert S. Wright

Office: JGMB Room 114

Phone: (903) 923-2166

Office Hours: TBA; check the bulletin board outside the music lab

Email: rwright@etbu.edu

Course Data: TR 9:30-10:20 AM; JGMB 136

 

Course Prerequisite: MUSI 3303

 

Course Description:

This course provides students with the necessary language and techniques for analyzing a variety of 20th century musical styles, including Impressionism, post romanticism, neo-classicism, non-serial atonality,  serialism,  integral serialism, minimalism, electronic media, and aleatoric procedures.

 

Required Texts:

1.       Materials and Techniques of Twentieth-Century Music, Third Edition, by Stefan Kostka. 2006.  ISBN 0-13-193080-X

2.      Anthology of Music for Analysis, by Stefan Kostka and Roger Graybill.  2004.  ISBN 0-13-091544-0

Course Objectives:

1.       Be able to analyze a wide variety of 20th Century music styles.

2.      Be able to compose short works in 20th Century style reflecting a clear knowledge of specified styles and techniques.

3.      Be aware and knowledgeable of major theoretical tools and methods used to analyze non-tonal music.

4.      Be able to integrate such analytical skills into thoughtful and sensitive performances of 20th Century music.

 

Grade Computation:

Chapter Quizzes (4), Listening Quizzes (4), and Daily assignments – 60%

Take Home Analyses (2) – 15%

Final exam: 20th Century Composition – 25%

 

Attendance:

See page 21 of the 2008-2009 ETBU Catalog.  To be eligible to earn credit in this course, each student must attend at least 75 percent of all class meetings. Class will begin promptly at 9:30 – information conveyed at the beginning of class time will not be repeated for latecomers.

 

Final Exam:

Thursday, December 11, 9:30 – 11:20 AM.  Instead of a final exam, a 20th century composition project will be completed.  The composition may be patterned after any of the styles studied this semester.  During the exam time, these compositions will be performed in the recital hall.  Students are responsible for acquiring performers for the realization of their composition.

 

Disability Statement:

Students with a disability may request appropriate accommodations for this course by contacting the Advising Office in SCAR 104 and providing the required documentation.  If accommodations are approved by the Disability Accommodations Committee, the Advising Office will notify you and your professor of the approved accommodations.  You must then discuss these accommodations with your professor.

 

Tentative Course Outline:

8/26 – Course Outline; Chapter 1, The Twilight of the Tonal System

8/28 – Continue study of Chapter 1; Review quiz due; Overtone quiz

9/2 – Chapter 2, Scale Formations in 20th Century Music

9/4 – Continue study of Chapter 2; Listening quiz #1

9/9 – Continue study of Chapter 2; Take home scale quiz

9/11 – Chapter 3, The Vertical Dimension

9/16 – Continue study of Chapter 3; take home chord quiz due

9/18 – Quiz on Chapters 1-3

9/23 – Chapter 4, The Horizontal Dimension

9/25 – Harmonic Progression and Tonality; Listening quiz #2

9/30 – Continue study of Chapter 5

10/2 – Chapter 6, Developments in Rhythm

10/7 – Continue study of Chapter 6

10/9 – Quiz on Chapters 4-6

10/14 – Analyses of selected 20th century music

10/16 – Continued analyses of selected 20th century music

10/21 – Take home analysis due; begin working on 20th century composition

10/23 – Chapter 9, Non-serial Atonality; listening quiz #3

10/28 – Continued study of Chapter 9

10/30 – Quiz on chapter 9

11/4 – Chapter 10, Classical Serialism

11/6 – Continued study of Chapter 10

11/11 – Analysis of 12-tone composition due

11/13 – Chapters 11 & 12, Timbre and Texture: Acoustic and Electronic

11/18 – Chapter 13, Serialism after 1945; Listening quiz #4

11/20 – Chapter 14, The Roles of Chance and Choice in 20th Century Music

12/2 – Chapter 15, Minimalism and Beyond

12/4 – Work on compositions

Final Exam – Thursday, December 11, 9:30 – 11:20 AM; 20th century compositions due

 

 
   Note:  MUSI 3306 (Orchestration) is marked as recommended (3 hours) but perhaps not required?

MUSI 3306 Orchestration (3,0,3)
Practical experience in arranging music compositions for the orchestra is gained from this course.
Accompaniments for solo voices and/or instruments will be arranged to acquaint students with the tone colors
of the orchestra. Some choral arranging will also be included. Prerequisite: MUSI 2312.

 
 Total18  
     

Hardin-Simmons University

http://www.hsutx.edu/academics/music/index.html

http://www.hsutx.edu/academics/music/NewFiles/Bachelor%20of%20Music%20EducChoral.pdf

http://www.hsutx.edu/Media/Website%20Resources/pdf/registrar/08-09Catalog.pdf

 

http://www.hsutx.edu/academics/music/bscherr/courses.htm

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

From the Website: http://www.hsutx.edu/academics/music/bscherr/MUTC_1235a.htm, the following more specific information is included in class syllabi

 
MUTC 1331Funcamentals of Music Look up the official catalog description to go first

Dr. Charles Coltman Syllabus

Course Structure

This course is intended to familiarize students with the harmonic, melodic and rhythmic structure of music. Students will understand the fundamental elements of music and be able to apply them in real-world musical situations.

Course Materials

Fundamentals of Music, 5th ed. by Earl Henry

Daily grades

30%

Midterm

30%

Final

30%

Participation

10%

Week 1

The Notation of Rhythm

Reading: Chapter 1 (pp. 1-24)

Week 2

The Notation of Pitch

Reading: Chapter 2 (pp. 25-44)

Week 3

The Keyboard

Reading: Chapter 3 (pp. 45-66)

Week 4

Simple Meters

Reading: Chapter 4 (pp. 67-94)

Week 5

Major Scales and Keys

Reading: Chapter 5 (pp. 95-122)

Week 6

Intervals

Reading: Chapter 6 (pp. 123-154)

Week 7

Compound Meters

Reading: Chapter 7 (pp. 155-184)

Review for Mid-term on Oct. 13

Week 8

Minor Scales and Keys

Reading: Chapter 8 (pp. 185-218)

Week 9

Modes and Other Scales

Reading: Chapter 9 (pp. 219-240)

Week 10

Introduction to Form

Reading: Chapter 10 (pp. 241-272)

Week 11

Triads

Reading: Chapter 11 (pp. 273-302)

Week 12

Chords and Symbols

Reading: Chapter 12 (pp. 303-330)

Week 13

Tonality

Reading: Chapter 13 (pp. 331-358)

Week 14

Review for Final (Mon. & Wed.) (Thanksgiving)

Week 15Review for Final (Mon. & Wed.) (Juries)
Week 16

Final Exam Monday, Dec. 8, 10:30-12:20 PM

 

 
MUTC 1131Ear Training I11131, 1132 Ear-Training I, II (1-2-0) [#] Includes the development of musical hearing through exercises and organized drill in melodic and harmonic singing (using solfege), and melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic dictation. Must be taken concurrently with MUTC 1133, 1134, 1235 and 1236. Fall (1131) - Spring (1132)

Mr. Lawson Hager, Dean. SYLLABUS

Ear Training, MUTC 1131—Wednesday and Friday—8:00 a.m.

The development of harmonic and melodic hearing skills through organized drill, and the development of reading skills through sight-singing.  TEXT: Music for Sight Singing, 7th Ed., Robert Ottman

Ear Training Tentative Schedule (Chaps. 1-4)

Aug 27-29Intro. of Materials and E. T. Techniques
Sep 3-5Chap. 1, rhythm drill, solfege technique
Sep 10-12Chap. 1
Sep 17-21Chap. 2, tonic triad, Major triad, simple time
Sep 24-26Chap. 2, rhythm drills, melodic dictation
Oct 1-3Chap. 3, melodic major key, compound time
Oct 8-10 Chap. 3, melodic dictation, harmonic dictation
Oct 15-17Chap. 3, sight-singing, dictation
Oct 22-24Chap. 4, Minor keys, sight-singing, dictation
Oct 29-31Chap. 4, melodic and harmonic dictation, sight-singing
Nov 5-7Chap. 4, dictation, sight-singing
Nov 12-14 Chap. 4, extended dictation, new melodies
Nov 19-21 Harmonic dictation, Authentic and Plagal Cadences
Nov 28-30 Thanksgiving Holidays
Dec 3Dictation Final Exam, 8:00 a.m.
Dec 11Sight singing Final Exam, 8:00 a.m. – 10:00 a.m.

Grade percentages

  • Daily grade—50%--includes homework and pop test
  • Major Exams—30%
  • Final Exam—20%

Dr. Kristin Isaacson's syllabus:

Course description

The development of rhythmic, melodic, and harmonic hearing skills through  organized drill, and the development of reading skills through sight singing.

Grade percentage

30%Assignments, quizzes, participation
20%Computer lab sessions
20%Midterm Exam: Wed. October 15, 8:00 a.m. and hearings TBA
30%Final Exam:  Mon. December 8, 8:00-10:00 am

 

 
MUTC 1133Keyboard I11133, 1134 Keyboard I, II (1-1-0) [#] The practical application of harmonic materials studied in MUTC 1131, 1132, 1235 and 1236 on the keyboard. Must be taken concurrently with MUTC 1131, 1132, 1235 and 1236. Fall (1133) - Spring (1134)

Dr. Kristin Isaacson Syllabus; Tentative Schedule

Course Text

Hager, Lawson, Theory Keyboard (Course packet): It is available for purchase in the main music office.

Course Description

Practical application of harmonic materials from MUTC 1235, and MUTC 1131 applied to keyboard.

Course Goals

Learning to play (1) scales (all keys in the circle of fifths in one octave), (2) chord qualities (Major-Augmented-Minor-Diminished), (3) cadential progressions, and (4) harmonization of given melodies.

 
Thursday
1 8/28

1. Introduction; Keyboard Orientation, as needed.

2. Scales in Tetrachord Fingering in Major Keys: Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5.

3. Circle of Keys in the order of fifths (see Week 3, Quiz).

2 9/4

1. Scales in Tetrachord Fingering in Major Keys: Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5.

2. Scales in Tetrachord Fingering in Minor Keys: Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5

3. Circle of Keys in the order of fifths (see Week 3, Quiz).

Quiz: Scales in Tetrachord Fingering in C, G, D, F & Bb Majors.

Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5

3 9/11

1. Scales in Tetrachord Fingering in Major and Minor Keys: Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5.

2. Relative and Parallel Major and Minor Keys: Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5.

3. Five Finger Patters in Major Keys.

a. RH 1-2-3-4-5-4-3-2-1-3-5-3-1; followed by a triad.

b. LH 5-4-3-2-1-2-3-4-5-3-1-3-5; followed by a triad.

Quiz: Circle of Keys – Order of fifths

a. Verbalize order of sharp keys (C-G-D-A-E-B-F#-C#), then

flat keys (Cb-Gb-Db-Ab-Eb-Bb-F-C) in order of ascending fifths.

b. Play the order of sharp keys in single notes (LH 5-1; RH 1-5, hand over hand), in half-notes, then in quarter notes, MM = 100.

c. Play the order of flat keys in single notes (LH 5-1; RH 1-5,

hand over hand), in half-notes, then in quarter notes, MM = 100.

4 9/18

1. Intervals: Hager, pp. 6-7.

2. Five Finger Patters in Minor Keys.

a. RH 1-2-3-4-5-4-3-2-1-3-5-3-1; followed by a triad.

b. LH 5-4-3-2-1-2-3-4-5-3-1-3-5; followed by a triad.

3. Relative and Parallel Major and Minor Keys, up to 3# & 3b: Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5.

4. Triads & Chord Qualities: Handout, p. 71; Hager p. 8.

 

Quiz: Scales in Tetrachord Fingering in A, E, D, B & G Minors.

Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5

5 9/25

1. Chord Qualities: M-A-M-m-d Triads: Handout, p. 71; Hager p. 8.

2. Parallel Triads of the Key and Inversions in C Major: Handout, pp. 134-5; Hager p. 8.

3. Tonic and Dominant in Major Keys: Hager, pp. 10-13.

 

Quiz: Major and their Relative and Parallel Minor Scales in Tetrachord Fingering, up to 3# & 3b.

Hager, pp. 1, 4 & 5

6 10/2

1. Parallel Triads of the Key and Inversions in G & F Majors:

Handout, pp. 134-135; Hager p. 8.

2. Tonic and Dominant in Major Keys: Hager, pp. 10-13.

3. Tonic and Dominant in Minor Keys: Hager, pp. 10-13.

 

Quiz: Chord Qualities: M-A-M-m-d Triads.

Handout, p. 71

7 10/9

Review – Midterm Exam

Quiz: Parallel Triads of the Key and Inversions in G or F Major.

Handout, p. 135

8 10/16 Midterm Exam
9 10/23

1. Warm Up: Major Five Finger Patterns (see Week 4).

2. Tonic and Dominant: Hager, pp.11-13.

3. Melody Harmonization: Hager, p. 13.

4. Subdominant in Major Keys: Hager, p. 14.

10 10/30

1. Warm Up: Major Five Finger Patterns (see Week 4).

2. Subdominant in Major Keys: Hager, p. 14.

3. Subdominant in Minor Keys: Hager, p. 14.

4. I-IV-I-V7-I in Major Keys: Handout, p. 176; Hager, pp. 15-17.

 

Quiz: Melody Harmonization (Comping); LH Bass only; RH Chord.

Hager, p. 13

11 11/6

1. I-IV-I-V7-I in Major Keys: Handout, p. 176; Hager, p. 15.

2. i-iv-i-V7-i in Minor Keys: Handout, p. 176; Hager, p. 15.

3. Comping (RH blocked chord; LH bass note (root) only): Hager, p. 19.

 

Quiz: Chord Progression I-IV-I-V7-I in Major Keys, up to 3# & 3b.

Hager, pp. 16-17

12 11/13

1. I-IV-I-V7-I in Major Keys: Handout, p. 176; Hager, p. 15.

2. i-iv-i-V7-i in Minor Keys: Handout, p. 176; Hager, p. 15.

3. Melody Harmonization (RH melody; LH blocked chord): Hager, p. 19.

 

Quiz: Chord Progression i-iv-i-V7-i in Minor Keys, up to 3# & 3b.

Hager, pp. 16-17

13 11/20

1. Warm Up: I-IV-I-V7-I in C, G & F majors.

2. Melody Harmonization and Comping: Hager, pp. 18 & 20.

                                                                                   

Quiz: Hager, p. 19; (1) Comping; (2) LH Chord; RH Melody.

You are expected to be able to play in both ways
14 11/27 Thanksgiving Holiday
15 12/4 Review for Final Exam
16Final Exam-TBA
Weekly Tests 50%NO MAKE UP TESTS unless absence is due to a preapproved School of Music event. Arrangement should be made with the instructor prior to any excused absence.
Midterm Exam 20%NO MAKE UP EXAM
Final Exam 30%

 

 
MUTC 1235Harmony I21235, 1236 Harmony I, II (2-2-0) [#] A study of the basic materials of music. Also includes principles of voice leading and composition in four-part chorale style. Must be taken concurrently with MUTC 1131, 1132, 1133 and 1134. Fall (1235), Spring (1236)

Mr. Lawson Hager, Dean.  Syllabus

Harmony, MUTC 1235—Monday and Thursday—8:00 a.m.

Developing an understanding of the basic materials of music composition, principles of part-writing all triads and their inversions, harmonies, and seventh chords. TEXT: Tonal Harmony, 6th Ed., Stephan Kostka, Dorothy Payne.  Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th Ed., Stephan Kostka, Dorothy Payne

Harmony tentative schedule (Chapters 1-7), assignments from the workbook as given

Aug 25-28Chap. 1, Introduction, Theory Basics
Sep 1-4Chap. 1
Sep 8-11Chap. 2, Elements of Harmony
Sep 15-18Chap. 3, Triads and seventh chords
Sep 22-25Chap. 3, Exam on triad and seventh chord spellings
Sep 29-Oct 2 Chap. 4, Diatonic chords in major and minor key
Oct 6-9Chap. 5, Principles of voice leading
Oct 13-16Chap. 6, Root position part writing
Oct 20-23Chap. 6
Oct 27-30Chap. 6, Exam root position part writing
Nov 3-6Chap. 7, Harmonic progression
Nov 10-13Chap. 7
Nov 17-20Chap. 1-7, Exam-Theory Basics plus
Nov 24Chap. 1-7
Dec 1Final Review
Dec 8Harmony Final Exam, 8:00 a.m.
Harmony: Workbook assignments (tentative)

Chap. 1

              ex. 1-2   all

              ex. 1-3   all

              ex. 1-4   all

              ex. 1-5   A. – C. even #’s only

              ex. 1-6   A. odd #’s, B. all, C. even #’s, D. all, E. all

Chap. 2

              All exercises will be done in class

Chap. 3

              ex. 3-1  A. & B. in class, C. odd #’s, D. even #’s

              ex. 3-2  A. B. C. odd #’s

              ex. 3-3  A. in class, B. 1, 2, and 3  all

              ex. 3-4  in class

Chap. 4   In class

Chap. 5   In class

Chap. 6

              ex. 6-1  in class

              ex. 6-2  A. all, B. all

              ex. 6-3  A. odd #’s, B. even #’s

              ex. 6-4  A. all, B. 2 & 4, C. 1, D. 2 & 3

Chap. 7

              ex. 7-1 A-B-C. in class, D-E-F. all, G. #2, H. 1-2, I. in class, J. in class

Grade percentages

  • Daily grade—50%--includes homework and pop test
  • Major Exams—30%
  • Final Exam—20%

 

Ms. Hye-Jean Choi Syllabus

Course Description

A Study of the basic materials of music composition; principles of part-writing all triads and their inversions, harmonies, and seventh chords.

 

Her Grading policy was:

Grading Policy

Daily Grade 50%includes assignments and quizzes
Midterm Exam 20% 
Final Exam 30% 

Dr. Peter Neubert also taught 1235.  His syllabus

Course Purpose

The aim of this course is to develop a working knowledge of the basic materials of music composition from the common practice era. Students will learn to identify, analyze and write  triads and seventh chords in four parts. His grading policy was the same as Ms. Choi's

 
MUTC 1132Ear Training II1Mr. Lawson Hager, Dean.  Syllabus

Ear Training, MUTC 1132—Wednesday and Friday—8:00 a.m.

The development of harmonic and melodic hearing skills through organized drill, and the development of reading skills through sight-singing.  TEXT: Music for Sight Singing, 7th Ed., Robert Ottman

Ear Training Tentative Schedule (Chaps. 6-12)

Jan 14-16Chap. 6 and review
Jan 21-23Chap. 6
Jan 28-30 Chap. 6 (Sight-singing exam)
Feb 4-6Chap. 7
Feb 11Chap. 7 (no class Feb 13)
Feb 18-20Chap. 8 (Sight-singing exam)
Feb 25-27 Chap. 8
Mar 4-6Chap. 9
Mar 9-13Spring Break
Mar 18-20 Chap. 9
Mar 25-27 Chap. 10 and Chap. 11
Apr 1-3 Chap. 10 and Chap. 11
Apr 8-10 Chap. 12
Apr 15-17 Chap. 12
Apr 22-24 Review, Chaps. 1-12
Apr 29 Dictation Final Exam
May 7 Sight singing Final Exam

Grade percentages

  • Daily grade—50%--includes homework and pop test
  • Major Exams—30%
  • Final Exam—20%

Dr. Jeffrey Cottrell Syllabus

Course description:

The development of harmonic and melodic hearing skills through organized drill, and the development of reading skills through sight-singing. 

TEXT: Music for Sight Singing, 7th Ed., Robert Ottman.

Grade percentages

Daily grade—50%--includes homework and pop tests

Major Exams—30%

Final Exam—20%

Ear Training Tentative Schedule (Chaps. 6-12)
Jan 12, 14Chap. 6 and review
Jan 21 Chap. 6 (no class on the19th)
Jan 26, 28 Chap. 6
Feb 2, 4Chap. 7
Feb 9, 11 Chap. 7
Feb 16, 18 Chap. 8
Feb 23, 25 Chap. 8
Mar 2, 4 Chap. 9 (Sight-singing and dictation exams)
Mar 9, 11 Spring Break
Mar 16, 18 Chap. 9
Mar 23, 25 Chaps. 10 & 11
Mar 30, Apr 1 Chaps. 10 & 11
Apr 6, 8 Chap. 12 (Sight-singing and dictation exams)
Apr 13, 15 Chap. 12
Apr 20, 22 Review, Chaps. 1-12
Apr 27, 29 Review, Chaps. 1-12
May 4 8-9:50AM Dictation and Sight singing Final Exams
 
MUTC 1134Keyboard II1Dr. Jeffrey Cottrell Syllabus

Course description

The practical application of harmonic materials studied in MUTC 1131, 1132, 1235 and 1236 on the keyboard.

Text: Hager, Lawson, Theory Keyboard (available in music office).

Goals

Learning to play chord progressions, cadential patterns, figured bass, and harmonizing melodies.

GRADING

A—90-100: accurate pitches and rhythm, correct fingering, at tempo,

            no restarts.

B—80-89: one or two mistakes, mostly correct fingerings, slightly too slow,

            one restart with one or two pauses.

C—70-79: Same as grade B requirements with more pauses, even slower,

            two restarts.

D—60-69: Three restarts, plus even more pauses and tempo problems.

F—59 and below: Student no-showed, or played so badly as to prove they

            do not know the assignment at all.

Grade percentages

Daily grade—60% (includes weekly quizzes)

Midterm Exam—20%

Final Exam—20%

Tentative Schedule

Week 1

Review

Week 2

Quiz: Playing major triads and their inversions in G, F, D, and Bb. See handout.

Week 3

Quiz: progressions using 1st inversions of I, IV, & V in C major. Play

“keyboard style”; LH bass and RH chord. Use bass notes from book in LH and soprano notes in RH (Hager p. 22, #1, 2, 3, 4).

Week 4

Quiz: Progressions using 1st inversions of I, IV, V in F and G major(Hager p. 22, #1, 2, 3, 4).

Week 5

Quiz: building chords from the top note (handout).

Week 6

Quiz: progressions using 2nd inversions of I, IV, V in F or G major (Hager p.22, #6, 7, 8, 9, 10, p. 23 # 1.).

Week 7Review for midterm.
Week 8

Midterm:  by appointment during class and later in the week if necessary.

Week 9

2nd half of semester overview
Week 10Spring Break

Week 11

Quiz: Progressions using the supertonic and leading tone triads in C major and C minor (Hager p.24, #1, 2, 4, 5).

Week 12

Quiz: Progressions using the mediant and submediant triads in G or F major (Hager p. 27, #1, 2, 3).

Week 13

Quiz: Harmonization. Play given chord progressions, adding 3 upper

voices in “keyboard style.” Try to avoid parallel 5ths and 8vas between

soprano and bass (Hager p. 28, #1, 2).

Week 14

Quiz: Progressions using supertonic seventh chords in C, G and F major, C and A minor. (Hager p. 30, #1, 2, 3, 4).

Week 15,

Review for final exam

Week 16

Final Exam, Thursday May 7, 8:00 – 9:50 AM (by appointment).

Ms. Hye-Jean Choi Syllabus

GRADING POLICY

  • 50% Weekly Tests (NO MAKE UP TESTS unless absence is due to a preapproved School of Music event. Arrangement should be made with the instructor prior to any excused absence.)
  • 20% Midterm Exam (NO MAKE UP EXAM)
  • 30% Final Exam (NO MAKE UP EXAM)

Tentative Schedule

Week 1,

Jan 15

1. Semester Overview.

2. Introduction of Inversions: Hager, p. 21.

3. Progressions using the 1st Inversions of I, IV & V: Hager, p. 22.

Week 2,

Jan 22

1. Progressions using the 1st Inversions of I, IV & V: Hager, p. 22.

2. Building Chords from the Top Note: Handout, p. 315.

Quiz: Progressions using the 1st Inversions of I, IV & V in C Major.

Play in Keyboard Style (LH Bass/RH Chord): Keep the bass notes from the book in LH; Keep the soprano notes from the book and add inner notes in RH.

Hager, p. 22, #1, 2, 3 & 4

Week 3, Jan 29

1. Progressions using the 1st Inversions of I, IV & V, up to 2# & 2b:

Hager, p. 22.

2. Building Chords from the Top Note: Handout, p. 315.

3. Progressions using the 2nd Inversions of I, IV & V: Hager, pp. 22-23.

                                         

Quiz: Progressions using the 1st Inversions of I, IV & V in F or G Major.

Hager, p. 22, #1, 2, 3 & 4

Week 4, Feb 5

1. Building Chords from the Top Note: Handout, p. 315.

2. Progressions using the 2nd Inversions of I, IV & V: Hager, pp. 22-23.

3. Keyboard Harmonization “Self Test”: Hager, p. 23.

 

Quiz: Building Chords from the Top Note.

Handout, p. 315

Week 5, Feb 12

1. Progressions using the 2nd Inversions of I, IV & V up to 2# & 2b:

Hager, pp. 22-23.

2. Keyboard Harmonization “Self Test”: Hager, p. 23.

Quiz: Progressions using the 2nd Inversions of I, IV & V in F and G Major.

Hager, p. 22, #6, 7 & 8

Week 6, Feb 19

1. Progressions using the 2nd Inversions of I, IV & V up to 2# & 2b:

Hager, pp. 22-23.

2. Keyboard Harmonization “Self Test”: Hager, p. 23.

3. Progressions for Midterm Exam up to 3# & 3b.

 

Quiz: Progressions using the 2nd Inversions of I, IV & V in F and G Major.

Hager, p. 22, #9 & 10; p. 23, #1

Week 7, Feb 26

Review for Midterm Exam

Quiz: Progressions using the 2nd Inversions of i, iv & V in A Minor.

Hager, p. 22, #5 & 11; p. 23, # 2

Week 8, Mar 5 Midterm Exam

Week 9,

Mar 12

Spring Break
Week 10, Mar 19

1. The Second Half of the Semester Overview.

2. Progressions using the Supertonic Triad: Hager, pp. 24-25.

Week 11,

Mar 26

1. Progressions using the Supertonic Triad: Hager, pp. 24-25.

2. Progressions using the Mediant and Submediant Triads: Hager, pp.

26-27.

3. Keyboard Harmonization “Test Your Skill”: Hager, p. 28.

 

Quiz: Progressions using the Supertonic Triad in C Major.

Hager, p. 24, #1, 2, 4, 5 & 6

Week 12,

Apr 2

1. Keyboard Harmonization “Test Your Skill”: Hager, p. 28.

2. Progressions using the Supertonic Seventh Chord: Hager, pp. 29-30.

3. Progressions using the Supertonic Seventh Chord in Minor Keys:

    Hager, p. 30.

4. Progressions using the Dominant Seventh Chord: Hager, p. 31. 

    

Quiz: Progressions using the Mediant and Submediant Triads

in G or F Major.

Hager, p. 27, #1, 2 & 3

Week 13,

Apr 9

1. Progressions using the Supertonic Seventh Chord up to 2# & 2b:

Hager, pp. 29-30.

2. Progressions using the Supertonic Seventh Chord in Minor Keys:

Hager, p. 30.

3. Keyboard Harmonization “Test Your Skill”: Hager, p. 31.

 

Quiz: Keyboard Harmonization “Test Your Skill”

Play the given chord progressions adding three upper voices in keyboard style (LH bass/RH chord). You may label the chords with roman numerals. Try to avoid parallel 5ths and 8ves between soprano and bass.

Hager, p. 28, #1 & 2

Week 14,

Apr 16

1. Progressions using the Supertonic Seventh Chord in Minor Keys:

Hager, p. 30.

2. Keyboard Harmonization “Test Your Skill”: Hager, p. 31.

 

Quiz: Progressions using the Supertonic Seventh Chords

in C Major and G or F Major.

Hager, p. 30, #1, 2, 3 & 4

Week 15,

Apr 23

Review for Final Exam

                                         

Quiz: Progression using Seventh Chords in C and G Majors.

Hager, p. 31, #5 (I-IV6-I6/4-ii6/5-V7-I)

Week 16,

Apr 30

Review for Final Exam

Week 17,

TBA

Final Exam

 

 

 
MUTC 1236Harmony II2

This information was provided from Instructor: Mr. Lawson Hager, Dean. 

Harmony, MUTC 1236—Monday and Thursday—8:00 a.m.

Developing an understanding of the basic materials of music composition, principles of part-writing all triads and their inversions, harmonies, and seventh chords. TEXT: Tonal Harmony, 6th Ed., Stephan Kostka, Dorothy Payne.  Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 6th Ed., Stephan Kostka, Dorothy Payne

Harmony tentative schedule (Chapters 8-15), assignments from the workbook as given

Jan 12-15 Review, Chap. 7
Jan 22 Chaps. 8, 9
Jan 26-29 Chaps. 8, 9
Feb 2-5 Chaps. 8, 9
Feb 9-12 Chap. 10
Feb 16-19 Chaps. 11, 12
Feb 23-26 Chaps. 11, 12
Mar 2-5 Chaps. 11, 12
Mar 9-13 SPRING BREAK
Mar 16-19 Chap.13
Mar 23-26 Chap. 14
Mar 30-Apr 2 Chap. 15
Apr 6-9 Chap. 15
Apr 13-16 Chaps. 1-15, Review
Apr 20-23 Chaps. 1-15, Review
Apr 27 Chaps. 1-15, Review, term project due
May 4 Harmony Final Exam, 8:00 a.m.

Grade percentages

  • Daily grade—50%--includes homework and pop test
  • Major Exams—30%
  • Final Exam—20%
 
MUTC 2131Ear Training III12131, 2132 Ear-Training III, IV (1-2-0) [#] A continuation of 1131 and 1132. Correlated with the materials studied in 2235 and 2236. Includes the study of chromaticism and an introduction to contemporary art music. Must be taken concurrently with MUTC 2133, 2134, 2235, and 2236. Fall (2131) - Spring (2132)  

Dr. Bernard Scherr Syllabus

Course Overview

This course is an extension of sophomore theory in that the presentation of topics is coordinated with the harmony and keyboard courses and focuses on sight singing and dictation.

Course Objectives:

Students will develop skills in sight singing, exercises for which will include melodies, duets, singing while playing, and themes and variations.  In addition, they will develop skills in rhythmic, harmonic and melodic dictation.  The course will incorporate various elements, which will include secondary dominant chords, secondary diminished seventh chords, mode mixture and common chord modulation.

Course Materials

A New Approach to Sight Singing by Berkowitz, Fontrier, and Kraft, 4th Edition

Course Packet for MUTC 2131/2132—Ear Training III/IV by Dr. Bernard Scherr

            (This packet is available in the Music Office. The cost is $5.)

Expectations

Practicing: Each student is responsible for practicing the musical exercises.  Much of this course is based on class participation.  A lack of proper preparation will adversely affect your grade as well as cause embarrassment in front of classmates.  You will not be simply passed over in class because you are not prepared.

Lab Work: Each student will be encouraged to use Auralia in the lab for approximately 30 minutes per week.  Auralia is an excellent aid for practicing ear training.  Please use the login sheet when using Auralia.

Grading Policy

Attendance10%# of total classes/abscences
Exam #120%Dictation and Singing: Week 4
Exam #225%Dictation and Singing: Week 8
Exam #320%Dictation and Singing: Week 12
Exam #425%Dictation and Singing: Finals Week
Total
100% 

Singing: Accuracy in pitch and rhythm is paramount, but dynamics and momentum are also considered.

Dictation: Like singing, accuracy in pitch and rhythm is paramount, but notational clarity is also required.

Class Meetings

Students are required to bring all course materials to each class meeting.  Mondays will be dedicated to singing while Thursdays will be reserved for dictation.

Exam Procedures

Singing: Students will sign up for an individual appointment for this portion of each exam.  There will be two groups of six prepared selections; students will sing one selection from each group.

Dictation: Students will be asked to dictate rhythmic lines, melodies, and chord progressions using Roman numerals.  They might also be asked to identify mistakes in a played example based on a printed selection.

Tentative Schedule

WeeksTopic-SingingTopic-Dictation
1-4Functional Chromaticism

Secondary Dominant Chords-1st and 2nd Position

16th-note divisions- 2 bars; 4 bar melodies

1:1 two-part melodies

5-8Modulation to Closely Related Keys

Secondary Dominant Chords-3rd and 4th Position; Secondary Leading Tone Chords-1st Position

16th-note divisions- 4 bars; 6 bar melodies

2:1 two-part melodies

9-12Mode Mixture

Mode Mixture and Secondary Chords

Syncopation-8th-note level; 8 bar melodies

3:1 two-part melodies

13-16Continuance of previous topics

Neapolitan 6 and Secondary Chords

Syncopation-16th-note level; 8 bar melodies

3:1 two-part melodies

 

 
MUTC 2133Keyboard III12133, 2134 Keyboard III, IV (1-1-0) [#] Practical application of harmonic materials studied in MUTC 2131, 2132, 2235, and 2236. Includes some transposition. Must be taken concurrently with MUTC 2131, 2132, 2235, and 2236. Fall (2133) - Spring (2134)  

Dr. Bernard Scherr Syllabus

Course Overview

This course will help you develop keyboard harmony skills. These skills are developed through (1) scales, (2) chord progressions, (3) realization of figured bass, and (4) harmonization of chorale melodies.

Course Objectives:

Playing scales (up to four flats and/or sharps in two octaves), cadential patterns (authentic, imperfect, and plagal), chord progressions, suspensions, and seventh chords.

Course Materials

Course Packet, compiled and edited by Dr. Bernard Scherr

            (This packet is available in the Music Office. The cost is $5.)

Grading Policy

Weekly Tests 50%
Midterm Exam20%
Final Exam30%
Total
100%

Expectations

Attendance: Each student is responsible for punctual attendance of all class meetings.

Practicing: Each student is required to practice all assignments until learned.

Class Meetings

Each class meeting you are required to bring your course packet. Each meeting consists of a test on the previous week's material, a review of previous material as needed, and the introduction of new material.

Exam Procedures

Students must be ready to test the assigned material at the beginning of class. Once called upon, students must perform or earn a failing grade (50). If a student misses a class and has not notified the instructor beforehand, he/she can make up the test the following week for a maximum score of 60. If the instructor is notified beforehand, and the absence is due to an HSU approved event, the student can make up the test for full credit; if the absence is due to illness, a maximum score of 70 can be earned (unless the student has a doctor’s note, then full credit is possible).

Tentative Schedule

Week
Wednesday 8:00-8:50
1Scales: the major sharp keys in two octaves 
Progressions: I-IV-I and I-V-I in all 3 positions and in sharp keys (including minor)
2Scales: the major flat keys in two octaves
Progressions: I-IV-I and I-V-I in all 3 positions and in flat keys (including minor)
Cadences-Morris, Chapter 1: (in sharp keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3
3Scales: the minor sharp keys in two octaves
Progressions: I-IV-V-I in all 3 positions and in sharp keys (including minor)
Cadences-Morris, Chapter 1: (in flat keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3
4

Scales: the minor flat keys in two octaves

Progressions: I-IV-V-I in all 3 positions and in flat keys (including minor)
Sequences-Morris, Chapter 1: 1-2 in sharp keys

5Progressions: I-VI-IV-V-I in sharp keys (including minor)
Sequences-Morris, Chapter 1: 1-2 in flat keys
6

Progressions: I-VI-IV-V-I in flat keys (including minor)
Cadences-Morris, Chapter 2: (in sharp keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3

Sequences-Morris, Chapter 2: 1-2 in sharp keys

7

Cadences-Morris, Chapter 2: (in flat keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3

Sequences-Morris, Chapter 2: 1-2 in flat keys

8Catchup Day and Midterm assigned and reviewed
9Midterm
10

Cadences-Morris, Chapter 3: (in sharp keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3

Sequences-Morris, Chapter 3: 1-2 in sharp keys

11

Cadences-Morris, Chapter 3: (in flat keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3

Sequences-Morris, Chapter 3: 1-2 in flat keys

12

Cadences-Morris, Chapter 4: (in sharp keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3

Sequences-Morris, Chapter 4: 1-2 in sharp keys

13

Cadences-Morris, Chapter 4: (in flat keys) Perfect 1-3; Imperfect 1-3; and Plagal 1-3

Sequences-Morris, Chapter 4: 1-2 in flat keys

14Catchup Day
15Catchup Day and Final assigned and reviewed
16Cumulative Final Exam-Wednesday of finals week, 3-5pm in room 208.

Dr. Clell Wright also teaches this, but he uses Dr. Scherr's syllabus

 
MUTC 2235Harmony III22235, 2236 Harmony III, IV (2-2-0) [#] A continuation of 1235 and 1236. The study of chromatic harmony from secondary chords to 12-tone music. Also includes basic composition, writing a musical analysis paper, and an introduction to post-tonal analysis. Must be taken concurrently with MUTC 2131, 2132, 2133, and 2134. Fall (2235) - Spring (22

Dr. Bernard Scherr syllabus

Course Overview

The purpose of this course is to help you gain an understanding of and fluency with chromaticism in music. At the center of chromaticism is the magnetism of the half-step. This force is most clearly seen in the V7 chord: ti-do and fa-mi. The minor second in harmony and melody forms the basis of all the concepts in this course. For instance, secondary dominants, mode mixture, the Neapolitan chord, augmented sixth chords, and modulation are all based on chromatically altered, diatonic pitches that exploit half-step magnetism. The expressive meaning of chromatic harmony and melody will be demonstrated in the wide variety of music that we will study in this course. In fact, atonal music (to be studied in the Spring)-a principle characteristic of 20th-century music-developed, in part, through an extended exploration of half-step magnetism.

Course Objectives:

Elements: Secondary Dominants, Secondary Diminished Seventh Chords, Mode Mixture, the Neapolitan Chord, Augmented Sixth Chords, and Modulation.
Skills: visual and aural identification, identification of examples in the literature, basic composition and scoring, and discussion of context and function.

Course Materials

Stefan Kostka and Dorothy Payne, Tonal Harmony, 6th ed. (textbook with CD)
Stefan Kostka and Dorothy Payne, Tonal Harmony, 6th ed. (workbook with CD)
Blank sheet music, pencil and eraser.

Expectations

Reading: Each student is responsible for reading the assigned pages and listening to the musical examples.
Workbook: Each student is responsible for completing the assigned tasks. These are due at the next class meeting. Late work will be marked off between 10% and 50%.
Project: Each student will compose a short piano piece. It will consist of several phrases that use the various concepts covered in class.

Grading Policy

Attendance10%# of total classes/abscences
Midterm Exam 20%Weeks 1-7
Final Exam 25%Cumlative
Assignments 45%(20% piano sonata project-25% assignments)
Total
100% 

Class Meetings

Each class meeting you will be required to bring all of your course materials. Each meeting will consist of a listening example, a lecture presentation, an in-class assignment, and a question and answer session. Graded assignments will be assigned and explained in class or via e-mail.

Exam Procedures

Listening: Each student must identify the composition (or genre), likely composer, and type of chromaticism from a musical example studied in class.
Part writing: Each student must realize a figured bass in four-parts.
Score Analysis: Each student must analyze a given score(s) by identifying the listed chords and possibly discussing the context of each chord.

Tentative Schedule

Weeks
Tuesday
Friday
1Course Introduction and Introduction to Secondary Dominant Function

Secondary Dominant Function

2Secondary Dominant FunctionSecondary Dominant Function
3Secondary Leading-tone FunctionSecondary Leading-tone Function
4Secondary Leading-tone FunctionSecondary Leading-tone Function
5Common Chord ModulationCommon Chord Modulation
6Common Chord Modulation

Mode Mixture/Borrowed Chords

Begin Project Task #1

7Mode Mixture/Borrowed Chords Mode Mixture/Borrowed Chords
8

Midterm Exam Review

Midterm Exam
9Neapolitan ChordNeapolitan Chord
10Neapolitan ChordNeapolitan Chord
11Augmented 6th ChordsAugmented 6th Chords
12Augmented 6th ChordsBegin Project Task #3
13Augmented 6th ChordsThanksgiving Holiday
14Augmented 6th ChordsBegin Project Task #4
15Final/Project ReviewSenior Comprehensive Exams
16Final Exam, Thursday, December 11, 2008, 8-10 am. Project Due

Go to Assignment and Listening Lists

 
MUTC 2132Ear Training IV1Dr. Bernard Scherr syllabus

Course Overview

This course is an extension of sophomore theory in that the presentation of topics is coordinated with the harmony and keyboard courses and focuses on sight singing and dictation.

Course Objectives:

Students will develop skills in sight singing, exercises for which will include melodies, duets, singing while playing, and themes and variations.  In addition, they will develop skills in rhythmic, harmonic and melodic dictation.  The course will incorporate various elements, which will include augmented 6 chords, modulation, post-tonal music, and mixed meters.

Course Materials

A New Approach to Sight Singing by Berkowitz, Fontrier, and Kraft, 4th Edition

Course Packet for MUTC 2131/2132—Ear Training III/IV by Dr. Bernard Scherr

            (This packet is available in the Music Office. The cost is $5.)

Expectations

Practicing: Each student is responsible for practicing the musical exercises.  Much of this course is based on class participation.  A lack of proper preparation will adversely affect your grade as well as cause embarrassment in front of classmates.  You will not be simply passed over in class because you are not prepared.

Dictation Partner/Groups: At the beginning of the semester, students will be encouraged to divide into small groups of 2-3 people. In this way, you will be able to work on dictation exercises and practice your keyboard skills.

Lab Work: Each student will be encouraged to use Auralia in the lab for approximately 30 minutes per week.  Auralia is an excellent aid for practicing ear training.  Please use the login sheet when using Auralia.

Grading Policy

Attendance10%# of total classes/abscences
Exam #120%Dictation and Singing: Week 4
Exam #225%Dictation and Singing: Week 8
Exam #320%Dictation and Singing: Week 12
Exam #425%Dictation and Singing: Finals Week
Total
100% 

Singing: Accuracy in pitch and rhythm is paramount, but dynamics and momentum are also considered.

Dictation: Like singing, accuracy in pitch and rhythm is paramount, but notational clarity is also required.

Class Meetings

Students are required to bring all course materials to each class meeting.  Mondays will be dedicated to singing while Thursdays will be reserved for dictation.

Exam Procedures

Singing: Students will sign up for an individual appointment for this portion of each exam.  There will be two groups of six prepared selections; students will sing one selection from each group.

Dictation: Students will be asked to dictate rhythmic lines, melodies, and chord progressions using Roman numerals.  They might also be asked to identify mistakes in a played example based on a printed selection.

Tentative Schedule

WeeksTopic-SingingTopic-Dictation
1-4Chromaticism

Modulation to V and vi in major and III in minor;

triplets and syncopation - 4 bars; 8 bar melodies;

4:1 two-part melodies

5-8Modulation to closely related keys

Modulation to IV in major and VI in minor;

assymetrical meters - 4 bars; 8 bar melodies;

4:1 two-part melodies

9-12Continuance of previous topics

Augmented 6 chords; assymetrical meters; 8 bar melodies; 4:1 two-part melodies

13-16Modes

Augmented 6 chords; modes and extra-tertian harmony; assymetrical meters; 8 bar melodies;

4:1 two-part melodies

Go to Singing List

 

 
MUTC 2134Keyboard IV1Dr. Bernard Scherr Syllabus

Course Overview

This course is a continuation of Keyboard III. In this course you will develop your keyboard harmony skills through (1) cadential progressions, (2) harmonic sequences, (3) realization of figured bass, and (4) harmonization of chorale melodies.

Course Objectives:

Learning to play cadential patterns (authentic, imperfect, and plagal), sequences, suspensions, seventh chords, and harmonizing melodies

Course Materials

Course Packet, compiled and edited by Dr. Bernard Scherr

            (This packet is available in the Music Office. The cost is $5.)

Grading Policy

Weekly Tests 50%
Midterm Exam20%
Final Exam30%
Total
100%

Expectations

Attendance: Each student is responsible for punctual attendance of all class meetings.

Practicing: Each student is required to practice all assignments until learned.

Class Meetings

Each class meeting you are required to bring your course packet. Each meeting consists of a test on the previous week's material, a review of previous material as needed, and the introduction of new material.

Exam Procedures

Students must be ready to test the assigned material at the beginning of class. Once called upon, students must perform or earn a failing grade (50). If a student misses a class and has not notified the instructor beforehand, he/she can make up the test the following week for a maximum score of 60. If the instructor is notified beforehand, and the absence is due to an HSU approved event, the student can make up the test for full credit; if the absence is due to illness, a maximum score of 70 can be earned (unless the student has a doctor’s note, then full credit is possible).

Final Exam Procedures

Each student will sign up for a ten-minute individual appointment during the final exam time. He or she will be asked to play a cadence, sequence, and create a chorale harmonization at sight.

Tentative Schedule

Week
Wednesday 8:00-8:50
1Cadences: Morris, Chapter 5: (in sharp keys) 
Sequences: Morris, Chapter 5: (in sharp keys) 
Harmonization: "Christus, der ist mein Leben"
Modulation: to the dominant
2

Test Week 1 material

Cadences: Morris, Chapter 5: (in flat keys) 
Sequences: Morris, Chapter 5: (in flat keys)
Harmonization: "Christus, der ist mein Leben"
Modulation: to the dominant

3

Test Week 2  material

Cadences: Morris, Chapter 6: (in sharp keys) 
Sequences: Morris, Chapter 6: (in sharp keys)
Harmonization: "Nun lob', mein Seel', den Herren"
Modulation: to the subdominant

4

Test Week 3 material

Cadences: Morris, Chapter 6: (in flat keys) 
Sequences: Morris, Chapter 6: (in flat keys)
Harmonization: "Nun lob', mein Seel', den Herren"
Modulation: to the subdominant

5

Test Week 4 material

Cadences: Morris, Chapter 7: (in sharp keys) 
Sequences: Morris, Chapter 7: (in sharp keys)
Harmonization: "Herzlich tut mich verlangen"
Modulation: to the submediant

6

Test Week 5 material

Cadences: Morris, Chapter 7: (in flat keys) 
Sequences: Morris, Chapter 7: (in flat keys)
Harmonization: "Herzlich tut mich verlangen"
Modulation: to the submediant

7

Test Week 6 material

Midterm material assigned and reviewed

8Midterm: Weeks 1-6 material
9Cadences: Morris, Chapter 8: (in sharp keys) 
Exercise: Morris, Chapter 8
Harmonization: "Nun danket alle Gott"
Modulation: to the mediant
10

Test Week 9 material

Cadences: Morris, Chapter 8: (in flat keys) 
Exercise: Morris, Chapter 8
Harmonization: "Nun danket alle Gott"
Modulation: to the mediant

11

Test Week 10 material

Harmonization: "Erschienen ist der herrliche Tag"
Modulation: to the supertonic in major and the subtonic in minor

12

Test Week 11 material

Harmonization: "Erschienen ist der herrliche Tag"
Modulation: to the supertonic in major and the subtonic in minor

13

Test Week 12 material

Harmonization: "Vater unser im Himmelreich"
Modulation: using mode mixture and augmented 6 chords

14

Test Week 13 material

Harmonization: "Vater unser im Himmelreich"
Modulation: using mode mixture and augmented 6 chords

15

Test Week 14 material

Final assigned and reviewed

16Cumulative Final Exam-Wednesday, May 6, 2009, 3-5pm in room 208.

Dr. Clell Wright uses Dr. Scherr's syllabus

 
MUTC 2236Harmony IV2Dr. Bernard Scherr Syllabus

Course Overview

The chromatic principals that we explored in the fall will continue to form the basis of all the concepts in this course. In fact, the continued development of chromaticism in music during the 19th-century eventually leads to the abandonment of common practice tonality. This situation, however, did not eliminate tonal elements from music; on the contrary, the vast majority of 20th-century music contains a number of tonal elements, albeit in altered forms. You will explore these forms and others, in addition to learning several new analytical methods.

Course Objectives:

Elements to study: Modulation, Altered Dominant Chords, Late 19th-century Counterpoint, Sequence, Expanded Tonality, Chords as Colors, Modality, Altered Scales, Parallelism, New Chord Structures, Pandiatonicism, New Avenues in Rhythm and Meter, Set-Theory, Serialism, Change Music, and Expanded Textures.
Skills to learn: visual and aural identification, identification of examples in the literature, and basic composition and scoring.

Course Materials

Stefan Kostka and Dorothy Payne, Tonal Harmony, 5th ed. (text, workbook, and tapes)
Charles Burkhart, Anthology for Musical Analysis, 6th ed. (optional)
Blank sheet music, pencil and eraser

Expectations

Reading: Each student is responsible for reading the assigned pages and listening to the musical examples.
Workbook: Each student is responsible for completing the assigned tasks. These are due at the next class meeting. Late work will be marked off between 10% and 50% or may not even be accepted if it is deemed too late.
Project: Each student will compose a short piece for an instrumental group yet to be determined. It must be 1 minute long and use a post-tonal concept covered in class.

Grading Policy

Attendance10%# of total classes/abscences
Assignments 35% 
Composition 10% 
Midterm Exam 20%Weeks 1-7
Final Exam 25%Cumlative
Total
100% 

Class Meetings

Each class meeting you will be required to bring all of your course materials. Each meeting will consist of listening examples, a lecture, an in-class assignment, and a question and answer session. Graded assignments will be assigned and explained in class or via Blackboard.

Exam Procedures

Listening: Each student must identify the type of composition, likely composer, and the type of chromaticism in question, or identify the type of chords used in a given passage. 
Part writing: Each student must complete the given chorale melody or bass line, or must score a given progression in four-parts.
Score Analysis: Each student must analyze the given score(s) by identifying the underlined chords and giving any information requested. The order of the examples will follow the order of presentation in class.

Tentative Schedule

Weeks
Tuesday
Friday
1Course Introduction
Modulation: Altered Chords, Sequential, and Common-tone. Unusual uses of +6 chords.

Modulation: Monophonic, Direct and Mode Mixture. Unusual uses of +6 chords.

2Enharmonic Spelling and Modulation with V7 Enharmonic Modulation with o7
3Altered V Chords 9th, 11th, and 13th Chords
4Common-tone o7 Simultaneities and Coloristic Chord Successions
5Counterpoint in 19th-century Treatment of Dominant Harmony and Sequence
6Expanded Tonality In Class Analysis of Chopin and Mahler excerpts
7Introduction to the 20th Century
Impressionism and Scales
Chord Structure
8Midterm Review Midterm
9

Parallelism

Pandiatonicism

10Rhythm and Meter Set Theory
11Set Theory Set Theory
12Set Theory Set Theory
1312-tone Technique 12-tone Technique
14Total Serialism Chance Music and Expanded Textures
15Electronic Music Sophomore Comprehensive Theory Exam: 8-8:50 a.m.
16Final Exam, Thursday, May 7, 2009, 8-10 am. Project Due

 

 
MUTC 2338Computers in Music32338 Computers in Music (3-3-0) This course is an introduction to the use of computers for declared music majors who are preparing for professional music careers. This course satisfies the University General Education Technological Competency requirement.

Note:  this is a required class and is listed as a theory course

 
MUTC 3231Form & Analysis23231 Form and Analysis (2-3-0) A study of form in music from motives and phrases to large-scale musical organization. Also includes writing a musical analysis paper. Fall. Prerequisite: First and second year music theory sequence and successful completion of Sophomore Comprehensive Exam

Dr. Bernard Scherr Syllabus

Course Overview

In this course we will explore musical form through detailed score study and listening. This exploration will entail learning a six-step method of analysis and writing an analysis paper. The purpose of this activity is to help you gain a thorough understanding of musical structures.

Course Materials

Douglas Green, Form in Tonal Music, 2nd ed.
Charles Burkhart, Anthology for Musical Analysis, 6th ed. This book must be new: no used books will be accepted.
Blank sheet music, pencil and eraser

Expectations

Reading: Each student is responsible for reading the assigned pages and listening to the musical examples.
Assignments: Each student is responsible for completing the assignments. Graded assignments will be given in class. The due dates of these assignments will be given by the instructor in class. Late work will be marked off between 10% and 50%. The instructor reserves the right to not accept assignments that are extremely late (several weeks after the due date).
Paper: Each student will write a 6-8 page analysis paper.

Grading Policy

Attendance10%# of total classes/abscences
Midterm Exam 20%Weeks 1-7
Final Exam 25%Cumlative
Assignments 45%(20% analysis paper-25% assignments)
Total
100% 

Class Meetings

Each class meeting you will be required to bring all of your course materials. Each meeting will consist of a listening example, a lecture presentation, in-class analysis, and a question and answer session. Assignments will be explained in class or on Blackboard.

Exam Procedures

The mid-term and final exams will include a section on the definition of terms, identifying musical form in listening examples, and score analysis.

Tentative Schedule

Week
Monday
Wednesday
Friday
1Course Introduction: Form, Shape, and Genre Harmonic Structure of the Phrase Harmonic Structure of the Phrase
2Melodic Structure of the Phrase Melodic Structure of the Phrase Melodic Structure of the Phrase
3Development of the Phrase Development of the Phrase Development of the Phrase
4Phrases in Combination Phrases in Combination Phrases in Combination
5Small Forms Small Forms Small Forms
6Theme and Variation Theme and Variation Theme and Variation
7Ternary Form Ternary Form Ternary Form
8Paper Assignment and Mid-Term ReviewMid-Term ExamFall Break-No Class
9Rondo Rondo Rondo
10Binary Form Binary Form Binary Form
11Sonata Form Sonata Form Sonata Form
12Sonata Form Sonata Form Sonata Form
13Concerto Form Concerto Form Concerto Form
14Fugal Designs Thanksgiving Holiday-No Class
15Fugal DesignsSophomore/Senior Comprehensive Exams-No Class
16Cumulative Final Exam-TBA
The paper is Wednesday at noon.

 

 
MUTC 4231Orchestration I24231 Orchestration I (2-2-0) An exploration of the characteristics of band and orchestral instruments through score study. Emphasis is placed on idiomatic writing and knowledge of the timber of each instrument and combinations of instruments, and how these sounds are applied in symphonic scoring. Also includes scoring for various orchestral and band groups, with some emphasis on instruments with voices. There will be some performance in class or studio. Prerequisite: Sophomore Comprehensive and/or consent of instructor. Fall

Dr. Charles Coltman Syllabus

Course Structure

This course is intended as an introduction to the orchestral instruments, and as such, will focus primarily on basic information (e.g., instrumental ranges, score setups, transposition, special terminology, etc.), as well as some score study.  Reading assignments will be given from the text, and there will be several short orchestration projects throughout the semester.  Visiting performers will be in class on a regular basis to discuss and demonstrate their respective instruments.

There will be four examinations (one on each of three sections: strings, woodwinds, brass) and a final comprehensive exam which emphasizes the material from the last section (percussion and harp).  These exams will cover basic information such as ranges, instrumental characteristics, and terminology, and will include several brief listening identifications.  The final project consists of a short arrangement for orchestra of a pre-existing piano work, to be assigned during the twelfth week of classes.

Course Materials

Samuel Adler, The Study of Orchestration, 3rd Ed. and workbook.

Grading Policy

Final grades will be based upon the regular assignments, exams, final project,

and attendance/class participation, distributed as follows:

Assignments

25%

Exam 1

10%

Exam 210%
Exam 310%

Exam 4 (final)

15%

Final Project 20%

Attendance/Participation

10%

Expectations

Assignments are expected to be turned in on time. Late assignments will not be accepted. If there are extenuating circumstances come see me. (Illness, death in the family, etc)

IMPORTANT DATES

Thurs., Dec. 4: Final Project Due

Thursday Dec. 11 8:00 - 9:50: Final Exam

Schedule of Topics

DayDateTopic
Tuesday8/26Introduction
Thursday8/28

Instruments of the orchestra; score & part setup                Reading: Chapters 1-2 (pp. 1-50)

Tuesday9/2

Bowed String Instruments: violin, viola

Reading: Chapter 3 (pp. 51-75)

Thursday9/4

Bowed String Instruments: violoncello, contrabass

Reading: Chapter 3 (pp. 75-88)

Tuesday9/9

Scoring for strings

Reading: Chapter 5 (pp. 111-163)

Thursday9/11Review
Tuesday9/16

Exam 1: bowed string instruments

Thursday9/18

Transpositions/clefs, articulation, the woodwind section of

the orch., etc.

Reading: Chapter 6 (pp. 164-179)

Tuesday9/23

Woodwind instruments: flutes, clarinets, saxophones

Reading: Chapter 7 (pp. 180-193; 205-221)

Thursday9/25

Woodwind instruments: oboes, bassoons

Reading: Chapter 7 (pp. 194-204; 221-228)

Tuesday9/31

Scoring for woodwinds

Reading: Chapter 8 (pp. 229-294)

Thursday10/2

Review

Tuesday10/7Exam 2: Woodwind Instruments
Thursday10/9

Intro to Brass Instruments

Reading: Chapter 9 (pp. 295-311)

Tuesday10/14

Brass instruments: horn, trumpets

Reading: Chapter 10 (pp.312-340)

Thursday10/16

Brass instruments: trombones, tubas

Reading: Chapter 10 (pp. 241-356)

Tuesday10/21

Scoring for brass

Reading; Chapter 11(pp. 357-430)

Thursday10/23Review
Tuesday10/28

Exam 3: brass instruments

Thursday10/30

Percussion Instruments

Reading: Chapter 12 (pp. 431-467)

Tuesday11/4

Percussion Instruments

Thursday11/6

Miscellaneous instruments: harp, piano, etc.

Reading: Chapter 4 (pp. 89-110), Chapter 13 (pp. 468-485)

Tuesday11/11

Final project assignments

Scoring for Percussion

Reading: Chapter 14 (486-544)

Thursday11/13

Harp Demonstration

Scoring for Orchestra I

Reading: Chapter 15 (pp. 459-509)

Tuesday11/18

Scoring for Orchestra II

Reading: Chapter 15 (pp. 459-509)

Thursday11/25

Review & discussion of final projects

Tuesday11/27

Review & discussion of final projects

Thursday12/2Review for Final
Tuesday12/4Final projects due!
Thursday12/118:00 - 9:50: Final Exam

 

 
 Total20Counted keyboard since it seems to be integrated, but not the computer course 

Howard Payne University

http://www.hputx.edu/s/668/howardpayne.aspx?pgid=1065

http://www.hputx.edu/s/668/howardpayne.aspx?sid=668&gid=1&pgid=1067

http://www.hputx.edu/s/668/howardpayne.aspx?sid=668&gid=1&pgid=1071

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
MUS 1413Musicianship I4MUSIC 1413. MUSICIANSHIP I. An introductory course in the basic written and aural materials of music. Fall. Prerequisite: Placement examination. Four semester hours

COURSE SYLLABUS

 

 

I. Course Information

 

A.        Title: Musicianship I

Course Number: MUS 1413

Semester: Fall, 2006

Class Meets: 11:00 to 11: 50 a.m. M-F in DMC 302 and the Music Computer Lab

 

B.         Required Texts:

Kostka, Stefan, and Payne, Dorothy. Tonal Harmony, 5th Edition. McGraw-Hill, 2004.

___Workbook for Tonal Harmony.

Horvit, Michael, et al. Music for Ear Training. Schirmer, 2001

Ottman, Robert W. Music for Sight Singing, 5th Edition. Prentice-Hall, 2001.

 

C.                 Instructor: Dr. Allen Reed      

            Office: DMC 409       

            Telephone: Ext. 5521 

            Office Hours: Posted on door            

 

II. Purpose/Objectives/Assessment

 

A.        The purpose of Music 1413 is to provide essential knowledge of the grammar of music – music theory and aural skills – for students pursuing a music career as a performer or teacher. The course fulfills the program objective of “preparing students for careers in the fields of music performance, public school and/or private music teaching, and church music ministry.

 

B.         The objectives of Music 1413 are to enable students who successfully complete the    course requirements to:

 

1. Demonstrate familiarity with rhythmic concepts, scales, key signatures,    intervals, and chord construction.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class discussions, written assignments, tests]

 


 

2. Demonstrate the ability to utilize the Music Computer Lab to complete    corollary computer assignments.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Successful completion of computer lab assignments]

 

3. Display a practical and theoretical grasp of various elements of music.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class participation, written assignments, tests]

 

5. Display ability to read and notate music.

 

[ASSESSMENT: written assignments, sight singing, tests]

 

 

III. Methods and Procedures

 

A.        There are no prerequisites for enrolling in Music 1413. Students who may be unprepared by background and/or previous experience for the class will take a placement examination to determine if taking Music 1301, Fundamentals of Music, would be advisable prior to enrolling in Music 1413.

 

B.         Specific material to be covered includes Parts I and II from the text.  Dates are given in the class schedule at the beginning of the semester.

 

1. Scales, modes

2. Harmonic progression

4. Specific diatonic chords

5. Inversions

6. Nonharmonic tones

7. 7th Chords

8. Part-writing

9. Analysis

 

 

C.         Teaching methodology will include lecture, demonstration, guided class discussion,             class drill, and Music Computer Lab experience.

 

D.        In addition to class time, students enrolled in Music 1413 will be assigned written homework from the required texts and drills in the Music Computer Lab. This will provide additional practice and reinforcement of material covered in class.

 

E.        For additional assistance in Music 1413, the Instructor’s office hours are posted       on his office door. An appointment would be appreciated.

 

F.         Class Policies

 

1.       Homework or reading should be done BEFORE class and will be the basis of class discussions.

 

2.   No late work will be accepted. If a student is ill, a 0 will be recorded, and this grade will be deleted when the student presents a written doctor’s excuse. (It will count neither for nor against the student.)

 

3.      No food or drinks (including water) are allowed in class. Please do not bring these into the classroom.

 

4.      No leaving class (except for personal emergency) until class is dismissed.

 

 

 

 

IV. Grading System

 

A.                 The final grade for Music 1413 will be determined from the average of

 

1.      Written Mid-term Exam – 20%

2.      Written Final Exam – 20%

3.      Homework – 20%

4.      Sight-Singing Average (Scheduled and Pop Quizzes)– 20%

5.      Dictation Average (Scheduled and Pop Quizzes) – 20%

 

Further Considerations:

 

1.    If Computer Lab assignments are not completed, final grade will be reduced by one letter grade.

 

2.      Students must achieve at least a 60% average on sight singing and a 60% average on dictation to pass the course.

 

3.      ATTENDANCE POLICY (See below under IV.C.)

                                   

B.         The grading scale for Music 1413 will be

 

A

90-100

B

80-89

C

70-79

D

60-69

 

On work where a letter grade is assigned, the following table will apply

 

Letter

Grade

Errors

Numerical Grade

A

0

95

A-

1

92

B+

2

88

B

3

85

B-

4

82

C+

5

78

C

6

75

C-

7

72

D+

8

68

D

9

65

D-

10

62

F

11

50

F*

NA

0

 

*Assignment, quiz, or exam missed due to unexcused absence.

 

 

C.         Attendance: Students must attend seventy‑five percent of class periods to receive credit for the course. This class meets 71 days fall semester; a student will automatically fail on the 18th absence.

 

There is no distinction between excused and unexcused absences for this attendance requirement.

 

ATTENDANCE POLICY

 

Regular attendance will ensure students’ success in class.  Therefore, the following attendance policy will be enforced this semester:

 

0-3 Absences will not affect the final grade.

4-8 Absences will lower the final grade by one letter.

9-12 Absences will lower the final grade by two letters.

13-17 Absences will lower the final grade by three letters.

18 or more absences will cause the student to fail the course.

 

Whether or not the absence is excused has no bearing on this policy. If a student has a concern about the policy, he/she may discuss it with the professor.

                                                                                                           

 

D.        There are no requirements regarding keeping exams and papers.

 

 

V. Bibliography

 

Aldwell, Edward, and Schachter, Carl. Harmony and Voice Leading, 2nd Edition. San Diego: Harcourt, Brace Jovanovich, 1989.

 

Benjamin Thomas, Horvit, Michael, and Nelson, Robert. Techniques and Materials of Tonal Music, 3rd Ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1985.


 

Benjamin, Thomas, Horvit, Michael, and Nelson, Robert. Music for Analysis, 2nd Ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1984.

 

Benward, Bruce, and White, Gary. Music in Theory and Practice, 4th Ed. Dubuque, IA: Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 1989.

 

Burkhart, Charles. Anthology for Musical Analysis, 4th Ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1985.

 

Christ, William et al. Materials and Structure of Music, 3rd Ed. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice‑Hall, Inc., 1980.

 

Forte, Allen. Tonal Harmony in Concept and Practice, 3rd Ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1979.

 

Lester, Joel. Analytic Approach to Twentieth Century Music. New York: W. W. Norton & Company, 1989.

 

McHose, Allen I. The Contrapuntal Harmonic Technique of the 18th Century. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice‑Hall, Inc., 1947.

 

Mohn, Michael. Preparing Traditional Music Manuscript,  2nd Ed. Fairfield, CA: M. Mohn  Publishing, 1990.

 

Warfield, Gerald. How to Write Music Manuscript. New York: Schirmer Books, 1977.

 

 
MUS 1414Musicianship II4MUSIC 1414. MUSICIANSHIP II. A study of the diatonic harmonic practices of the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries. Includes written and aural exercises in analysis, harmonization, and composition in common practice style. Spring. Prerequisite: Music 1413 with a grade of “C” or better. Four semester hours.

COURSE SYLLABUS

 

 

I. Course Information

 

A.        Title: Musicianship II

Course Number: MUS 1414

Semester: Spring, 2007

Class Meets: 8:00 to 8: 50 a.m. M-F in DMC 302 and the Music Computer Lab

 

B.         Required Texts:

Kostka, Stefan, and Payne, Dorothy. Tonal Harmony, 5th Edition. McGraw-Hill, 2004.

___Workbook for Tonal Harmony.

Horvit, Michael, et al. Music for Ear Training. Schirmer, 2001

Ottman, Robert W. Music for Sight Singing, 5th Edition. Prentice-Hall, 2001.

 

C.                 Instructor: Dr. Allen Reed      

            Office: DMC 201       

            Telephone: 5521        

            Office Hours: Posted on door            

 

II. Purpose/Objectives/Assessment

 

A.        The purpose of Music 1414 is to provide essential knowledge of the grammar of music – music theory and aural skills – for students pursuing a music career as a performer or teacher. The course fulfills the program objective

 

B.         The objectives of Music 1414 are to enable students who successfully complete the    course requirements to:

 

1. Demonstrate familiarity with rhythmic concepts, scales, key signatures,    intervals, and chord construction.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class discussions, written assignments, tests]

 


 

2. Demonstrate the ability to utilize the Music Computer Lab to complete    corollary computer assignments.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Successful completion of computer lab assignments]

 

3. Display a practical and theoretical grasp of various elements of music.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class participation, written assignments, tests]

 

5. Display ability to read and notate music.

 

[ASSESSMENT: written assignments, sight singing, tests]

 

 

III. Methods and Procedures

 

A.        There are no prerequisites for enrolling in Music 1414.

 

B.         Specific material to be covered will be found in Chapters 7 – 16 of the required text, and includes the following topics. Dates for exams and quizzes are given in the class schedule at the beginning of the semester.

 

1. Harmonic Progression

2. Part-writing

3. Analysis

4. Figured bass

5. Triads in inversion

6. Nonharmonic tones

7. 7th Chords

8. Elementary musical form

9. Secondary triads

 

C.         Teaching methodology will include lecture, demonstration, guided class discussion,             class drill, and Music Computer Lab experience.

 

D.        In addition to class time, students enrolled in Music 1414 will be assigned written homework from the required texts and drills in the Music Computer Lab. This will provide additional practice and reinforcement of material covered in class.

 

E.        For additional assistance in Music 1414, the Instructor’s office hours are posted      on his office door. An appointment would be appreciated.


 

 

F.         Class Policies

 

1.       Homework or reading should be done BEFORE class and will be the basis of class discussions.

 

2.   No late work will be accepted. If a student is ill, a 0 will be recorded, and this grade will be deleted when the student presents a written doctor’s excuse. (It will count neither for nor against the student.)

 

IV. Grading System

 

A.                 The final grade for Music 1414 will be determined from the average of

 

1.      Written Mid-term Exam – 20%

2.      Written Final Exam – 20%

3.      Homework – 20%

4.      Sight-Singing Average – 20%

5.      Dictation Average  – 20%

 

Further Considerations:

 

1.    If Computer Lab assignments are not completed, final grade will be reduced by one letter grade.

 

2.      Students must achieve at least a 60% average on sight singing and a 60% average on dictation to pass the course.

 

3.      ATTENDANCE POLICY (See below under IV.C.)

                                   

B.         The grading scale for Music 1414 will be

 

A

90-100

B

80-89

C

70-79

D

60-69

 

On work where a letter grade is assigned, the following table will apply

 

Letter

Grade

Errors

Numerical Grade

A

0

95

A-

1

92

B+

2

88

B

3

85

B-

4

82

C+

5

78

C

6

75

C-

7

72

D+

8

68

D

9

65

D-

10

62

F

11

50

F*

NA

0

 

*Assignment, quiz, or exam missed due to unexcused absence.

 

C.         Attendance: Regular attendance will ensure students’ success in class.  Therefore, the following attendance policy will be enforced this semester:

 

0-3 Absences will not affect the final grade.

4-8 Absences will lower the final grade by one letter.

9-12 Absences will lower the final grade by two letters.

13-16 Absences will lower the final grade by three letters.

17 or more absences will cause the student to fail the course.

 

Excused absences (determined by the professor) will be taken into account in enforcing this attendance policy. If a student has a concern about the policy, he/she may discuss it with the professor.

                                                                                                           

D.        There are no requirements regarding keeping exams and papers.

 

 

V. Bibliography

 

Aldwell, Edward, and Schachter, Carl. Harmony and Voice Leading, 2nd Edition. San Diego: Harcourt, Brace Jovanovich, 1989.

 

Benjamin Thomas, Horvit, Michael, and Nelson, Robert. Techniques and Materials of Tonal Music, 3rd Ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1985.


 

Benjamin, Thomas, Horvit, Michael, and Nelson, Robert. Music for Analysis, 2nd Ed. Boston: Houghton Mifflin Company, 1984.

 

Benward, Bruce, and White, Gary. Music in Theory and Practice, 4th Ed. Dubuque, IA: Wm. C. Brown Publishers, 1989.

 

Burkhart, Charles. Anthology for Musical Analysis, 4th Ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1985.

 

Christ, William et al. Materials and Structure of Music, 3rd Ed. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice‑Hall, Inc., 1980.

 

Forte, Allen. Tonal Harmony in Concept and Practice, 3rd Ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart & Winston, 1979.

 

Lester, Joel. Analytic Approach to Twentieth Century Music. New York: W. W. Norton & Company, 1989.

 

McHose, Allen I. The Contrapuntal Harmonic Technique of the 18th Century. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice‑Hall, Inc., 1947.

 

Mohn, Michael. Preparing Traditional Music Manuscript,  2nd Ed. Fairfield, CA: M. Mohn  Publishing, 1990.

 

Warfield, Gerald. How to Write Music Manuscript. New York: Schirmer Books, 1977.

 

 
MUS 2413Musicianship III4MUSIC 2413. MUSICIANSHIP III. A continuation of Musicianship II concentrating on the chromatic materials of common practice and romantic periods. Includes written and aural exercises in analysis, harmonization, and composition in the appropriate style. Fall. Prerequisite: Music 1414 with a grade of “C” or better. Four semester hours

MUSICIANSHIP 3

 MUS2413-01

FALL 2006

bb1.hputx.edu

 

 

Instructor: Patricia Banks

DMC104

pbanks@hputx.edu

(325) 649-8504

See Personal Information on Blackboard for Office Hours

 

 

Please read this syllabus carefully. It outlines exactly what will be expected of you in this course, which concepts will be included in tests, and how your grade will be determined.

 

Assessment of the effectiveness of this course will be made through a jury examination at the close of the semester, question #5 on the SET, the "Exit Survey" given to graduating music majors, and alumni survey questions regarding course work at HPU and its relevance to their chosen career

 

Assessment of student achievement of stated goals will be made through class assignments, class quizzes, music computer lab assignments, and two examinations.

 

Textbooks:

Kostka-Payne: TONAL HARMONY, 5th edition.  McGraw-Hill.2004

                         Textbook and set of 2 CD's to accompany text.

                         Workbook with accompanying CD

Ottman: Music for Sight Singing, 6th edition Prentice-Hall, 2004.

Horvit/Koozin/Nelson: Music for Ear Training, CD-ROM & Workbook. 2nd edition.

   Thomson/Schirmer, 2005.

Computer Media:

  Blank Computer Media: 3.5 disks,  CD-RW, Flash Drive at least 256MB

Other materials:

  Staff paper and PENCILS

 

  1. Mus2413 is the third in a four-semester sequence of courses which introduce music students to the theoretical concepts of the Common Practice Period. The fourth semester also introduces some concepts of 20th Century theory. HPU music majors are required to complete all four semesters with a grade of "C" or better.

  2. . All students enrolled in MUS2413 must also be enrolled in MUS0171-0074, Music Computer Lab 1-4. Much of the ear training associated with this course will be accomplished in the Music Computer Lab


 

 

 

  1. The PURPOSE of MUS2413 is to continue equipping students to analyze and understand the music which they perform, as well as to understand the basic rules of music composition. Students will be introduced to Non-Diatonic Harmony in this second year of theory.

 

4. The OBJECTIVES of MUS2413 are to master the following concepts:

 

 

a. Chromaticism and Altered Chords

b. Secondary Functions

c. Secondary Dominant Chords

d. Secondary Leading-Tone Chords

e. Modulation and Change of Key

f. Tonicization

g. Key Relationships

h. Common-Chord Modulation

i. Sequential Modulation

j. Modulation by Common Tone

k. Monophonic Modulation

l. Direct Modulation

m. Formal Terminology

n. Binary and Ternary Forms

o. 12-Bar Blues, and other Formal Designs

p. Mode Mixture

q. Borrowed Chords in Minor and Major

r. Modulations involving Mode Mixture

 

 

1. Teaching methodology will include lecture, demonstration, guided class discussion, class drill, group practice, and self-paced work in the Music Computer Lab, DMC109

 

2. Grading System

a. Assignments and test dates for this semester will be posted on Blackboard. It is the student's responsibility to check Blackboard carefully, EVERY DAY,  and to be prepared for tests.

b. The final grade for the semester will be determined by averaging the grades for the following

 (1) Assignment average 30%

 (2) Mid-Term exam 15%

 (3) Final exam 25%

 (4) Music Computer Lab assignments 30%


 

 

 

 

3. Grading Scale for MUS2413

90-100 = A

80--89 = B

70--79 = C

60--69 = D

below 60 = F

 

4. The final grade in MUS2413 will be determined by a student's performance on two examinations, quizzes, class assignments, and computer lab grades and assignment completion.

5. Three absences are allowed during the semester, but NOT encouraged. The fourth absence will reduce the semester average by one letter grade. Each subsequent absence will reduce the semester average by one letter grade. Absences exceeding 25% of class time will result in failure of the course, as mandated by the HPU catalogue

 

6. Students are required to keep all MUS2413 materials in a three ring binder which is brought to each class session.

 

7. Any student may be dismissed from class for disruptive conduct or inappropriate dress. A student who is discovered cheating or who plagiarizes will be dismissed from the course and will receive a failing grade (F) for MUS2413.

 

 
MUS 2414Musicianship IV4MUSIC 2414. MUSICIANSHIP IV. A written and aural study of the techniques found in Impressionism through current practices with an emphasis on major

MUSICIANSHIP 4

 MUS2414-01

SPRING 2007

BB2.hputx.edu

Instructor: Patricia Banks

DMC104

pbanks@hputx.edu

(325) 649-8504

Office Hours are posted on Blackboard, (See Personal Information) and outside DMC104.

 

Please read this syllabus carefully. It outlines exactly what will be expected of you in this course, which concepts will be included in tests, and how your grade will be determined.


Assessment of the effectiveness of this course will be made through a jury examination at the close of the semester, question #5 on the SET, the "Exit Survey" given to graduating music majors, and alumni survey questions regarding course work at HPU and its relevance to their chosen career.


Assessment of student achievement of stated goals will be made through class assignments, class quizzes, music computer lab assignments, and two examinations.

TEXTBOOKS:
Kostka-Payne: TONAL HARMONY, 5th edition
Textbook and set of 2 CD's to accompany text.
Workbook with accompanying CD


Ottman:
Music for Sight Singing, 6th edition

Horvit/Koozin/Nelson: Music for Ear Training CD-ROM and Workbook


Staff paper and PENCILS

 

 

COURSE GOALS:

 

1. Mus2414 is the fourth in a four-semester sequence of courses which introduce music students to the theoretical concepts of the Common Practice Period. This fourth semester also introduces some concepts of 20th Century theory. HPU music majors are required to complete all four semesters with a grade of "C" or better.

 


2. All students enrolled in MUS2414 must also be enrolled in MUS0171-0074, Music Computer Lab 1-4. Much of the ear training associated with this course will be accomplished in the Music Computer Lab.

 


3. The PURPOSE of MUS2414 is to continue equipping students to analyze and understand the music which they perform, as well as to understand the basic rules of music composition. Students will be introduced to Non-Diatonic Harmony in this second year of theory.

 


4. The
OBJECTIVES of MUS2414


By the end of the semester, students will demonstrate, through the use of original compositions, a thorough understanding of the following theoretical concepts:



Augmented Sixth Chords


Enharmonic Spellings and Modulations

 


Further Elements of the Harmonic Vocabulary

 


Tonal Harmony in the Late 19th Century

 


An Introduction to 20th Century Practices


(1)Impresionism


(2)Scales


(3)Chord Structure


(4)Parallelism


(5)Pandiatonicism


(6)Rhythm and Meter


(7)Set Theory


(8)The Twelve-Tone Technique


(9)Total Serialization


(10)Aleatory or Chance Music


(11)Texture and Expanded Instrumental Resources


(12)Electronic Music


 

 

 

COURSE POLICIES AND PROCEDURES

 


1. Teaching methodology will include lecture, demonstration, guided class discussion, class drill, group practice, and self-paced work in the Music Computer Lab, DMC109.

 


2. Grading System:

 


a. Assignments and test dates dates for this semester will be posted on this site. It is the student's responsibility to check carefully, and to be prepared for tests.

 


b. The final grade for the semester will be determined by averaging  the grades for the following:

 


(1) Assignment and Quiz average (30 %)

 


(2) Mid-Term exam  (20%)

 


(3) Final exam (25%)

 


(4) Music Computer Lab assignments  (25%)

 


3.Grading Scale for MUS2414:

 


90-100 = A

 


80-89 = B

 


70-79 = C

 


60-69 = D

 


below 60 = F

 


4. The final grade in MUS2414 will be determined by a student's performance on two examinations/compositions, quizzes, class assignments, and computer lab grades and assignment completion.

 


5. Three absences are allowed during the semester, but NOT encouraged. The fourth absence will reduce the semester average by one letter grade. Each subsequent absence will reduce the semester average by one letter grade. Absences exceeding 25% of class time will result in failure of the course, as mandated by the HPU catalogue.

 


6. Students are required to keep all MUS2414 materials in a three ring binder which is brought to each class session.

 


7. Any student may be dismissed from class for disruptive conduct or inappropriate dress. A student who is discovered cheating or who plagiarizes will be dismissed from the course and will receive a failing grade (F) for MUS2414.

 

 

 
MUS 4213Form and Analysis2MUSIC 4213. FORM AND ANALYSIS A study of the structure of music; motif and phrase, lied, rondo, variation, sonata and programmatic forms. Fall. Prerequisite: Music 2414. Two semester hours

COURSE SYLLABUS

 

 

I. Course Information

 

A.        Title: Form and Analysis

Course Number: MUS 4213

Semester: Fall, 2008

Class Meets: 1:00 to 1: 50 p.m. MW in DMC 408 and the Music Computer Lab

 

B.         Required Texts:

Spencer, Peter, and Temko, Peter. A Practical Approach to the Study of Form in Music.

 

Burkhardt, Charles, and Rothstein, William. Anthology for Musical Analysis, 6th Ed.

 

C.                 Instructor: Dr. Allen Reed      

            Office: DMC 409       

            Telephone: 5521        

            Office Hours: Posted on door            

 

II. Purpose/Objectives/Assessment

 

A.         Music 4213 is an upper level theory course which introduces students to the formal designs of music of the Common Practice Period.  The purpose of the course is to fulfill the program objective of helping students develop an understanding of the theoretical fundamentals of how music synthesizes melody, harmony, and rhythm. The course is required of all students with a major in music.

 

B.         The objectives of Music 4213 are to enable students who successfully complete the    course requirements to:

 

1. Be able to identify the basic factors in form, e.g., rhythm, melody, harmony, and tonality.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class discussions, written assignments, tests]

 


 

2. Recognize small structural elements of music, such as phrases, phrase groupings.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class discussions, written assignments, tests]

 

3. Display an understanding of part forms, rondo, variation forms.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class discussions, written assignments, tests]

 

4. Be able to identify the compositional devices in contrapuntal music.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class discussions, written assignments, tests]

 

            5. Analyze the sections of sonata form and multi-movement forms.

 

[ASSESSMENT: Class discussions, written assignments, tests]

 

           

 

III. Methods and Procedures

 

A.        Successful completion of MUS 2214/2234 is required for enrolling in Music 4213.

 

B.         Specific material to be covered includes topics listed in IIB, above. Dates are given in         the class schedule at the beginning of the semester.

 

C.         Teaching methodology will include lecture, demonstration, guided class discussion,             class drill, and Music Computer Lab experience.

 

D.        For additional assistance in Music 4213, the Instructor’s office hours are posted      on his office door. An appointment would be appreciated.


 

 

E.        Class Policies

 

1.       Homework or reading should be done BEFORE class and will be the basis of class discussions.

 

      All homework, exercises, written exams, and quizzes must be completed in PENCIL.

 

2.   No late work will be accepted. If a student is ill, a 0 will be recorded, and this grade will be deleted when the student presents a written doctor’s excuse. (It will count neither for nor against the student.)

 

3.      No leaving class (except for personal emergency) until class is dismissed.

 

IV. Grading System

 

A.                 The final grade for Music 4213 will be determined from the average of

 

1.      Homework Assignments – 25%

2.      Mid-term Exam – 25%

3.      Analysis Project – 25%

4.      Final Exam – 25%

 

2.      If a student has more than 3 unexcused absences, the final grade for the course will be lowered by one letter grade. (See below under IV.C.)

                                   

B.         The grading scale for Music 4213 will be

 

A

90-100

B

80-89

C

70-79

D

60-69

 

On work where a letter grade is assigned, the following table will apply

 

Letter

Grade

Errors

Numerical Grade

A

0

95

A-

1

92

B+

2

88

B

3

85

B-

4

82

C+

5

78

C

6

75

C-

7

72

D+

8

68

D

9

65

D-

10

62

F

11

50

F*

NA

0

 

*Assignment, quiz, or exam missed due to unexcused absence.

 

 

C.         Attendance: Students must attend seventy-five percent of class periods to receive credit for the course. This class meets 29 days fall semester; a student will automatically fail on the 8th absence.

 

There is no distinction between excused and unexcused absences for this attendance requirement. A student will be counted absent if textbooks and materials are not brought to class or if the student sleeps during part or all of the class.

 

If a student has more three unexcused absences, the grade for the course will be reduced by one letter. A written excuse must be presented for an absence to be considered, and whether or not the absence is excused will be determined by the instructor.

 

D.        There are no requirements regarding keeping exams and papers.

 

 

 

 
MUS 3233

or MUS 4253

Choral Arranging

Orchestration

2MUSIC 3233. CHORAL ARRANGING. A practical course in arranging for various combinations of voices and practice in writing piano accompaniments in both the traditional and contemporary styles. Fall, even years. Prerequisite: Music 2414. Two semester hours
MUSIC 4253. ORCHESTRATION. A study of the principles of orchestration. The course is designed also for original productiveness in the instrumental areas of composition. Spring, even years. Prerequisite: Music 2414. Two semester hours
[Note:  Depending upon choral or instrumental]

Music 3233, Music 4253—Choral Arranging/Orchestration

 

Instructor:  Dr. Robert Tucker

Office: DMC 201  649-8600

Office hours:  MWF—8:00-9:00 a.m. or by appointment

 

Text: No required text for this class

 

Course Description:

 

Music 3233, 4253 is designed as a choral arranging/orchestration course for music majors.  The course is a comprehensive course that synthesizes previous knowledge of music theory and vocal performance.  The students will learn the material through lecture, discussion, tests, and assignments.

 

This course satisfies the music education requirement for teacher certification as well as the Bachelor of Music, Church Music, and the Bachelor of Arts.  The class is designed for music majors and substitutes for orchestration.

 

Outcomes:  the student successfully completing Music 3233 should:

1.      Understand the basic techniques of successful choral arranging and orchestration

2.      Should know and understand transposition of instruments

3.      Demonstrate a technical knowledge of music theory

4.      Demonstrate adequate skills at Finale 2007 or 2008.

3.   Demonstrate a comprehensive knowledge of vocal performance, arranging, and orchestration skills

 

Requirements:

1.      Take a midterm and a final examination

2.      Turn in 6 assignments and 1 final project

3.      Participate actively in discussions and questions

4.      BE ON TIME and PREPARED, NEVER MISS CLASS

 

Evaluation Procedures:

 

The grading scale is a ten-point scale.

 

20%--midterm

20%--final exam

15%--participation including attendance and promptness

35%--periodic assignments

10%--final project

 

Assessment: The course will be assessed through grades and skills gained. Alumni follow-up is done periodically to insure the students are prepared for graduate school or market demand.

 

 
   MUSIC 1301. FUNDAMENTALS OF MUSIC. An introductory course in the principles of music reading, writing of scales, intervals, correlation of meter and rhythmic patterns, sight reading, ear training, keyboard techniques and elementary conducting. Required of students unprepared to enter Music 1213. Credit will not apply on music major course of study for graduation. Fall, Spring. Prerequisite: None. Three semester hours

[Note that MUSIC 1213 is not listed in any of their courses - perhaps they renumbered it to 1413, but it is still obviously a remedial course]

 
 Total20  
     
     
     
     

Lamar University

http://dept.lamar.edu/cofac/deptmusic/

http://www.lamar.edu/pdfs/FineArtsAndComm.pdf

http://www.lamar.edu/pdfs/FineArtsAndComm.pdf

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
MUTY 1311 3

1311, 1312 Theory I, II Elementary Harmony 3:5:0

Elementary keyboard and written harmony, sight singing; ear training.

Prerequisite: MUTY 1370 or by advanced standing exam.

 
 
MUTY 1312 3  
MUTY 2311 3

2311, 2312 Theory III, IV Advanced Harmony 3:5:0

Advanced keyboard and written harmony; sight singing; ear training.

Prerequisite: MUTY 1312.

 
 
MUTY 2312 3  
MUTY 4420 2

4220 Orchestration 2:2:0

Techniques of writing and arranging for orchestral instruments in small combinations and for full orchestra.

Prerequisite: MUTY 2312.

 
 
MUTY 4210 2

4210 Form and Analysis 2:2:0

Analytical study of musical forms and styles.

Prerequisite: MUTY 2312.

 
 
MUSI 2377 3

Computers in Music 3:3:0

An overview of computer technology as related to the field of music. Includes study in technological developments

and software applicable to the student’s area of specialization.

 

[Computer course required, but not listed as a theory course]

 
   

1370 Elements of Music 3:3:0

Designed to prepare students for advanced study in music theory. A study of scales, chords, musical terminology,

key signatures, sight-singing, musical notation and the harmonic, melodic and rhythmic structure of music.

 
 
     
  16not counting the computer course 
     
     

Midwestern State University

http://finearts.mwsu.edu/music/

http://www.msumusic.org/degrees.html

http://www.msumusic.org/catalog.html

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

MUSC 1601/1603 Music Theory I
MUSC 1611/1613 Music Theory II
MUSC 2603 Music Theory III
MUSC 2613 Music Theory IV
MUSC 3662 Orchestration
MUSC 3632 Analysis of Musical Form

 
MUSC 1601 1MUSC 1601.  Elementary Sight-Singing and Ear Training.  Singing in treble and bass clefs with introduction to alto clef, major, and minor modes.  Recognition of intervals and triads and melodic dictation.  Enrollment limited to students who are enrolled in or have completed MUSC 1603 
  3MUSC 1603.  Theory I.  Part writing of figured bass exercises and melody harmonizations using triads.  Composing on a small scale will be introduced.  MUSC 1601 should be taken concurrently 
  1MUSC 1611.  Elementary Sight-Singing and Ear Training.  Prerequisite:  MUSC 1601.  A continuation of MUSC 1601.  Enrollment limited to students who are enrolled in or have completed MUSC 1613 
  3MUSC 1613.  Theory II.  Prerequisite:  MUSC 1603.  A continuation of MUSC 1603.  MUSC 1611 should be taken concurrently 
  3MUSC 2603.  Theory III.  Prerequisite:  MUSC 1613.  Sight-singing more difficult melodies.  Dictation of more advanced melodies.  Introduction of two-part and four-part dictation.  Part-writing of figured basses and melodies using altered chords, modulations, 9th, 11th, and 13th chords.  Students will also have the opportunity to freely compose several short works in various styles using some of the more advanced chords as they are studied 
  3MUSC 2613.  Theory IV.  Prerequisite:  MUC 2603.  A continuation of MUSC 2603 
  2MUSC 3662.  Orchestration.  Prerequisite:  MUSC 2613.  Techniques of scoring and part extraction for orchestra.  Special consideration to aspects of school and church ensembles.  Problems involving combinations of instrumental groups with other media.  As part of the final projects, students will orchestrate an original composition of 16-24 measures in length.  The original will be in a keyboard style of the student's choosing with the approval of the instructor 
  2MUSC 3632.  Analysis of Musical Form.  Analysis of musical structure including simple binary and ternary forms, the rondo and sonata-allegro forms, and contrapuntal applications 
     
 Total18  
     
     

Saint Mary's University of San Antonio

www.stmarytx.edu/acad/music

http://www.stmarytx.edu/acad/music/?go=acad

http://www.stmarytx.edu/acad/music/?go=acad

 

B.A. degree with All Level Teaching Certification (Instrumental) (56 hours)
Broad Teaching Field: Required: MU 1001-4002 (taken each semester), 1321, 1322, 1121, 1122, 2230, 2331W, 3323, 3324, 3224, 3245, 3125, 3332W, 3333W, 3445, 4125, 4341, 4110 (5 semesters), 4111 (3 semesters) 7 hours in major instrument, to be taken every semester, (3 must be advanced), 4 hours in piano , to be taken in 4 semesters, participation in Concert Band every semester, with the exception of the student teaching semester.

B.A. degree with All Level Teaching Certification (Choral) (54 hours)
Broad Teaching Field: Required: MU 1001-4002 (taken each semester), 1321, 1322, 1121, 1122, 2230, 2331W, 3245, 3323, 3324, 3224, 3125, 3332W, 3333W, 3445, 4110 (strings), 4125, 4249, 4340, 4342, 7 hours in major instrument, to be taken every semester, (3 must be advanced), 4 hours in piano (or other secondary instrument if the student's major instrument is piano), to be taken in 4 semesters, participation in Concert Choir every semester, with the exception of the student teaching semester.

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 

MU 1321

Basic Musicianship

3

Basic music theory. Clefs. Key signatures. Scales. Elementary forms. Basic music vocabulary. Melody-writing. Multi-voice writing (Common Practice Period). Analysis. Lab will include ear-training, solfeggio, rhythm drill, keyboard harmony, transposition, and improvising accompaniments.For music majors and minors only.

 

MU 1322

Basic Musicianship

3

Basic music theory. Clefs. Key signatures. Scales. Elementary forms. Basic music vocabulary. Melody-writing. Multi-voice writing (Common Practice Period). Analysis. Lab will include ear-training, solfeggio, rhythm drill, keyboard harmony, transposition, and improvising accompaniments.For music majors and minors only.

 

MU 1121

Aural Skills

1

Basic music theory lab to include ear-training, solfeggio, rhythm drill, keyboard harmony, transposition, and improvising accompaniments. This course is taken with Basic Musicianship (MU 1321, 1322).

 

MU 1122

Aural Skills

1

Basic music theory lab to include ear-training, solfeggio, rhythm drill, keyboard harmony, transposition, and improvising accompaniments. This course is taken with Basic Musicianship (MU 1321, 1322).

 

MU 3323

Harmony

3

Traditional harmony and ear training. Analysis of harmonic idioms as used into the 20th century. Continuation of melody writing. Elementary counterpoint. Prerequisite: MU 1321, 1322 or equivalent and piano proficiency. For music majors and minors only.

 

MU 3324

Harmony

3

Traditional harmony and ear training. Analysis of harmonic idioms as used into the 20th century. Continuation of melody writing. Elementary counterpoint. Prerequisite: MU 1321, 1322 or equivalent and piano proficiency. For music majors and minors only.

 

MU 3125

Arranging and Orchestration

1

Composition, arrangement and orchestration for school performing groups, including band, jazz band, and choir.

 

MU 4125

Improvisation

1

Fundamental improvisation skills, style interpretation, theory, and common performance practices in the evolution of improvisation.

 

MU 3224

Form and Analysis

2

Melody writing. Motif and development. Song forms. Classical forms.

 

MU 3245

Accompanying

2

Sight reading, transposition, reducing operatic and orchestral scores, improvising simple chordal accompaniments, solo vocal and choral warmups, accompanying UIL vocal solo and choral literature. Prerequisite: four semesters of applied piano, passing the piano proficiency exmination.

 
     
 

 

Sam Houston State University

www.shsu.edu/music

http://www.shsu.edu/catalog/mus.html

http://www.shsu.edu/catalog/mus.html

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
  2MUS 122 Theory of Music I. [MUSI 1211]This course provides an intensive drill in the fundamentals of music theory followed by an introduction to tonal music of the Western tradition. After mastering basic concepts involving the visual recognition and written reproduction of key signatures, scales, intervals, rhythm, meter, triads, and seventh chords, students will study figured bass, Roman Numeral analysis, and four-voice part writing of diatonic music using triads
in all inversions. This course’s content is coordinated with that of MUSICIANSHIP I (MUS 124).Credit 2.

MUS 122: Music Theory I

MWF 11-11:50am, Room 216

Fall 2008

 

Instructor:  Vincetti Frizzo

Office: Kirkley G02                                                               Phone: 936-294-4008

Office hours: M/W 3:00-5:00 pm, Th 9:30-10:30 am           Email: vincetti@shsu.edu

 

Required Texts and Materials *

 

·         Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (6th edition)

·         Workbook for Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (6th edition)

·         Example CD’s and Finale® Workbook software – included with your Workbook for Tonal Harmony

·         Music for Analysis: Examples from the Common Practice Period and the Twentieth Century, Benjamin,       Horvit, and Nelson (6th edition)

·         Music staff paper; pencils, eraser (Assignment/exams done in ink will not be accepted!)

 

*ALL STUDENTS MUST OWN THEIR OWN BOOKS AND HAVE ALL MATERIALS PRESENT FOR EVERY CLASS PERIOD.

 

Course Description

 

This course provides an intensive drill in the fundamentals of music theory followed by an introduction to tonal music of the Western tradition.  After mastering basic concepts involving the visual recognition and written reproduction of key signatures, scales, intervals, rhythm, meter, triads, and seventh chords, students will study figured bass, Roman Numeral analysis, and four-voice part writing of diatonic music using triads in all inversions.  This course’s content is coordinated with that of Musicianship I (MUS 124).

 

 

Course Objectives

 

·         Elements of Pitch (Chapter 1): The keyboard and octave registers, notation of the staff, major and minor scales and key signatures, scale degree names, intervals, modes.

 

·         Elements of Rhythm (Chapter 2): Rhythm, durational symbols, beat and tempo, meter, division of the beat, simple and compound time signatures.

 

·         Introduction to Triads and Sevenths (Chapter 3): Triads, and seventh chords, inversions, inversion symbols and figured bass, lead sheet symbols, recognizing chords in various textures.

 

·         Diatonic Chords in Major and Minor (Chapter 4):  The minor scale, diatonic triads in major and minor, diatonic seventh chords in major and minor.

 

·         Harmonic Progression and the Sequence (Chapter 7): Qualities of typical chord progressions and sequences found in tonal music.

 

·         Principles of Voice Leading (Chapter 5): The melodic line, notating chords, voicing a single triad, parallel motion.

 

·         Root Position Part Writing (Chapter 6):  Root position, part writing with repeated roots, root position part writing a 4th (5th) apart, root position part writing a 3rd (6th) apart, root position part writing a 2nd (7th) apart, instrumental ranges and transpositions.

 

·         Triads in First Inversion (Kostka, Chapter 8): Bass arpeggiation, substituting first inversion triads, parallel sixth chords, part writing first inversion triads, soprano-bass counterpoint.

 

 

Co-ENROLLMENT

 

Normally, students in this class will be enrolled in MUS 124 (Musicianship I) and MUS 111X (Class Piano I).  The principles dealt with in these corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes all build upon and reinforce each other.  These courses should be taken concurrently to ensure maximum success in learning the fundamental principles of Western music.  Please notify your instructor if you are not currently enrolled in corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes.

 

 

 

CLASS PARTICIPATION

 

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, etc.  Bring your questions to class.  Students who have not brought their materials, are sleeping in class, are not paying attention, or are disrupting the learning environment in any way may be counted absent for that class period.  Being physically present in class does not necessarily constitute attendance! 

 

 

THEORY DEPARMENT Attendance AND TARDY POLICIES

 

Regular and punctual attendance is expected of you throughout the semester.  University policy permits three classroom hours of unexcused absence without penalty per semester (MWF = 3 absences, TTH = 2 absences).  Reserve these for possible emergency or illness.  For each additional unexcused MWF absence, one-third of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  For each additional unexcused TTH absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  Valid excuses include official university functions or illness with appropriate documentation.  If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact your instructor at least one week in advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled.  Once a test has been returned, a make-up test will not be possible.  You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on the days of your absence. 

 

The instructor will take attendance at the beginning of each class period.  Students not arriving by the time attendance is completed will need to sign the official tardy sign-in sheet at the front of the classroom in order to be counted present for that class period.  Students failing to sign this list when tardy will be counted absent without exception.  Every student will be allowed 2 tardies without penalty per semester.  Every third tardy will be counted as equal to one absence.  (3 tardies = 1 absence, 6 tardies = 2 absences, etc.) 

 

!!! Attendance is a significant factor affecting your success in this course !!!

 

BLACKBOARD

Grades, attendance, and tardies will be posted and updated regularly on Blackboard by your instructor so that you may keep track of this important information throughout the semester and report any discrepancies you may find.

 

CLASSROOM ETIQUETTE

Students will NOT be allowed to have food or drinks in the classroom; however, water in a closed container is acceptable with instructor’s approval.  Students may NOT use cell phones or other electronic devices such as laptops, iPods, etc. during class.  Students may be penalized one tardy for each disruption caused by any of these devices during class.  Special needs accommodations for allowing any of the above is allowed, but only through approval of the university and the Counseling Center.

 

 

NEATNESS

 

In order to properly evaluate your work, your instructor must be able to read it.  Therefore, all work done for this class MUST be legible as determined by the instructor.  Any work the instructor considers to be illegible will NOT be graded and will NOT receive credit.

 

 

TIMED QUIZZES

 

Timed quizzes may be given each week throughout the semester.  If you make an 80% or higher on the original timed quiz in class, you have the option to take up to two retakes to improve your grade.  The highest grade will be recorded.  If you do not make an 80% or higher on the original timed quiz in class, you will be required to take the first retake.   If you do not make an 80% or higher on the first retake, you will be required to do the final retake. If you make an 80% or higher on the first retake, you may keep your grade, or you have the option to take the final retake to improve your score. The highest grade will be recorded.  If your score is below an 80% on the final retake, the grade you receive will be your final grade for the timed quiz.  If you miss the original timed quiz in class, you must take the first retake.  The first and final retakes must be taken at timed quiz/tutoring sessions.  Please see attached schedule of deadlines for the first and final retakes.  If you miss a required first or final retake, you will receive a zero for that quiz.

 

 

 

 

 

Homework Policy for Theory I-IV

 

Your three lowest homework/pop quiz grades will be dropped.  Homework is due at the beginning of class –NO EXCEPTIONS.  If you are absent, you may get someone to turn your homework in for you at the beginning of class.  No homework is accepted late.  If you miss a pop quiz because of an absence, excused or unexcused, you will not be able to retake it. 

 

Resubmission policy for homework:

 

Students who receive unsatisfactory marks (79 or below) will have the opportunity to resubmit an assignment to the instructor.  You will receive half credit for all points corrected, with a highest possible grade of 80. Revised work is due the class meeting after it is returned to the student.  Students turning in an incomplete assignment, you may only resubmit the portion that was originally completed.

 

 

 

 

FINAL GRADE CALCULATIONS FOR THEORY I-IV

 

Assignments                                                                                                                            15%

Quizzes                                                                                                                                                20%

Final Project                                                                                                                               5%

Unit Exams (3 Unit Exams worth 20% each)**                                                                                   60%

 

Possible Penalties for Class Attendance/Participation                                                     (see above)

 

**50 minutes will be allotted for each of the first two Theory Unit Exams.  The Final Exam will be a cumulative exam given during the scheduled final time.  The Final Exam will take place as scheduled by the university, unless your instructor indicates otherwise.

 

Grading Scale

 

A  =  89.5 – 100

B  =  79.5 – 89.4

C  =  69.5 – 79.4

D  =  59.5 – 69.4

F   =      0 –  59.4

 

Note: Your instructor will NOT freely give points or extra credit to students to improve their final grade.

 

 

 

SHSU THEORY DEPARTMENT TUTORING POLICY

 

Each student has his/her own unique areas of strength and weakness.  If you are falling behind in a certain area and are not able to visit your instructor during scheduled office hours, feel free to contact them via email to arrange a time to meet that will fit your schedule.  A department tutor may also be available for free tutoring for all theory and musicianship students throughout the semester.  (More information on this will be given a week or two into the semester.)  NOTE: The Kostka/Payne Tonal Harmony text now has online tutorials to help you with the basic concepts from each chapter in the text.  Simply take the following link (www.mhhe.com/kp5), click on “Student Edition” under “Online Learning Center” at the left and choose the desired part of the book on the scroll-down list on the left and lesson with which you desire extra help or practice.  Other free websites such as www.musictheory.net can be a great resource for students seeking help.  Ask your instructor or see the SHSU Theory and Composition website for even more ideas.

 

 

 

Unit Exam Dates (subject to change if needed):

 

Unit One Exam                        9/26/08 Friday

Unit Two Exam                       10/31/08 Friday

Final Exam                  (check university final exam schedule)

 

 

 

 

 

Early Warning Slips / FIRST ALERT

 

After the first two exams, the instructor will fill out an “Early Warning Slip” on behalf of any student having problems with grades, attendance, attitude, fundamental skills, etc.  These official notifications by the theory department are sent to a student’s applied instructor and/or ensemble director in order to express specific concerns regarding the student’s academic performance. 

 

The Counseling Center on campus also offers a service called “First Alert” which aims to give aid to students identified by their instructors as needing extra help with their coursework.  At any time during the semester, instructors may send a “First Alert” warning to the counseling center on campus, if a student seems to be having any kind of difficulty in class.  The theory department is committed to working with students, applied instructors, and ensemble directors to ensure each student’s success in the classroom.

 

 

 

Requirements for Students Receiving Unsatisfactory Grades

 

Students who have received a final grade of D or F in any theory or musicianship course must repeat that course until they receive a final grade of C or higher before promotion to the next level will be granted.  Note that all theory and musicianship courses with prerequisites require the student to have passed the previous level of both theory and musicianship with a final grade of C or higher.  For example, before you may enroll in Musicianship 2, you must have passed both Theory I and Musicianship I with a final grade of C or higher.  These courses are designed to work together to gradually build upon your level of knowledge and skill in these areas.  Taking any course out of sequence or without the approval of the theory department can jeopardize your grade point average, your ability to succeed in more advanced theory courses, and even your chances of graduation.   Again, the theory department is committed to ensuring the academic success of each and every student.

 

 

 

 

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty:

 

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action. Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to, cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism, collusion and the abuse of resource materials.

 

Proper Classroom Demeanor/Rules of Conduct:

 

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any other form of distraction.  Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in, minimally, a directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in accordance with university policy.

 

Americans with Disabilities Act:

 

SHSU adheres to all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines with respect to providing reasonable accommodations for students with disabilities.  If you have a disability that may affect adversely your work in this class, then I encourage you to register with the Counseling Center and to talk with me about how I can best help you.  All disclosures of disabilities will be kept strictly confidential.  No accommodation can be made until you register with the Counseling Center.

 

Student Absences on Religious Holidays Policy:

 

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose.  A student whose absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused within a reasonable time after the absence.  University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.  A student desiring to be absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a) religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the religious holy day(s).  This request must be made in the first 15 days of the semester or the first 7 days of a summer session in with the absence(s) will occur.  The instructor will complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable timeframe in which the missed assignments and/or examinations are to be completed.

 

 
  2

MUS 123 Theory of Music II. [MUSI 1212] This course expands the study of the fundamentals of music theory to focus on diatonic elements of the Western tradition. In addition to the continuing focus on four-voice part writing and Roman numeral analysis, students are introduced to non-chord tones and basic studies of counterpoint and phrase structure. This course’s content is coordinated with that of MUSICIANSHIP II (MUS 125). Prerequisite: MUS 122 with minimum of “C” grade; MUS 124 with a “C” or better; or by placement exam. Credit 2.

MUS 123: Music Theory II

MWF _________, Room ___

Spring 2009

Instructor: 

Office:                                                                                                            Phone:

Office hours:                                                                                                 Email:

 

 

Required Texts and Materials *

 

·         Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (6th edition)

·         Workbook for Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (6th edition)

·         Example CD’s and Finale® Workbook software – included with your Workbook for Tonal Harmony

·         Music staff paper; pencils, eraser (Assignment/exams done in ink will not be accepted!)

 

*ALL STUDENTS MUST OWN THEIR OWN BOOKS AND HAVE ALL MATERIALS PRESENT FOR EVERY CLASS PERIOD.

 

 

 

Course Description

 

This course is a continuation of the Western musical elements introduced in Theory I (MUS 122).  The course begins with a brief introduction to contrapuntal principles and small formal (phrase) structures found in music from the common practice period.  The remainder of the semester involves more detailed work with part-writing and analyzing diatonic music, including non-chord tones and diatonic seventh chords.  This course’s content is coordinated with that of Musicianship II (MUS 125).

 

 

 

Course Objectives

 

·         Cadences, Phrases, and Periods (Chapter 10): Musical form, cadences, cadences and harmonic rhythm, motives and phrases, period forms

 

·         Introduction to Counterpoint (Supplement): Underlying principles of soprano-bass counterpoint in four-voice writing.

 

·         Triads in Second Inversion (Chapter 9): Bass arpeggiation and the melodic bass, the cadential six-four, the passing six-four, the pedal six-four part writing for second inversion triads.

 

·         Non-Chord Tones 1 (Chapter 11):  Classification of non-chord tones, passing tones, neighboring tones, suspensions and retardations, figured bass and lead sheet symbols, embellishing a simple texture.

 

·         Non-Chord Tones 2 (Chapter 12): Apoggiaturas, escape tones, the neighbor group, anticipations, the pedal point, special problems in the analysis of non-chord tones.

 

·         The V7 Chord (Chapter 13): General voice-leading considerations, the V7 in root position, the V7 in three parts, other resolutions of the V7, the inverted V7, the V6/5 chord, the V4/3 chord, the V4/2 chord, the approach to the 7th.

 

·         The II7 and VII7 Chords (Chapter 14):  The II7 chord, the VII7 chord in major, the VII7 chord in minor.

·         Other Diatonic Seventh Chords (Chapter 15): The IV7 chord, the VI7 chord, the I7 chord, the III7 chord, seventh chords and the circle-of-fifths progression.

 

 

 

Co-ENROLLMENT

 

Normally, students in this class will be enrolled in MUS 125 (Musicianship II) and MUS 112X (Class Piano II).  The principles dealt with in these corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes all build upon and reinforce each other.  These courses should be taken concurrently to ensure maximum success in learning the fundamental principles of Western music.  Please notify your instructor if you are not currently enrolled in corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes.

 

 

CLASS PARTICIPATION

 

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, etc.  Bring your questions to class.  Students who have not brought their materials, are sleeping in class, are not paying attention, or are disrupting the learning environment in any way may be counted absent for that class period.  Being physically present in class does not necessarily constitute attendance! 

 

 

THEORY DEPARMENT Attendance AND TARDY POLICIES

 

Regular and punctual attendance is expected of you throughout the semester.  University policy permits three classroom hours of unexcused absence without penalty per semester (MWF = 3 absences, TTH = 2 absences).  Reserve these for possible emergency or illness.  For each additional unexcused MWF absence, one-third of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  For each additional unexcused TTH absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  Valid excuses include official university functions or illness with appropriate documentation.  If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact your instructor at least one week in advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled.  Once a test has been returned, a make-up test will not be possible.  You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on the days of your absence. 

 

The instructor will take attendance at the beginning of each class period.  Students not arriving by the time attendance is completed will need to sign the official tardy sign-in sheet at the front of the classroom in order to be counted present for that class period.  Students failing to sign this list when tardy will be counted absent without exception.  Every student will be allowed 2 tardies without penalty per semester.  Every third tardy will be counted as equal to one absence.  (3 tardies = 1 absence, 6 tardies = 2 absences, etc.) 

 

!!! Attendance is a significant factor affecting your success in this course !!!

 

BLACKBOARD

Grades, attendance, and tardies will be posted and updated regularly on Blackboard by your instructor so that you may keep track of this important information throughout the semester and report any discrepancies you may find.

 

CLASSROOM ETIQUETTE

Students will NOT be allowed to have food or drinks in the classroom; however, water in a closed container is acceptable with instructor’s approval.  Students may NOT use cell phones or other electronic devices such as laptops, iPods, etc. during class.  Students may be penalized one tardy for each disruption caused by any of these devices during class.  Special needs accommodations for allowing any of the above is allowed, but only through approval of the university and the Counseling Center.

 

 

NEATNESS

 

In order to properly evaluate your work, your instructor must be able to read it.  Therefore, all work done for this class MUST be legible as determined by the instructor.  Any work the instructor considers to be illegible will NOT be graded and will NOT receive credit.

 

 

TIMED QUIZZES

 

Timed quizzes may be given at any point throughout the semester.  If you make an 80% or higher on the original timed quiz in class, you have the option to take up to two retakes to improve your grade.  The highest grade will be recorded.  If you do not make an 80% or higher on the original timed quiz in class, you will be required to take the first retake.   If you do not make an 80% or higher on the first retake, you will be required to do the final retake. If you make an 80% or higher on the first retake, you may keep your grade, or you have the option to take the final retake to improve your score. The highest grade will be recorded.  If your score is below an 80% on the final retake, the grade you receive will be your final grade for the timed quiz.  If you miss the original timed quiz in class, you must take the first retake.  The first and final retakes must be taken at timed quiz/tutoring sessions.  Please see attached schedule of deadlines for the first and final retakes.  If you miss a required first or final retake, you will receive a zero for that quiz.

 

 

Homework Policy for Theory I-IV

 

Your three lowest homework/pop quiz grades will be dropped.  Homework is due at the beginning of class –NO EXCEPTIONS.  If you are absent, you may get someone to turn your homework in for you at the beginning of class.  No homework is accepted late.  If you miss a pop quiz because of an absence, excused or unexcused, you will not be able to retake it. 

 

Resubmission policy for homework:

 

Students who receive unsatisfactory marks (79 or below) will have the opportunity to resubmit an assignment to the instructor.  You will receive half credit for all points corrected, with a highest possible grade of 80. Revised work is due the class meeting after it is returned to the student.  Students turning in an incomplete assignment, you may only resubmit the portion that was originally completed.

 

 

 

 

FINAL GRADE CALCULATIONS FOR THEORY I-IV

 

Assignments                                                                                                                            15%

Quizzes                                                                                                                                                20%

Final Project                                                                                                                               5%

Unit Exams (3 Unit Exams worth 20% each)**                                                                                   60%

 

Possible Penalties for Class Attendance/Participation                                                     (see above)

 

**50 minutes will be allotted for each of the first two Theory Unit Exams.  The Final Exam will be a cumulative exam given during the scheduled final time.  The Final Exam will take place as scheduled by the university, unless your instructor indicates otherwise.

 

Grading Scale

 

A  =  89.5 – 100

B  =  79.5 – 89.4

C  =  69.5 – 79.4

D  =  59.5 – 69.4

F   =      0 –  59.4

 

Note: Your instructor will NOT freely give points or extra credit to students to improve their final grade.

 

 

 

SHSU THEORY DEPARTMENT TUTORING POLICY

 

Each student has his/her own unique areas of strength and weakness.  If you are falling behind in a certain area and are not able to visit your instructor during scheduled office hours, feel free to contact them via email to arrange a time to meet that will fit your schedule.  A department tutor may also be available for free tutoring for all theory and musicianship students throughout the semester.  (More information on this will be given a week or two into the semester.)  NOTE: The Kostka/Payne Tonal Harmony text now has online tutorials to help you with the basic concepts from each chapter in the text.  Simply take the following link (www.mhhe.com/kp5), click on “Student Edition” under “Online Learning Center” at the left and choose the desired part of the book on the scroll-down list on the left and lesson with which you desire extra help or practice.  Other free websites such as www.teoria.com and www.musictheory.net can be a great resource for students seeking help.  Ask your instructor for suggestions for individual practice outside of class.

 

 

 

TENTaTIVE Unit Exam Dates (subject to change if needed):

 

Unit One Exam                        2/27/09 Friday

Unit Two Exam                       4/10/08 Friday

Final Exam                  (check university final exam schedule)

 

Early Warning Slips / FIRST ALERT

 

After the first two exams, the instructor will fill out an “Early Warning Slip” on behalf of any student having problems with grades, attendance, attitude, fundamental skills, etc.  These official notifications by the theory department are sent to a student’s applied instructor and/or ensemble director in order to express specific concerns regarding the student’s academic performance. 

 

The Counseling Center on campus also offers a service called “First Alert” which aims to give aid to students identified by their instructors as needing extra help with their coursework.  At any time during the semester, instructors may send a “First Alert” warning to the counseling center on campus, if a student seems to be having any kind of difficulty in class.  The theory department is committed to working with students, applied instructors, and ensemble directors to ensure each student’s success in the classroom.

 

 

 

Requirements for Students Receiving Unsatisfactory Grades

 

Students who have received a final grade of D or F in any theory or musicianship course must repeat that course until they receive a final grade of C or higher before promotion to the next level will be granted.  Note that all theory and musicianship courses with prerequisites require the student to have passed the previous level of both theory and musicianship with a final grade of C or higher.  For example, before you may enroll in Musicianship 2, you must have passed both Theory I and Musicianship I with a final grade of C or higher.  These courses are designed to work together to gradually build upon your level of knowledge and skill in these areas.  Taking any course out of sequence or without the approval of the theory department can jeopardize your grade point average, your ability to succeed in more advanced theory courses, and even your chances of graduation.   Again, the theory department is committed to ensuring the academic success of each and every student.

 

 

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty:

 

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action. Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to, cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism, collusion and the abuse of resource materials.

 

Proper Classroom Demeanor/Rules of Conduct:

 

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any other form of distraction.  Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in, minimally, a directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in accordance with university policy.

 

Americans with Disabilities Act:

 

SHSU adheres to all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines with respect to providing reasonable accommodations for students with disabilities.  If you have a disability that may affect adversely your work in this class, then I encourage you to register with the Counseling Center and to talk with me about how I can best help you.  All disclosures of disabilities will be kept strictly confidential.  No accommodation can be made until you register with the Counseling Center.

 

Student Absences on Religious Holidays Policy:

 

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose.  A student whose absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused within a reasonable time after the absence.  University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.  A student desiring to be absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a) religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the religious holy day(s).  This request must be made in the first 15 days of the semester or the first 7 days of a summer session in with the absence(s) will occur.  The instructor will complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable timeframe in which the missed assignments and/or examinations are to be completed.

 

 
  2MUS 124 Musicianship I. [MUSI 1216] This course provides intensive drill in identifying and reproducing the fundamental structures of music. The course content, which is coordinated with that of THEORY I (MUS 122), is divided into practical skills and aural skills. Practical skills develop your ability to perform music. They include activities such as performing rhythmic patterns and sight-singing solfege patterns and written melodies. Aural skills improve your ability to hear music and interpret what you hear. These include exercises such as interval identification, chord identification, scale identification, rhythmic dictation, melodic dictation, and harmonic dictation. Credit 2.

MUS 124: Musicianship I

MWF ???-???am, Room 2??

Fall 2008

 

Instructor: 

Office:                                                                                     Phone:

Office hours:                                                               Email:

 

 

Required Texts and Materials

 

·         Music for Ear Training, Horvit, Koozin, and Nelson (2nd edition)???????????????????????????????????

·         Music for Sight-Singing, Benjamin, Horvit, and Nelson (5th edition)?????????????????????????????????

·         Music for Ear Training CD-ROM, included with text.

·         Music staff paper; pencils, eraser (Assignment, quizzes, or exams done in ink will not be accepted!)

 

*ALL STUDENTS MUST OWN THEIR OWN BOOKS AND HAVE ALL MATERIALS PRESENT FOR EVERY CLASS PERIOD.

 

 

Course Description

 

This course provides intensive drill in identifying and reproducing the fundamental structures of music.  The course content, which is coordinated with that of Music Theory I, is divided into practical skills and aural skills.

 

Practical skills develop your ability to perform music.  They include activities such as performing rhythmic patterns and sight-singing solfege patterns and written melodies.

 

Aural skills improve your ability to hear music and interpret what you hear.  These include exercises such as interval identification, chord identification, scale identification, rhythmic dictation, melodic dictation, and harmonic dictation.

 

 

Course Objectives

 

Sight-Singing:                                     Melodies implying I, IV, V, and V7; Introducing the Alto Clef

Rhythm Reading:                   Simple meters, Anacruses (Upbeats) and 4:1 Subdivisions of the Beat

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Interval ID:                            All intervals (m2-P8)

Rhythmic Dictation:               Simple meters, Beat subdivision by 4, Anacrusis

Melodic Dictation:                  Primary triads and the dominant seventh

Scale ID:                                 Major and minor scales

Harmonic Dictation:             Primary triads and the dominant seventh; Cadential tonic six-four

Chord Identification:             Major, minor, augmented, and diminished triads (in root position)

 

 

 

Co-ENROLLMENT

 

Normally, students in this class will be enrolled in MUS 122 (Theory I) and MUS 111X (Class Piano I).  The principles dealt with in these corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes all build upon and reinforce each other.  These courses should be taken concurrently to ensure maximum success in learning the fundamental principles of Western music.  Please notify your instructor if you are not currently enrolled in corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes.

 

 

 

cLASS PARTICIPATION

 

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, etc.  Bring your questions to class.  Students who have not brought their materials, are sleeping in class, are not paying attention, or are disrupting the learning environment in any way may be counted absent for that class period.  Being physically present in class does not necessarily constitute attendance! 

THEORY DEPARMENT Attendance AND TARDY POLICIES

 

Regular and punctual attendance is expected of you throughout the semester.  University policy permits three classroom hours of unexcused absence without penalty per semester (MWF = 3 absences, TTH = 2 absences).  Reserve these for possible emergency or illness.  For each additional unexcused MWF absence, one-third of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  For each additional unexcused TTH absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  Valid excuses include official university functions or illness with appropriate documentation.  If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact your instructor at least one week in advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled.  Once a test has been returned, a make-up test will not be possible.  You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on the days of your absence. 

 

The instructor will take attendance at the beginning of each class period.  Students not arriving by the time roll is completed will need to sign the official tardy sign-in sheet at the front of the classroom in order to be counted present for that class period.  Students failing to sign this list when tardy will be counted absent without exception.  Every student will be allowed 2 tardies without penalty per semester.  Every third tardy will be counted as equal to one absence.  (3 tardies = 1 absence, 6 tardies = 2 absences, etc.)  

 

!!! Attendance is a significant factor affecting your success in this course !!!

 

 

 

CLASSROOM ETIQUETTE

Students will NOT be allowed to have food or drinks in the classroom; however, water in a closed container is acceptable with instructor’s approval.  Students may NOT use cell phones or other electronic devices such as laptops, iPods, etc. during class.  Students will be penalized one tardy for each disruption caused by any of these devices during class.  Special needs accommodations for allowing any of the above is allowed, but only through approval of the university and the Counseling Center.

 

 

 

NEATNESS

 

In order to properly evaluate your work, your instructor must be able to read it.  Therefore, all work done for this class MUST be legible as determined by the instructor.  Any work the instructor considers to be illegible will NOT be graded and will NOT receive credit.

 

 

 

Homework Policy for MUSICIANSHIP I-III

 

Your three lowest homework/quiz grades will be dropped.  Homework is due at the beginning of class –NO EXCEPTIONS.  If you are absent, you may get someone to turn your homework in for you at the beginning of class.  No homework is accepted late.  If you miss a quiz because of an absence, excused or unexcused, you will not be able to retake it. 

 

On most class days, homework assignments will be given to provide further practice for students with rhythmic, melodic, and harmonic dictation.  These dictation exercises will require the use of the CD-ROM that goes with the Music for Ear Training text.  Each student will be able to hear each exercise as many times as they wish, allowing them to work at their own pace.  For some assignments, full answers to the dictation exercises will be given on the CD-ROM upon completion.  For other assignments, the instructor will provide a key or devote a few minutes of class-time to discussing the exercises after they have been checked for completion and handed back on the due date.  Because of the availability of infinite hearings and occasional answers from the CD-ROM, it is up to each student to conduct each homework exercise honestly and in a manner that will give them ample opportunity to improve their skills.  NOTE: Homework comprises only 10% of the overall grade.  Its main purpose is to prepare the student for the dictation quizzes and exams which are a much more substantial portion of the overall grade.

 

 

 

 

 

FINAL GRADE CALCULATIONS FOR MUSICIANSHIP I-III

 

            Daily Homework Assignments                                                                                    10%

                                               

Practical Skills Quizzes                                                                                                15%

            Practical Skills Exams  (3 worth 10% each)                                                     30%

                                               

Aural Skills Quizzes                                                                                        15%

            Aural Skills Exams      (3 worth 10% each)                                                     30%

 

            Penalties for Absences/Failure to Participate                                           (see above)

 

*50 minutes will be allotted for each of the first two Musicianship Unit Exams and the final exam.  The Final Exam will take place as scheduled by the university, unless your instructor indicates otherwise.

 

Grading Scale

 

 A  =  90 - 100

B  =  80 - 89

C  =  70 - 79

D  =  60 - 69

F  =   0 -  59

 

Note: Your instructor will NOT freely give points or extra credit to students to improve their final grade.

 

 

 

SHSU THEORY DEPARTMENT TUTORING POLICY

 

Each student has his/her own unique areas of strength and weakness.  If you are falling behind in a certain area and are not able to visit your instructor during scheduled office hours, feel free to contact them via email to arrange a time to meet that will fit your schedule.  A department tutor aide may also be available for free tutoring for all theory and musicianship students throughout the semester.  (More information on this will be given a week or two into the semester.)  NOTE: The CD-ROM included with the Music for Ear Training text includes a wealth of examples for extra practice with aural skills.  Further, free websites such as www.musictheory.net can be a great resource for students seeking help.

 

 

 

AURAL SKILLS Exam Dates (subject to change if needed):

 

Unit One Exam                        9/29/07

Unit Two Exam                       11/3/07

Final Exam                  12/10/07 (Last day of class)

***Pracitcal Skills Exams will be given individually outside of class at times/dates to be announced by instructor.

 

 

 

Early Warning Slips / FIRST ALERT

 

After the first two exams, the instructor will fill out an “Early Warning Slip” on behalf of any student having problems with grades, attendance, attitude, fundamental skills, etc.  These official notifications by the theory department are sent to a student’s applied instructor and/or ensemble director in order to express specific concerns regarding the student’s academic performance. 

 

The Counseling Center on campus also offers a service called “First Alert” which aims to give aid to students identified by their instructors as needing extra help with their coursework.  At any time during the semester, instructors may send a “First Alert” warning to the counseling center on campus, if a student seems to be having any kind of difficulty in class.  The theory department is committed to working with students, applied instructors, and ensemble directors to ensure each student’s success in the classroom.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Requirements for Students Receiving Unsatisfactory Grades

 

Students who have received a final grade of F in any theory or musicianship course the previous semester will be required to drop the next course in the sequence if still enrolled at the beginning of the next semester.  Prerequisite courses MUST be passed with a grade of C or higher for promotion to the next level.  Students who have received a final grade of D in any prerequisite theory or musicianship course will be required to attend one hour of tutoring each week from one of our official theory/musicianship tutors until that student makes a C or higher on an exam.  Any student receiving a grade of D or F on any exam throughout the semester will be required to attend one hour of tutoring each week until that student makes a C or higher on an exam.  Again, the theory department is committed to ensuring the academic success of each and every student.

 

 

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty:

 

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action. Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to, cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism, collusion and the abuse of resource materials.

 

Proper Classroom Demeanor/Rules of Conduct:

 

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any other form of distraction.  Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in a, minimally, a directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in accordance with university policy.

 

Americans with Disabilities Act:

 

SHSU adheres to all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines with respect to providing reasonable accommodations for students with disabilities.  If you have a disability that may affect adversely your work in this class, then I encourage you to register with the SHSU Counseling Center and to talk with me about how I can best help you.  All disclosures of disabilities will be kept strictly confidential.  NOTE: no accommodation can be made until you register with the Counseling Center.

 

Student Absences on Religious Holidays Policy:

 

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose.  A student whose absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused within a reasonable time after the absence.

University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.  A student desiring to be absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a) religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the religious holy day(s).  This request must be made in the first fifteen days of the semester or the first seven days of a summer session in with the absence(s) will occur.  The instructor will complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable timeframe in which the missed assignments and/or examinations are to be completed.

 

 
  2MUS 125 Musicianship II. [MUSI 1217] This course provides intensive drill in identifying and reproducing the fundamental structures of music. The course content, which is coordinated with that of THEORY II (MUS 123), is divided into practical skills and aural skills. Practical skills develop your ability to perform music. They include activities such as performing rhythmic patterns and sight-singing solfege patterns and written melodies. Aural skills improve your ability to hear music and interpret what you hear. These include exercises such as chord identification, rhythmic dictation, melodic dictation, and harmonic dictation. Prerequisites: MUS 122 and 124 with grade of “C” or better; or by placement exam. Credit 2.

MUS 125: Musicianship II

(Day and Time)

Spring 2009

 

Instructor: 

Office:             Kirkley (Room #)                                                        Phone:

Office hours:                                                                           Email:

 

 

Required Texts and Materials

 

·         Music for Ear Training, Horvit, Koozin, and Nelson (3rd edition)

·         Music for Sight-Singing, Benjamin, Horvit, and Nelson (5th edition)

·         Music for Ear Training CD-ROM, included with text.

·         Music staff paper; pencils, eraser (Assignment, quizzes, or exams done in ink will not be accepted!)

 

*ALL STUDENTS MUST OWN THEIR OWN BOOKS AND HAVE ALL MATERIALS PRESENT FOR EVERY CLASS PERIOD.

 

 

Course Description

 

This course provides intensive drill in identifying and reproducing the fundamental structures of music.  The course content, which is coordinated with that of Music Theory II, is divided into practical skills and aural skills.

 

Practical skills develop your ability to perform music.  They include activities such as performing rhythmic patterns and sight-singing solfege patterns and written melodies.

 

Aural skills improve your ability to hear music and interpret what you hear.  These include exercises such as interval identification, chord identification, scale identification, rhythmic dictation, melodic dictation, and harmonic dictation.

 

 

Course Objectives

 

Sight-Singing:                     Minor mode, Supertonic triad, Submediant and mediant triads,                                                              Tenor clef, Seventh chords

Rhythm Reading:               Dots and ties, Compound meter, Tuplets

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Rhythmic Dictation:          Dots and ties, Compound meter, Tuplets

Melodic Dictation:             Minor mode, Supertonic triad, All diatonic triads, Supertonic and leading-tone                                                                     sevenths

Harmonic Dictation:         Minor mode and First inversion of triads, Supertonic                                                                          triad, Inversions of V7, All diatonic triads, Supertonic and                                                                 leading-tone sevenths

Chord ID:                             All Root position and Inverted triads and V7 chords, Root positions of all                                                             other seventh chords

 

Co-ENROLLMENT

 

Normally, students in this class will be enrolled in MUS 222 (Theory III) and MUS 113X (Class Piano III).  The principles dealt with in these corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes all build upon and reinforce each other.  These courses should be taken concurrently to ensure maximum success in learning the fundamental principles of Western music.  Please notify your instructor if you are not currently enrolled in corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes.

 

CLASS PARTICIPATION

 

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, etc.  Bring your questions to class.  Students who have not brought their materials, are sleeping in class, are not paying attention, or are disrupting the learning environment in any way may be counted absent for that class period.  Being physically present in class does not necessarily constitute attendance! 

 

 

THEORY DEPARMENT Attendance AND TARDY POLICIES

 

Regular and punctual attendance is expected of you throughout the semester.  University policy permits three classroom hours of unexcused absence without penalty per semester (MWF = 3 absences, TTH = 2 absences).  Reserve these for possible emergency or illness.  For each additional unexcused MWF absence, one-third of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  For each additional unexcused TTH absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  Valid excuses include official university functions or illness with appropriate documentation.  If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact your instructor at least one week in advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled.  Once a test has been returned, a make-up test will not be possible.  You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on the days of your absence. 

 

The instructor will take attendance at the beginning of each class period.  Students not arriving by the time attendance is completed will need to sign the official tardy sign-in sheet at the front of the classroom in order to be counted present for that class period.  Students failing to sign this list when tardy will be counted absent without exception.  Every student will be allowed 2 tardies without penalty per semester.  Every third tardy will be counted as equal to one absence.  (3 tardies = 1 absence, 6 tardies = 2 absences, etc.) 

 

!!! Attendance is a significant factor affecting your success in this course !!!

 

BLACKBOARD

Grades, attendance, and tardies will be posted and updated regularly on Blackboard by your instructor so that you may keep track of this important information throughout the semester and report any discrepancies you may find.

 

CLASSROOM ETIQUETTE

Students will NOT be allowed to have food or drinks in the classroom; however, water in a closed container is acceptable with instructor’s approval.  Students may NOT use cell phones or other electronic devices such as laptops, iPods, etc. during class.  Students may be penalized one tardy for each disruption caused by any of these devices during class.  Special needs accommodations for allowing any of the above is allowed, but only through approval of the university and the Counseling Center.

 

 

NEATNESS

 

In order to properly evaluate your work, your instructor must be able to read it.  Therefore, all work done for this class MUST be legible as determined by the instructor.  Any work the instructor considers to be illegible will NOT be graded and will NOT receive credit.

 

 

Homework Policy for MUSICIANSHIP I-III

 

Your three lowest homework/quiz grades will be dropped.  Homework is due at the beginning of class –NO EXCEPTIONS.  If you are absent, you may get someone to turn your homework in for you at the beginning of class.  No homework is accepted late.  If you miss a quiz because of an absence, excused or unexcused, you will not be able to retake it. 

 

On most class days, homework assignments will be given to provide further practice for students with rhythmic, melodic, and harmonic dictation.  These dictation exercises will require the use of the CD-ROM that goes with the Music for Ear Training text.  Each student will be able to hear each exercise as many times as they wish, allowing them to work at their own pace.  NOTE: Homework comprises only 10% of the overall grade.  Its main purpose is to prepare the student for the dictation quizzes and exams which are a much more substantial portion of the overall grade.

 

 

 

 

 

FINAL GRADE CALCULATIONS FOR MUSICIANSHIP I-III

 

            Daily Homework Assignments                                                                                    10%

                                               

Practical Skills Quizzes                                                                                                15%

            Practical Skills Exams  (3 worth 10% each)                                                     30%

                                               

Aural Skills Quizzes                                                                                        15%

            Aural Skills Exams      (3 worth 10% each)                                                     30%

 

            Penalties for Absences/Failure to Participate                                           (see above)

 

*50 minutes will be allotted for each of the first two Musicianship Unit Exams and the final exam.  The Final Exam will take place as scheduled by the university, unless your instructor indicates otherwise.

 

Grading Scale

 

A  =  89.5 – 100

B  =  79.5 – 89.4

C  =  69.5 – 79.4

D  =  59.5 – 69.4

F   =      0 –  59.4

 

Note: Your instructor will NOT freely give points or extra credit to students to improve their final grade.

 

 

 

SHSU THEORY DEPARTMENT TUTORING POLICY

 

Each student has his/her own unique areas of strength and weakness.  If you are falling behind in a certain area and are not able to visit your instructor during scheduled office hours, feel free to contact them via email to arrange a time to meet that will fit your schedule.  A department tutor may also be available for free tutoring for all theory and musicianship students throughout the semester.  (More information on this will be given a week or two into the semester.)  NOTE: The Kostka/Payne Tonal Harmony text now has online tutorials to help you with the basic concepts from each chapter in the text.  Simply take the following link (www.mhhe.com/kp5), click on “Student Edition” under “Online Learning Center” at the left and choose the desired part of the book on the scroll-down list on the left and lesson with which you desire extra help or practice.  Other free websites such as www.teoria.com and www.musictheory.net can be a great resource for students seeking help.  Ask your instructor for suggestions for individual practice outside of class.

 

 

 

TENTaTIVE Unit Exam Dates (subject to change if needed):

 

Unit One Exam                        2/23/09 Friday

Unit Two Exam                       4/8/09 Friday

Final Exam                  5/6/09 Wednesday

 

Early Warning Slips / FIRST ALERT

 

After the first two exams, the instructor will fill out an “Early Warning Slip” on behalf of any student having problems with grades, attendance, attitude, fundamental skills, etc.  These official notifications by the theory department are sent to a student’s applied instructor and/or ensemble director in order to express specific concerns regarding the student’s academic performance. 

 

The Counseling Center on campus also offers a service called “First Alert” which aims to give aid to students identified by their instructors as needing extra help with their coursework.  At any time during the semester, instructors may send a “First Alert” warning to the counseling center on campus, if a student seems to be having any kind of difficulty in class.  The theory department is committed to working with students, applied instructors, and ensemble directors to ensure each student’s success in the classroom.

 

 

 

 

 

Requirements for Students Receiving Unsatisfactory Grades

 

Students who have received a final grade of D or F in any theory or musicianship course must repeat that course until they receive a final grade of C or higher before promotion to the next level will be granted.  Note that all theory and musicianship courses with prerequisites require the student to have passed the previous level of both theory and musicianship with a final grade of C or higher.  For example, before you may enroll in Musicianship 2, you must have passed both Theory I and Musicianship I with a final grade of C or higher.  These courses are designed to work together to gradually build upon your level of knowledge and skill in these areas.  Taking any course out of sequence or without the approval of the theory department can jeopardize your grade point average, your ability to succeed in more advanced theory courses, and even your chances of graduation.   Again, the theory department is committed to ensuring the academic success of each and every student.

 

 

 

 

 

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty:

 

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action. Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to, cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism, collusion and the abuse of resource materials.

 

 

Proper Classroom Demeanor/Rules of Conduct:

 

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any other form of distraction.  Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in, minimally, a directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in accordance with university policy.

 

 

Americans with Disabilities Act:

 

SHSU adheres to all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines with respect to providing reasonable accommodations for students with disabilities.  If you have a disability that may affect adversely your work in this class, then I encourage you to register with the Counseling Center and to talk with me about how I can best help you.  All disclosures of disabilities will be kept strictly confidential.  No accommodation can be made until you register with the Counseling Center.

 

 

Student Absences on Religious Holidays Policy:

 

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose.  A student whose absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused within a reasonable time after the absence.  University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.  A student desiring to be absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a) religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the religious holy day(s).  This request must be made in the first 15 days of the semester or the first 7 days of a summer session in with the absence(s) will occur.  The instructor will complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable timeframe in which the missed assignments and/or examinations are to be completed.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
  2MUS 222 Theory of Music III. [MUSI 2211] This course expands the study of diatonic Western musical elements to include chromatic conventions, including secondary functions, modal borrowing, Neapolitan and augmented sixth chords. A brief introduction to binary, ternary, and other formal designs expands on the study of phrase structure from THEORY II (MUS 123). This course’s content is coordinated with that of MUSICIANSHIP III (MUS 224). Prerequisites: MUS 123 and 125 with “C” or better; or by placement exam. Credit 2.

MUS 222: Theory III

MWF ?-?:50am, Room 2??, CID:?????

Fall 2008

 

Instructor:                                                                  Office:

Phone:                                                                        Email:

Office hours:

 

 

 

Required Texts and Materials

 

·         Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (6th edition)

·         Workbook for Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (6th edition)

·         Example CD’s and Finale® Workbook software – included with your Workbook for Tonal Harmony

·         Music for Analysis: Examples from the Common Practice Period and the Twentieth Century, Benjamin, Horvit,                            and Nelson (6th edition)

·         Music staff paper; pencils, eraser (Assignment/exams done in ink will not be accepted!)

*ALL STUDENTS MUST OWN THEIR OWN BOOKS AND HAVE ALL MATERIALS PRESENT EVERY CLASS PERIOD.

 

 

 

Course Description

 

This course expands the study of diatonic Western musical elements to include chromatic conventions, including secondary functions, modal borrowing, Neapolitan and augmented sixth chords.  A brief introduction to binary, ternary, and other formal designs expands on the study of phrase structure from Theory II.  This course’s content is coordinated with that of Musicianship III.

 

 

 

Course Objectives

 

Secondary Functions 1 (Kostka, Chapter 16)

Chromaticism and altered chords, secondary functions, secondary dominant chords, spelling and recognizing secondary dominants, secondary dominants in context

 

Secondary Functions 2 (Kostka, Chapter 17)

Secondary leading-tone chords, spelling and recognizing secondary leading-tone chords, secondary leading-tone chords in context, sequences involving secondary functions, deceptive resolutions of secondary functions, other secondary functions

 

Modulations Using Diatonic Common Chords (Kostka, Chapter 18)

Modulation and change of key, modulation and tonicization, key relationships, common-chord modulation, analyzing common-chord modulation

 

Some Other Modulatory Techniques (Kostka, Chapter 19)

Altered chords as common chords, sequential modulation, modulation by common tone, monophonic modulation, direct modulation

 

Binary and Ternary Forms (Kostka, Chapter 20)

Binary, Ternary, and Rounded Binary, 12-bar blues, sonata, rondo, and other formal designs

 

Mode Mixture (Kostka, Chapter 21)

Borrowed chords in minor, the use of flat-6 in major, modulations involving mode mixture

 

The Neapolitan Chord (Chapter 22)

Qualities and typical uses of the Neapolitan in the tonal tradition

 

Augmented Sixth Chords 1 (Kostka, Chapter 23)

The interval of the augmented sixth, Italian, French, German, other uses of conventional augmented sixth chords   

 

 

 

Co-ENROLLMENT

 

Normally, students in this class will be enrolled in MUS 224 (Musicianship III) and MUS 113X (Class Piano III).  The principles dealt with in these corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes all build upon and reinforce each other.  These courses should be taken concurrently to ensure maximum success in learning the fundamental principles of Western music.  Please notify your instructor if you are not currently enrolled in corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes.

 

 

 

CLASS PARTICIPATION

 

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, etc.  Bring your questions to class.  Students who have not brought their materials, are sleeping in class, are not paying attention, or are disrupting the learning environment in any way may be counted absent for that class period.  Being physically present in class does not necessarily constitute attendance! 

 

 

 

THEORY DEPARMENT Attendance AND TARDY POLICIES

 

Regular and punctual attendance is expected of you throughout the semester.  University policy permits three classroom hours of unexcused absence without penalty per semester (MWF = 3 absences, TTH = 2 absences).  Reserve these for possible emergency or illness.  For each additional unexcused MWF absence, one-third of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  For each additional unexcused TTH absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  Valid excuses include official university functions or illness with appropriate documentation.  If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact your instructor at least one week in advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled.  Once a test has been returned, a make-up test will not be possible.  You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on the days of your absence. 

 

The instructor will take attendance at the beginning of each class period.  Students not arriving by the time roll is completed will need to sign the official tardy sign-in sheet at the front of the classroom in order to be counted present for that class period.  Students failing to sign this list when tardy will be counted absent without exception.  Every student will be allowed 2 tardies without penalty per semester.  Every third tardy will be counted as equal to one absence.  (3 tardies = 1 absence, 6 tardies = 2 absences, etc.)  

 

***Attendance is a significant factor affecting your success in this course.

 

 

 

CLASSROOM ETIQUETTE

Students will not be allowed to have food or drinks in the classroom; however, water in a closed container is acceptable.  Students may not use cell phones or other electronic devices such as laptops, iPods, etc. during class.  Students will be penalized one tardy for each disruption caused by any of these devices during class.

 

 

 

NEATNESS

 

In order to properly evaluate your work, your instructor must be able to read it.  Therefore, all work done for this class must be legible as determined by the instructor.  Any work the instructor considers to be illegible will not be graded and will not receive credit.

 

 

Unit Exam Dates (subject to change):

 

Unit One Exam                        9/26/07 Friday

Unit Two Exam                       10/31/07 Friday

Final Exam                  (check university final exam schedule)

 

 

 


 

Homework Policy for Theory I-IV

 

Your three lowest homework/pop quiz grades will be dropped.  Homework is due at the beginning of class –NO EXCEPTIONS.  If you are absent, you may get someone to turn your homework in for you at the beginning of class.  No homework is accepted late.  If you miss a pop quiz because of an absence, excused or unexcused, you will not be able to retake it. 

 

Resubmission policy for homework: Students who receive unsatisfactory marks (79 or below) will have the opportunity to resubmit an assignment to the instructor.  You will receive half credit for all points corrected, with a highest possible grade of 80. Revised work is due the class meeting after it is returned to the student.  Students turning in an incomplete assignment, you may only resubmit the portion that was originally completed.

 

 

 

FINAL GRADE CALCULATIONS FOR THEORY I-IV

 

Assignments and Quizzes                                                                                            30%

Final Project                                                                                                                 10%

*Exams (3 @ 20% each)                                                                                             60%

Possible Penalties for Class Attendance/Participation                                         (see above)

 

*50 minutes will be allotted for each of the first two Theory Unit Exams.  The final exam will be a cumulative exam given during the scheduled final time.  The Final Exam will take place as scheduled by the university, unless your instructor indicates otherwise.

 

Grading Scale

 

A  =  90 - 100     B  =  80 - 89            C  =  70 - 79                D  =  60 - 69                    F  =   0 - 59

 

Note: Your instructor will NOT freely give points or extra credit to students to improve their final grade.

 

 

SHSU THEORY DEPARTMENT TUTORING POLICY

 

Each student has his/her own unique areas of strength and weakness.  If you are falling behind in a certain area and are not able to visit your instructor during scheduled office hours, feel free to contact them via email to arrange a time to meet that will fit your schedule.  A department tutor aide may also be available for free tutoring for all theory and musicianship students throughout the semester.  (More information on this will be given a week or two into the semester.)  NOTE: The Kostka/Payne Tonal Harmony text now has online tutorials to help you with the basic concepts from each chapter in the text.  Simply take the following link (www.mhhe.com/kp5), click on “Student Edition” under “Online Learning Center” at the left and choose the desired part of the book on the scroll-down list on the left and lesson with which you desire extra help or practice.  Other free websites such as www.musictheory.net can be a great resource for students seeking help.  Ask your instructor or see the SHSU Theory and Composition website for even more ideas.

 

 

Early Warning Slips / FIRST ALERT

 

After the first and second exams, the instructor will fill out an “Early Warning Slip” on behalf of any student having problems with grades, attendance, attitude, fundamental skills, etc.  These official notifications by the theory department are sent to a student’s applied instructor and/or ensemble director in order to express specific concerns regarding the student’s academic performance. 

 

The counseling center on campus also offers a service called “First Alert” which aims to give aid to students identified by their instructors as needing extra help with their coursework.  At any time during the semester, instructors may send a “First Alert” warning to the counseling center on campus, if a student seems to be having any kind of difficulty in class.  The theory department is committed to working with students, applied instructors, and ensemble directors to ensure each student’s success in the classroom.

 

 


 

Requirements for Students Receiving Unsatisfactory Grades

 

Students who have received a final grade of F in any theory or musicianship course the previous semester will be required to drop the next course in the sequence if still enrolled at the beginning of the next semester.  Prerequisite courses must be passed with a grade of C or higher for promotion to the next level.  Students who have received a final grade of D in any prerequisite theory or musicianship course will be required to attend one hour of tutoring each week from one of our official theory/musicianship tutors until that student makes a C or higher on an exam.  Any student receiving a grade of D or F on any exam throughout the semester will be required to attend one hour of tutoring each week until that student makes a C or higher on an exam.  Again, the theory department is committed to ensuring the academic success of each and every student.

 

 

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty:

 

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action. Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to, cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism, collusion and the abuse of resource materials.

 

Proper Classroom Demeanor/Rules of Conduct:

 

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any other form of distraction.  Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in a, minimally, a directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in accordance with university policy.

 

Americans with Disabilities Act:

 

SHSU adheres to all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines with respect to providing reasonable accommodations for students with disabilities.  If you have a disability that may affect adversely your work in this class, then I encourage you to register with the SHSU Counseling Center and to talk with me about how I can best help you.  All disclosures of disabilities will be kept strictly confidential.  NOTE: no accommodation can be made until you register with the Counseling Center.

 

Student Absences on Religious Holidays Policy:

 

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose.  A student whose absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused within a reasonable time after the absence.

University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.  A student desiring to be absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a) religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the religious holy day(s).  This request must be made in the first fifteen days of the semester or the first seven days of a summer session in with the absence(s) will occur.  The instructor will complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable timeframe in which the missed assignments and/or examinations are to be completed.

 

 
  2MUS 223 Theory of Music IV. [MUSI 2212] This course continues the study of the chromatic elements of Western music, followed by an introduction to Twentieth-Century music. Special emphasis is made on the analysis of tonal and post-tonal harmony and structures through score study, composition projects, and class performances. Prerequisites: MUS 222 and 224 with “C” or better; or by placement exam. Credit 2.

MUS 223: Music Theory IV

MWF 9:00-9:50 Room 219

Spring 2009

 

Instructor:  Dr. John Crabtree

Office: Kirkley G02                                                                           Phone: 832-215-4431

Office hours: MWF by appointment                                                 Email: jmc001@shsu.edu

 

 

Required Texts and Materials *

 

·         Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (5th edition)

·         Workbook for Tonal Harmony, Kostka and Payne (5th edition)

·         Example CD’s and Finale® Workbook software – included with your Workbook for Tonal

Harmony

·         HAND-OUTS to be given in class to further expand material in text.

·         Music staff paper; pencils, eraser (Assignment/exams done in ink will not be accepted!)

 

*ALL STUDENTS MUST OWN THEIR OWN BOOKS AND HAVE ALL MATERIALS PRESENT FOR EVERY CLASS PERIOD.

 

Course Description

 

This course expands the study of ultra-chromatic harmony of Western music to the late 19th Century.  In addition, it continues the study of music by surveying composition and analytical techniques of the 20th Century. 

 

Course Objectives

 

·         Augmented Sixth Chords 2 (Chapter 24):

·         Enharmonic Spellings and Enharmonic Modulations (Chapter 25):

·         Further Elements of the Harmonic Vocabulary (Chapter 26):

·         Tonal Harmony in the Late Nineteenth-Century (Chapter 27):

·         An Introduction to Twentieth-Century Music (Chapter 28):

 

Co-ENROLLMENT

 

Normally, students in this class will be enrolled in MUS 114X (Class Piano IV).  The principles dealt with in this corresponding theory and piano classes all build upon and reinforce each other.  These courses should be taken concurrently to ensure maximum success in learning the fundamental principles of Western music.  Please notify your instructor if you are not currently enrolled in the corresponding theory and piano classes.

 

CLASS PARTICIPATION

 

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, etc.  Bring your questions to class.  Students who have not brought their materials, are sleeping in class, are not paying attention, or are disrupting the learning environment in any way may be counted absent for that class period.  Being physically present in class does not necessarily constitute attendance! 

 

 

THEORY DEPARMENT Attendance AND TARDY POLICIES

 

Regular and punctual attendance is expected of you throughout the semester.  University policy permits three classroom hours of unexcused absence without penalty per semester (MWF = 3 absences, TTH = 2 absences).  Reserve these for possible emergency or illness.  For each additional unexcused MWF absence, one-third of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  For each additional unexcused TTH absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  Valid excuses include official university functions or illness with appropriate documentation.  If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact your instructor at least one week in advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled.  Once a test has been returned, a make-up test will not be possible.  You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on the days of your absence. 

 

The instructor will take attendance at the beginning of each class period.  Students not arriving by the time roll is completed will need to sign the official tardy sign-in sheet at the front of the classroom in order to be counted present for that class period.  Students failing to sign this list when tardy will be counted absent without exception.  Every student will be allowed 2 tardies without penalty per semester.  Every third tardy will be counted as equal to one absence.  (3 tardies = 1 absence, 6 tardies = 2 absences, etc.)  

 

!!! Attendance is a significant factor affecting your success in this course !!!

 

CLASSROOM ETIQUETTE

 

Students will not be allowed to have food or drinks in the classroom; however, water in a closed container is acceptable.  Students may not use cell phones or other electronic devices such as laptops, iPods, etc. during class.  Students will be penalized one tardy for each disruption caused by any of these devices during class.

 

NEATNESS

 

In order to properly evaluate your work, your instructor must be able to read it.  Therefore, all work done for this class must be legible as determined by the instructor.  Any work the instructor considers to be illegible will not be graded and will not receive credit.

 

Homework Policy for Theory I-IV

 

Your three lowest homework grades will be dropped.  Homework is due at the beginning of class –NO EXCEPTIONS.  If you are absent, you may get someone to turn your homework in for you at the beginning of class.  No homework is accepted late.  If you miss a pop quiz because of an absence, excused or unexcused, you will not be able to retake it. 

 

Resubmission policy for homework:

 

Students who receive unsatisfactory marks (79 or below) will have the opportunity to resubmit an assignment to the instructor.  You will receive half credit for all points corrected, with a highest possible grade of 80. Revised work is due the class meeting after it is returned to the student.  Students turning in an incomplete assignment, you may only resubmit the portion that was originally completed.

 

 

 

FINAL GRADE CALCULATIONS FOR THEORY I-IV

 

Assignments                                                                            15%

Quizzes                                                                                                15%

Final Project                                                                               5%

Exams (2 Unit Exams worth 20% each) **                             40%

Final Exam **                                                                         25%

Possible Penalties for Class Attendance/Participation     (see above)

 

**50 minutes will be allotted for each of the first two Theory Unit Exams.  The final exam will be a cumulative exam given during the scheduled final time.  The Final Exam will take place as scheduled by the university, unless your instructor indicates otherwise.

 

Grading Scale

 

A  =  89.5 – 100

B  =  79.5 – 89.4

                                                                        C  =  69.5 – 79.4

                                                                        D  =  59.5 – 69.4

                                                            F  =       0  – 59.4

 

Note: Your instructor will NOT freely give points or extra credit to students to improve their final grade.

.

 

 

SHSU THEORY DEPARTMENT TUTORING POLICY

 

Each student has his/her own unique areas of strength and weakness.  If you are falling behind in a certain area and are not able to visit your instructor during scheduled office hours, feel free to contact them via email to arrange a time to meet that will fit your schedule.  A department tutor aide may also be available for free tutoring for all theory and musicianship students throughout the semester.  (More information on this will be given a week or two into the semester.)  NOTE: The Kostka/Payne Tonal Harmony text now has online tutorials to help you with the basic concepts from each chapter in the text.  Simply take the following link (www.mhhe.com/kp5), click on “Student Edition” under “Online Learning Center” at the left and choose the desired part of the book on the scroll-down list on the left and lesson with which you desire extra help or practice.  Other free websites such as www.musictheory.net can be a great resource for students seeking help.  Ask your instructor or see the SHSU Theory and Composition website for even more ideas.

 

 

Unit Exam Dates (subject to change):

 

Unit One Exam                       2/25/09

Unit Two Exam                      3/30/09

Final Exam                              As Scheduled by the University in the Final Exam Schedule

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Early Warning Slips / FIRST ALERT

 

After the first and second exams, the instructor will fill out an “Early Warning Slip” on behalf of any student having problems with grades, attendance, attitude, fundamental skills, etc.  These official notifications by the theory department are sent to a student’s applied instructor and/or ensemble director in order to express specific concerns regarding the student’s academic performance. 

 

The Counseling Center on campus also offers a service called “First Alert” which aims to give aid to students identified by their instructors as needing extra help with their coursework.  At any time during the semester, instructors may send a “First Alert” warning to the counseling center on campus, if a student seems to be having any kind of difficulty in class.  The theory department is committed to working with students, applied instructors, and ensemble directors to ensure each student’s success in the classroom.

 

Requirements for Students Receiving Unsatisfactory Grades

 

Students who have received a final grade of F in any theory or musicianship course the previous semester will be required to drop the next course in the sequence if still enrolled at the beginning of the next semester.  Prerequisite courses must be passed with a grade of C or higher for promotion to the next level

 

 

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty

 

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action. Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to, cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism, collusion and the abuse of resource materials.

 

 

PROPER CLASSROOM DEMEANOR/RULES OF CONDUCT

 

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any other form of distraction.  Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in a, minimally, a directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in accordance with university policy.

 

Americans with Disabilities Act:

 

SHSU adheres to all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines with respect to providing reasonable accommodations for students with disabilities.  If you have a disability that may affect adversely your work in this class, then I encourage you to register with the SHSU Counseling Center and to talk with me about how I can best help you.  All disclosures of disabilities will be kept strictly confidential.  NOTE: no accommodation can be made until you register with the Counseling Center.

Student Absences on Religious Holidays Policy:

 

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose.  A student whose absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused within a reasonable time after the absence.

University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.  A student desiring to be absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a) religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the religious holy day(s).  This request must be made in the first fifteen days of the semester or the first seven days of a summer session in with the absence(s) will occur.  The instructor will complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable timeframe in which the missed assignments and/or examinations are to be completed.

 

 
  2MUS 224 Musicianship III. [MUSI 2216] This course provides intensive drill in identifying and reproducing the fundamental structures of music. The course content, which is coordinated with that of THEORY III (MUS 222), is divided into practical skills and aural skills. Practical skills develop your ability to perform music. They include activities such as performing rhythmic patterns and sight-singing solfege patterns and written melodies. Aural skills improve your ability to hear music and interpret what you hear. These include exercises such as chord identification, rhythmic dictation, melodic dictation, and harmonic dictation. Prerequisites: MUS 123 and 125 with grade of “C” or better; or by placement exam. Credit 2.

MUS 224: Musicianship III

TTH 11am – 12:20pm, Room 216

Fall 2008

 

Instructor:  Dr. Kyle Kindred

Office:             Kirkley G-3                                                     Phone: (936) 294-1377

Office hours:   M-F, 1-4pm (by appt.)                         Email:  KDK001@shsu.edu (best way to contact me!)

 

 

Required Texts and Materials

 

·         Music for Ear Training, Horvit, Koozin, and Nelson (2nd edition)

·         Music for Sight-Singing, Benjamin, Horvit, and Nelson (4th edition)

·         Music for Ear Training CD-ROM, included with text.

·         Music staff paper; pencils, eraser (Assignment, quizzes, or exams done in ink will not be accepted!)

 

*ALL STUDENTS MUST OWN THEIR OWN BOOKS AND HAVE ALL MATERIALS PRESENT FOR EVERY CLASS PERIOD.

 

Course Description

 

This course provides intensive drill in identifying and reproducing the fundamental structures of music.  The course content, which is coordinated with that of Music Theory III, is divided into practical skills and aural skills.

 

Practical skills develop your ability to perform music.  They include activities such as performing rhythmic patterns and sight-singing solfege patterns and written melodies.

 

Aural skills improve your ability to hear music and interpret what you hear.  These include exercises such as interval identification, chord identification, scale identification, rhythmic dictation, melodic dictation, and harmonic dictation.

 

 

Course Objectives

 

Sight-Singing:                         Seventh chords, Inflected scale degrees; Scalar variants in minor, Modal                                                        borrowing, Secondary dominants, and Modulations

Rhythm Reading:       Dots and ties, Compound meter, Tuplets, Syncopation, Asymmetrical meters

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Rhythmic Dictation:   Dots and ties, Compound meter, Tuplets, Syncopation, Asymmetrical meters

Melodic Dictation:      Seventh chords, Inflected scale degrees; Scalar variants in minor, Modal                                                        borrowing, Secondary dominants, and Modulations

Harmonic Dictation:  Non-dominant seventh chords, Scalar variants and modal borrowing, Secondary                                           dominants, N6 and +6 chords

Chord ID:                   All Root position and Inverted triads and Seventh chords

 

 

Co-ENROLLMENT

 

Normally, students in this class will be enrolled in MUS 222 (Theory III) and MUS 113X (Class Piano III).  The principles dealt with in these corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes all build upon and reinforce each other.  These courses should be taken concurrently to ensure maximum success in learning the fundamental principles of Western music.  Please notify your instructor if you are not currently enrolled in corresponding theory, musicianship, and piano classes.

 

CLASS PARTICIPATION

 

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, etc.  Bring your questions to class.  Students who have not brought their materials, are sleeping in class, are not paying attention, or are disrupting the learning environment in any way may be counted absent for that class period.  Being physically present in class does not necessarily constitute attendance! 

 

 

THEORY DEPARMENT Attendance AND TARDY POLICIES

 

Regular and punctual attendance is expected of you throughout the semester.  University policy permits three classroom hours of unexcused absence without penalty per semester (MWF = 3 absences, TTH = 2 absences).  Reserve these for possible emergency or illness.  For each additional unexcused MWF absence, one-third of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  For each additional unexcused TTH absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted from your final grade.  Valid excuses include official university functions or illness with appropriate documentation.  If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact your instructor at least one week in advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled.  Once a test has been returned, a make-up test will not be possible.  You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on the days of your absence. 

 

The instructor will take attendance at the beginning of each class period.  Students not arriving by the time attendance is completed will need to sign the official tardy sign-in sheet at the front of the classroom in order to be counted present for that class period.  Students failing to sign this list when tardy will be counted absent without exception.  Every student will be allowed 2 tardies without penalty per semester.  Every third tardy will be counted as equal to one absence.  (3 tardies = 1 absence, 6 tardies = 2 absences, etc.) 

 

!!! Attendance is a significant factor affecting your success in this course !!!

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BLACKBOARD

Grades, attendance, and tardies will be posted and updated regularly on Blackboard by your instructor so that you may keep track of this important information throughout the semester and report any discrepancies you may find.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

CLASSROOM ETIQUETTE

Students will NOT be allowed to have food or drinks in the classroom; however, water in a closed container is acceptable with instructor’s approval.  Students may NOT use cell phones or other electronic devices such as laptops, iPods, etc. during class.  Students will be penalized one tardy for each disruption caused by any of these devices during class.  Special needs accommodations for allowing any of the above is allowed, but only through approval of the university and the Counseling Center.

 

 

NEATNESS

 

In order to properly evaluate your work, your instructor must be able to read it.  Therefore, all work done for this class MUST be legible as determined by the instructor.  Any work the instructor considers to be illegible will NOT be graded and will NOT receive credit.

 

 

Homework Policy for MUSICIANSHIP I-III

 

Your three lowest homework/quiz grades will be dropped.  Homework is due at the beginning of class –NO EXCEPTIONS.  If you are absent, you may get someone to turn your homework in for you at the beginning of class.  No homework is accepted late.  If you miss a quiz because of an absence, excused or unexcused, you will not be able to retake it. 

 

On most class days, homework assignments will be given to provide further practice for students with rhythmic, melodic, and harmonic dictation.  These dictation exercises will require the use of the CD-ROM that goes with the Music for Ear Training text.  Each student will be able to hear each exercise as many times as they wish, allowing them to work at their own pace.  For some assignments, full answers to the dictation exercises will be given on the CD-ROM upon completion.  For other assignments, the instructor will provide a key or devote a few minutes of class-time to discussing the exercises after they have been checked for completion and handed back on the due date.  Because of the availability of infinite hearings and occasional answers from the CD-ROM, it is up to each student to conduct each homework exercise honestly and in a manner that will give them ample opportunity to improve their skills.  NOTE: Homework comprises only 10% of the overall grade.  Its main purpose is to prepare the student for the dictation quizzes and exams which are a much more substantial portion of the overall grade.

 

 

 

 

FINAL GRADE CALCULATIONS FOR MUSICIANSHIP I-III

 

            Daily Homework Assignments                                                                                    10%

                                               

Practical Skills Quizzes                                                                                                15%

            Practical Skills Exams  (3 worth 10% each)                                                     30%

                                               

Aural Skills Quizzes                                                                                        15%

            Aural Skills Exams      (3 worth 10% each)                                                     30%

 

            Penalties for Absences/Failure to Participate                                           (see above)

 

*50 minutes will be allotted for each of the first two Musicianship Unit Exams and the final exam.  The Final Exam will take place as scheduled by the university, unless your instructor indicates otherwise.

 

Grading Scale

 

 A  =  90 - 100

B  =  80 - 89

C  =  70 - 79

D  =  60 - 69

F  =   0 -  59

 

Note: Your instructor will NOT freely give points or extra credit to students to improve their final grade.

 

 

 

SHSU THEORY DEPARTMENT TUTORING POLICY

 

Each student has his/her own unique areas of strength and weakness.  If you are falling behind in a certain area and are not able to visit your instructor during scheduled office hours, feel free to contact them via email to arrange a time to meet that will fit your schedule.  A department tutor aide may also be available for free tutoring for all theory and musicianship students throughout the semester.  (More information on this will be given a week or two into the semester.)  NOTE: The CD-ROM included with the Music for Ear Training text includes a wealth of examples for extra practice with aural skills.  Further, free websites such as www.musictheory.net can be a great resource for students seeking help.

 

 

 

AURAL SKILLS Exam Dates (subject to change if needed):

 

Unit One Exam                        9/30/08 Tuesday

Unit Two Exam                       11/4/08 Tuesday

Final Exam                  12/11/08 Thursday (Last day of class)

***Practical Skills Exams will be given individually outside of class at times to be announced by instructor.

 

 

 

 

Early Warning Slips / FIRST ALERT

 

After the first two exams, the instructor will fill out an “Early Warning Slip” on behalf of any student having problems with grades, attendance, attitude, fundamental skills, etc.  These official notifications by the theory department are sent to a student’s applied instructor and/or ensemble director in order to express specific concerns regarding the student’s academic performance. 

 

The Counseling Center on campus also offers a service called “First Alert” which aims to give aid to students identified by their instructors as needing extra help with their coursework.  At any time during the semester, instructors may send a “First Alert” warning to the counseling center on campus, if a student seems to be having any kind of difficulty in class.  The theory department is committed to working with students, applied instructors, and ensemble directors to ensure each student’s success in the classroom.

 

 

Requirements for Students Receiving Unsatisfactory Grades

 

Students who have received a final grade of D or F in any theory or musicianship course must repeat that course until they receive a final grade of C or higher before promotion to the next level will be granted.  Note that all theory and musicianship courses with prerequisites require the student to have passed the previous level of both theory and musicianship with a final grade of C or higher.  For example, before you may enroll in Musicianship 2, you must have passed both Theory I and Musicianship I with a final grade of C or higher.  These courses are designed to work together to gradually build upon your level of knowledge and skill in these areas.  Taking any course out of sequence or without the approval of the theory department can jeopardize your grade point average, your ability to succeed in more advanced theory courses, and even your chances of graduation.   Again, the theory department is committed to ensuring the academic success of each and every student.

 

 

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty:

 

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action. Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to, cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism, collusion and the abuse of resource materials.

 

Proper Classroom Demeanor/Rules of Conduct:

 

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any other form of distraction.  Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in a, minimally, a directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in accordance with university policy.

 

Americans with Disabilities Act:

 

SHSU adheres to all applicable federal, state, and local laws, regulations, and guidelines with respect to providing reasonable accommodations for students with disabilities.  If you have a disability that may affect adversely your work in this class, then I encourage you to register with the SHSU Counseling Center and to talk with me about how I can best help you.  All disclosures of disabilities will be kept strictly confidential.  NOTE: no accommodation can be made until you register with the Counseling Center.

 

Student Absences on Religious Holidays Policy:

 

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose.  A student whose absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused within a reasonable time after the absence.

University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.  A student desiring to be absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a) religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the religious holy day(s).  This request must be made in the first fifteen days of the semester or the first seven days of a summer session in with the absence(s) will occur.  The instructor will complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable timeframe in which the missed assignments and/or examinations are to be completed.

 

 
  3MUS 362 Orchestration And Analysis. A study of basic techniques of instrumentation, including ranges, transpositions, and characteristics of band and orchestral instruments. Practical application in the form of projects for various instrumental combinations. Prerequisite: MUS 222 with “C” or better. Credit 3. 
  3MUS 363 Structure and Analysis. An exploration of formal Western musical structures from the common practice period, including classroom discussions, daily/weekly assignments, and one large individual analysis project. Prerequisite: MUS 223 with “C” or better. Credit 3.

Course Syllabus

MUS 363.02W: Structure and Analysis, Credit: 3 hrs.

TTh 11AM – 12:20PM, Fall 2008

Music Building, Room 217

Instructor: Dr. Trent Hanna

Office: Kirkley, G07

Email: trenthanna@shsu.edu

Office hours: Mon - Thur. 10-10:45AM, TTh 12:30-1PM, and by appointment.

Required Texts and Materials

Spencer, Peter and Peter Temko. Practical Approach to the Study of Form in Music.

Pencils (do not use ink for written assignments or exams!).

1.5” Binder for musical examples, copies of presentation pieces, etc.

NOTE: Bring these materials to every class.

Course Description

This course will provide a study of musical structure and design, with a

majority of the focus on works from the common practice period. Students

will develop diverse methods of musical analysis and gain the ability to

distinguish various stylistic idioms. Relationships between theoretical

analysis and other musical disciplines (performance, conducting,

education) will be explored. Coursework will include small analysis

assignments, short written assignments, an analysis-based major project

(including a paper and presentation), in class quizzes and class discussion.

Prerequisites: MUS 223.

Course Objectives

Students will demonstrate their understanding of the harmonic, melodic

and formal procedures of representative works primarily from the

common practice period. They will be able to analyze works in a wide

variety of media, including piano, vocal, instrumental and orchestral

textures.

Major Project

•Each student will pick a musical work (preferably one that they are working on

this semester) to analyze for their major project. This piece must be approved by

the professor on or before Sept. 23.

•Students will be assigned a three- or four-person group (explained below).

•The first stage will involve collecting data and analyzing the composition.

Understand that we may not have covered the form of your piece in class yet.

This just means that you might have to do research ahead of what is covered in

class. A mandatory 20-minute meeting with the professor is required during this

stage, before the next step. This is not a chance for me to give you the answers,

but a chance for you to ask questions and get advice, direction, assistance, etc.

•Following this, they are to trade pieces and corresponding analyses (both on the

score as well as on notebook paper or typed) with a member of their group.

Then each student will constructively examine the other person’s work, making

legible comments, notes, and suggestions in red pen on the piece and/or a

separate sheet. The analysis and pieces will be handed in, in a folder, along with

the suggestions from the other student. A grade will be given for both aspects.

•The next stage will be completing a rough draft, of which they will trade with

the other member of their group. Again, the paper will be handed in, in a folder,

along with the legible editorial markings in red pen from the other student, AND

the analysis from earlier. A grade will be given for both aspects. Students in

need of help will either be encouraged or required to visit the Writing Center.

•The final stage is the completed term paper and 10-minute presentation. The

term paper should be 3-5 pages long, double-spaced and typed. The term paper

should discuss the overall form of the piece, smaller forms within the

composition, particular structural aspects that make the piece unusual, etc.

Considering the length of the presentation, it should be concise; perhaps

covering only one or a few interesting aspects of the piece. Points will be taken

off for surpassing the time limit. Copies of the piece, double-sided and hole

punched, need to be given to each student in class before each presentation

begins.

•Details as to groups, deadlines, dates, etc. will be given on a separate sheet soon.

Grading for Major Project is as follows:

Analysis

10%

Comments on Analysis

10%

Rough draft

10%

Comments on rough draft

10%

Presentation

20%

Final draft

40%

This major project is worth 25% of the final grade.

Class Participation

When you come to class, be prepared to participate in discussions and

other activities involving the assigned readings, exercises, and pieces.

Bring your questions to class! Unannounced quizzes may be given at any

time to verify that assigned readings are being completed.

Homework Policy

Assignments are due at the beginning of class. No late homework is

accepted. Exceptions will be made only in cases of serious illness or death

in the family.

Attendance

Regular and punctual attendance will be expected of you throughout the

semester. University policy permits three hours – that’s two TTh classes -

(excused or unexcused) absences without penalty (except for announced

tests). Reserve these for possible emergency or illness. For each

additional unexcused absence, one-half of a letter grade will be deducted

from your final grade. Valid excuses include official university functions,

serious illness or family emergency with an acceptable explanation/note.

If you anticipate a legitimate absence on a test date, contact me well in

advance so that a make-up test can be scheduled. Once a test has been

returned (usually the next class meeting), a make-up test will not be

possible. You are responsible for all assignments and material covered on

the days of your absence. Bring your textbook and binder to every class.

Failure to do so could result in an unexcused absence. Tardiness will be

counted as at least one-third off your attendance for the day. Attendance

is the most significant factor affecting your success in this course.

Individual Tutorials

I am available to provide explanations or extra help during my office

hours or by appointment. Please take advantage of this offer if you are

having any problems.

Grading

2 Unit Exams:

30%

Homework and In-Class Quizzes:

15%

Major Project:

25%

Final Exam:

30%

Final Exam

The final comprehensive exam will be given during the scheduled final

exam time.

Grading Scale

For the final grade, the following grading scale will be used:

90 - 100% A

80 - 89% B

70 - 79% C

60 - 69% D

0 - 59% F

Homework Copying/Collaboration Policy

Consultation between students about general concepts is allowed, but copying

and/or collaboration (working together) on exams or homework assignments is

cheating and will be dealt with severely.

Course Outline

Unit 1 – Possible topics - Review of Harmony and Modulation, Phrase

Structures, and Small Forms. Introduction to Rhetoric. Binary and Ternary Form

Study. Overview of forms. Spencer/Temko chapters 1-6 (Roughly 4-5 weeks)

Unit 2 – Possible topics - Focus on Larger Forms. Imitative Genres and Variation

Form. Sonata Form, Rondo, and Sonata Rondo. Spencer/Temko chapters 6-9

(Roughly 5-6 weeks)

Remainder of the Semester - More In-Depth Study, Analysis and Presentations.

University Policies

University Policy on Academic Dishonesty:

The Faculty Handbook states that the University expects all students to engage in all academic

pursuits in a manner that is above reproach. Students are expected to maintain complete honesty

and integrity in the academic experiences both in and out of the classroom. Any student found

guilty of dishonesty in any phase of academic work will be subject to disciplinary action.

Furthermore, the University and its official representatives may initiate disciplinary proceedings

against a student accused of any form of academic dishonesty including, but not limited to,

cheating on an examination or other academic work which is to be submitted, plagiarism,

collusion and the abuse of resource materials

Proper Classroom Demeanor/Rules of Conduct:

Students will refrain from behavior in the classroom that intentionally or unintentionally disrupts

the learning process and, thus, impedes the mission of the university. Please turn off or mute

your cellular phone and/or pager before class begins. Students are prohibited from eating in

class, using tobacco products, making offensive remarks, reading newspapers, sleeping, talking

among each other at inappropriate times, wearing inappropriate clothing, or engaging in any

other form of distraction. Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result in a, minimally, a

directive to leave class or being reported to the Dean of Students for disciplinary action in

accordance with university policy.

Americans with Disabilities Act:

According to University policy, requests for accommodations must be initiated by the student. A

student seeking accommodations should go to the Counseling Center and Services for Students

with Disabilities (SSD) in a timely manner. Every semester that the student desires

accommodations, it is the student's responsibility to complete a Classroom Accommodation

Request Form at the SSD office and follow the stated procedure in notifying faculty.

Accommodations for disabled students are decided based upon documentation and need on a

case-by-case basis by the Counseling Center

Religious Holidays:

Section 51.911(b) of the Texas Education Code requires that an institution of higher education

excuse a student from attending classes or other required activities, including examinations, for

the observance of a religious holy day, including travel for that purpose. A student whose

absence is excused under this subsection may not be penalized for that absence and shall be

allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment from which the student is excused

within a reasonable time after the absence.

University policy 861001 provides the procedures to be followed by the student and instructor.

A student desiring to absent himself/herself from a scheduled class in order to observe (a)

religious holy day(s) shall present to each instructor involved a written statement concerning the

religious holy day(s). This request must be made in the first fifteen days of the semester or the

first seven days of a summer session in which the absence(s) will occur. The instructor will

complete a form notifying the student of a reasonable time frame in which the missed

assignments and/or examination are to be completed.

 

 
 Total 20  
     
     

Southern Methodist University

http://smu.edu/meadows/music/

http://smu.edu/meadows/music/degree-bmme.asp

http://smu.edu/meadows/music/courses-ug.asp

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
MUTH 1129Aural Skills I1

(MUTH) 1129, 1130. Aural Skills I and II. Beginning studies in solfeggio, melodic, and harmonic dictation. Must be taken in sequence. Fall and spring terms. Corequisites: MUTH 1229, 1230.

Dr. Robert Frank Syllabus

MUTH 1129.001 - Aural Skills I – Fall, 2008 (Letter Grade)
M W 8:00 – 8:50 a.m. - Room 1040
Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: (214) 768-2142
email:
robfrank@smu.edu     web: faculty.smu.edu/robfrank click: [Academics]
Office Hours: M 10-11 a.m. and others TBA

 

Required Texts:

Ottman, Robert, Music for Sight Singing, 7th Ed.
Dictation PDF files to be downloaded and printed by the student (
www.smu.edu/musictheory)

Other Materials:

8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.

MacGamut Software, as needed per instructor

 

Course Aims and Objectives:

MUTH 1129 is an introductory-level Aural Skills course. The objective of the course is to develop and enhance musicianship through the production, perception, and identification of rhythm, melody, and harmony in diatonic music. This will be in the form of in-class and private singing, homework, dictation, practice and drill.  Examples will be drawn from the texts, the musical repertoire, and other sources.  Performance goals are to master the ability to sing all major and minor scales, basic triads, all simple intervals, diatonic melodies (rehearsed and at sight, conducted or not) using solfege syllables, and to conduct and perform at sight rhythms in common two-part subdivision and dotted values in simple and compound meter.  Dictation goals are to be able to identify all of the above and to correctly notate basic melodies and short, basic harmonic progression.

 

Course Requirements, Expectations, and Policies:

The class will meet Mondays and Wednesdays.  There will be four dictation tests and may be additional quizzes throughout the semester to monitor progress, however daily practice is necessary in order to succeed. Students are urged to schedule specific daily practice times in order to best master the skills this course will cover. The four sight singing exams will be on or about: Sept. 15, Oct. 8, Nov. 12, and at the final exam (Dec. 13).  Each will cover materials covered in class to that point and are accumulative. Dictation exams (3-4) will be announced in class at least one week in advance. Sight singing exams will be by individual appointment during available sign-up times (which may be outside of normal class times, pending student's scheduling) on the day of the exam.  In addition, a Department of Music Theory Mastery Level Exam covering basic fundamental skills  will be required to be passed by Oct. 13th.  Students not passing this exam by this date will be dropped from the course without appeal.  Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, at the discretion of the instructor.

 

Class begins promptly at 8:00 AM.  Attendance is taken at 8:05 and directly effects your grade.  Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no later than 30 minutes before class, or by turning in a legitimate written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority within one week of an absence.  Pop-quizes, dictation homework, exams, and in-class singing grades during unexcused absences normally will not be allowed to be made up. It is solely the student's responsibility to obtain all materials, information, assignments from all missed classes, excused or not ,or to schedule make-up quizzes prior to, or within one week following, excused absences. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Cell phones must be turned off during class except for emergencies (please inform instructor).

 

Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. MacGamut software (about $40) may be required individually at the instructor's discretion to assist you to develop your skills. The theory department has graduate assistants that are available to help tutor this class. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours (posted on my door or web site following scheduling of private lessons) or by appointment.  Please ask if there is a question.

 

SMU Course Policies:

Disability Accommodations: Students needing academic accommodations for a disability must first contact Ms. Rebecca Marin, Coordinator, Services for Students with Disabilities (214-768-4557) to verify the disability and establish eligibility for accommodations. They should then schedule an appointment with the professor to make appropriate arrangements. (See University Policy No. 2.4.)


Religious Observance: Religiously observant students wishing to be absent on holidays that require missing class should notify their professors in writing at the beginning of the semester, and should discuss with them, in advance, acceptable ways of making up any work missed because of the absence. (See University Policy No. 1.9.)


Excused Absences for University Extracurricular Activities: Students participating in an officially sanctioned, scheduled University extracurricular activity should be given the opportunity to make up class assignments or other graded assignments missed as a result of their participation. It is the responsibility of the student to make arrangements with the instructor prior to any missed scheduled examination or other missed assignment for making up the work. (University Undergraduate Catalogue)  All policies in the Division of Music Handbook apply.

 

Assessment:

Final Grades are derived from a weighted-percentage point system:

·      Class Participation 10%

·      Homework and assignments: 20%

·      Sight Singing Tests (4) 40%

·      Dictation Tests (4) 30%

·      Department of Music Theory Fundamentals Exam: Must be passed by October 13th to continue in this course.

Attendance Policy:

·      All unexcused absences beyond 2 will lower your final grade by 2 points

·      Late arrivals (after 8:05 AM) beyond 2 will lower your final grade by 1 point

·      After 4 consecutive unexcused absences, you may be dropped from the course without notice or appeal.

 

Assessment of in-class participation is solely at the discretion of the instructor without appeal, and requires you to sing to be heard, contribute positively to the classroom discussions, and behave in a non-disruptive manner.  Disruptive behavior will receive one warning after which the student may be dropped immediately without appeal for subsequent repeat offences.  Dictation homework and exams will be graded on a point system assessing contextual and/or specific accuracy.  Sight Singing exams will be assessed on a point system by the instructor for overall and specific accuracy of given pitch, rhythm, intonation, and if applicable, dynamics and conducting ability.  Tone quality is not assessed.

 

This syllabus is subject to oral or written revision by the instructor.  Revisions will be posted to the instructor’s web site.

 

 

 
MUTH 1130Aural skills II1

MUTH 1130 - Aural Skills II
M W 8:00 - 8:50 a.m. - Room 1030
Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: (214) 768-2142
faculty.smu.edu/robfrank
Office Hours:
as posted or by appointment

Required Texts:

Ottman, Robert, Music for Sight Singing, 6th Ed.
Dictation PDF files downloaded off my web site, printed to turn in.

Other Materials:

8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.

MacGamut Software, as needed per instructor

You should also be enrolled in MUTH 1230 at this time. See me if you are not.

MUTH 1130 is the second level Aural Skills course. The objective of the course is to continue the development of musicianship skills begun in MUTH 1129. This semester we will focus on harmonic as well as melodic skills. This will be in the form of in-class and private singing, homework, dictation, practice and drill. Examples will be drawn from the texts, the musical repertoire, and other sources. The class will meet Mondays and Wednesdays. There will be four tests and may be additional quizzes throughout the semester to monitor progress, however daily practice is necessary in order to succeed. Students are urged to schedule specific daily practice times - at least 30 minutes per day - in order to best master the skills this course will cover. The four sight singing exams will be on or about: Feb. 7, March 7, April 11, and at the final exam time (Tuesday May 8: 11:30AM-2:30PM Room 1030 and my office). Each will cover materials announced in the class. Grading is on a point system based on student's accuracy, tempo, and musicality. Dictation exams (2-3) will be announced in class at least one week in advance plus a comprehensive dictation exam during the first hour of the final exam time in room 1030. Pop quizes may be administered without announcement at any time.

Attendance and punctuality will have a strong impact on your grade. Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, as approved by the instructor. Class begins promptly at 8:00. See the below policy on attendance - these do affect your grade! Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no later than 30 minutes before class, or turning in a legitimate written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority. As per department policy, missed dictation and in-class singing grades normally may not be made up. It is the student's responsibility to obtain any materials, information, assignments or to schedule make-up quizzes from all missed classes. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. Don't let little problems grow into bigger ones!

MacGamut software (about $35) may be required to assist you to develop your skills. There is a graduate assistant that is available to help tutor this class. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours or by appointment. Please ask if there is a question.

Grading: Grades are on a point system and will be based on the following:

o                                          Attendance and Class Participation 10%

o                                          Homework and assignments: 20%

o                                          Sight Singing Tests (4) 40%

o                                          Dictation Tests (3-4) 30%


2-4 unexcused absences: -5%    5 or more unexcused absenses: -10%    2 late arrivals = 1 absence
This syllabus is subject to oral or written revision by the instructor. Revisions will be posted to this site.

 
 
MUTH 1229Theory I21229, 1230. Theory I and II. Rudiments (notation, clefs, key signatures, intervals, scales, modes), diatonic and chromatic harmony, figured bass, part-writing, analysis. Must be taken in sequence. Fall and spring terms. Corequisites: MUTH 1129, 1130.

    MUTH 1229 - Music Theory I
    T TR 8:00 - 9:20 a.m. - Room 2020
    Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: 768-2142
    www.smu.edu/robfrank
    Office Hours: as posted or by appointment:

    Required Texts:

      Kostka & Payne, Tonal Harmony, 5th Ed.
      Kostka & Payne, Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 5th Ed.

      Other Materials: 8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.
      WWW access via lab or personal PC/Mac -
      http://www.smu.edu/totw

    Recommended Materials:

      Kostka & Payne, CDs for use with Tonal Harmony, 5th Ed.
       

    You should also be enrolled in MUTH 1129 at this time. See me if you are not.

    MUTH 1229 is the first semester of a two year music theory program intended for music majors and minors. It is expected that students have basic music reading abilities. This quarter's class will cover roughly the equivalent of Chapters 1-10 in the text. The course will cover this material in classroom lectures, practice and drill, readings from the texts, written exercises, and the materials on the WWW site listed above. There will be written/WWW quizzes, a mid-term exam, and a final comprehensive exam. By the end of the quarter, all students will be required to pass a timed scales/key signatures test with a score of 90% or better. Active classroom participation is required. In addition, a Department of Music Theory Mastery Level Exam covering basic fundamental skills (note name in treble and bass clef, key signatures, scales, basic triads, etc.) will be required to be passed by the end of the 8th week (Oct. 13th). Students not passing this exam by this date will be dropped from the course.

    Attendance and punctuality in turning in homework assignments will have a strong impact on your grade. Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, as approved by the instructor. Class begins promptly at 8:00. Two late arrivals equals one absense. Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no later than 30 minutes before class, or turning in a legitimate written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority. It is the student's responsibility to obtain any materials or assignments or to schedule make-up quizzes from missed classes, excused or unexcused. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. Don't let little problems grow into bigger ones!

    There are computer programs and the above linked "Theory on the Web" site available for you to work on your skills. There is also a graduate assistant that will be available to help tutor this class. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours or by appointment. Please ask if there is a question.

    Grading: Grades will be based on the following:

      Daily assignments/projects: 40%
      Quizzes 20%
      Mid-term 15%
      Final Exam 15%
      Attendace/class participation (see below) 10%
      Department of Music Theory Mastery Exam: Must be passed by Oct. 13th for continuation in this course.
       

    2-4 unexcused absences: -5%
    5 or more unexcused absenses: -10%
    2 late arrivals = 1 absense

    This syllabus is subject to oral or written revision by the instructor. Revisions will be posted to this site.

 
MUTH 1230Theory II2

MUTH 1230 - Music Theory II
T TR 8:00 - 9:20 a.m. - Room 2040
Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: 768-2142
www.smu.edu/robfrank
Office Hours: as posted or by appointment:

Required Texts:

Kostka & Payne, Tonal Harmony, 5th Ed.
Kostka & Payne, Workbook for Tonal Harmony, 5th Ed.

Other Required Materials:

8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.
WWW access via lab or personal PC/Mac -
http://www.smu.edu/totw

Recommended Materials:

Kostka & Payne, CDs for use with Tonal Harmony, 5th Ed.

You should also be enrolled in MUTH 1130 at this time. See me if you are not.

MUTH 1230 is the second semester of a two year music theory program intended for music majors. It is expected that students have successfully completed MUTH 1229. This semesterπs class will cover part-writing and basic chromatic harmony. The course will cover this material in classroom lectures, readings from the texts, written exercises, and periodic demonstrations. There will be written quizzes, a mid-term exam, and a final comprehensive exam. One or more pop-quizes covering reading and/or listening & other assignments will occur throughout the semester and may count for as much as 10% of your final grade. Active classroom participation is required.

Attendance and punctuality in turning in homework assignments will have a strong impact on your grade. Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, as approved by the instructor. Class begins promptly at 8:00. Two late arrivals equals one absence. Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no later than 30 minutes before class, or turning in a legitimate written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority. It is the student's responsibility to obtain any materials or assignments or to schedule make-up quizzes from missed classes, excused or unexcused. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. Don't let little problems grow into bigger ones!

There are computer programs and the above linked "Theory on the Web" site available for you to work on your skills. There is also a graduate assistant that may be available to help tutor this class. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours or by appointment. Please ask if there is a question.

Grading: Grades will be based on the following:

Daily assignments/projects, (10% of which may be pop quizzes): 40%
Quizzes 20%
Mid-term 15%
Final Exam 15%
Attendace/class participation (see below) 10%

2-4 unexcused absences: -5%
5 or more unexcused absenses: -10%
2 late arrivals = 1 absense

This syllabus is subject to oral or written revision by the instructor. Revisions will be posted to this site.

 
 
MUTH 2129Aural Skills III1

2129, 2130. Aural Skills III and IV. Continuation of Aural Skills I and II. Solfeggio, melodic and harmonic dictation employing chromaticism, 20th-century materials. Must be taken in sequence. Fall and spring terms. Prerequisites: MUTH 1130, 1230. Corequisites: MUTH 2229, 2230.

MUTH 2129.001 - Aural Skills III
M W F 9:00 - 9:50 a.m. - Room 2020
Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: 768-2142
http:faculty.smu.edu/robfrank
Office Hours: as posted or by appointment: email Dr. Frank

      Required Texts:

      • Berkowitz, Fontrier, & Kraft, A New Approach Sight Singing, 4th Ed.

      • Other Materials: 8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.

      • Recommended: MacGamut Software

      You should also be enrolled in MUTH 2229 at this time. See me if you are not.

      Overview of the Course:

      MUTH 2129 is the continuation of the Aural Skills sequence. The objective of the course is to develop and enhance musicianship through the production, perception, and identification of rhythm, melody, and harmony. This will be in the form of in-class and private singing, dictation, practice and drill. Examples will be drawn from the text, the musical repertoire, and other sources. The class will meet Mondays and Fridays as noted above. The Wednesday time is reserved for individual meetings, tests, or special needs. There will be four tests and may be additional quizzes throughout the semester to monitor progress, however daily practice is necessary in order to succeed. Students are urged to schedule specific daily practice times in order to best master the skills this course will cover. The four sight singing exams will be on or about: Sept. 17, Oct. 15, Nov. 12, and Dec. 6 (Final Exam Day), and will cover materials announced in the class. Dictation Exams will be announced in class at least one week in advance.

      Attendance and punctuality will have a strong impact on your grade. Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, as approved by the instructor. Class begins promptly at 9:00. Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no less than 30 minutes before class, or turning in a legitimate written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority. No missed dictation or in-class singing grades may be made up. It is the student's responsibility to obtain any materials, information, assignments or to schedule make-up quizzes from excused classes. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. Don't let little problems grow into bigger ones!

      There are computer programs available for you to work on your skills. There is also a graduate assistant that is available to help tutor this class. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours or by appointment. Please ask if there is a question.

      Grading: Grades are on a point system and will be based on the following:

      Attendance 10% (see below)
      Class Participation/Homework 10%
      Sight Singing Tests (4) 40%
      Dictation Tests (4) 40%

      2-4 unexcused absences: -5%
      5 or more unexcused absenses: -10%
      2 late arrivals = 1 absense

      This syllabus is subject to oral or written revision by the instructor. Revisions will be posted to this site.

      Students needing academic accommodations for a disability must first contact Ms. Rebecca Marin at 768-4557 then schedule an appointment with the professor to make appropriate arrangements. Religiously observant students wishing to be absent on holidays that require missing class should notify their professors in writing at the beginning of the semester, and should discuss with them, in advance, acceptable ways of making up any work missed because of the absence. Students participating in an officially sanctioned, scheduled University extracurricular activity will be given the opportunity to make up class assignments or other graded assignments missed as a result of their participation. It is the responsibility of the student to make arrangements with the instructor prior to any missed scheduled examination or other missed assignment for making up the work. Students are encouraged to refer to the Student Handbook for violations of the Honor Code regarding academic honesty.

 

 
MUTH 2130Aural Skills IV1

MUTH 2130 - Aural Skills IV – Spring, 2009 (Letter Grade)
M F 9:00 - 9:50 a.m. - Room 1040
Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: (214) 768-2142
http:faculty.smu.edu/robfrank
Office Hours: as posted or by appointment: email Dr. Frank

Required Texts:

§  Ottman, Music for Sight Singing (current edition used last semester)

§  Other Materials: 8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.

§  On line Dictation Materials at: http://www.smu.edu/musictheory/

You should also be enrolled in MUTH 2230 at this time. See me if you are not.

 

Overview of the Course:

MUTH 2130 is the final semester of the Aural Skills sequence. The objective of the course is to develop and enhance musicianship through the production, perception, and identification of rhythm, melody, and harmony. This will be in the form of in-class and private singing, dictation, practice and drill. Examples will be drawn from the text, the musical repertoire, and other sources.

 

Course Requirements, Expectations, and Policies:

The class will meet Mondays and Fridays during regular school days.  There will be approximately four dictation tests and may be additional quizzes throughout the semester to monitor progress, however daily practice is necessary in order to succeed. Students are urged to schedule specific daily practice times in order to best master the skills this course will cover. Four sight singing exams will be on or about: Feb. 13, March 20, April 17, and at the final exam (May 8).  Each will cover materials covered in class to that point and are accumulative. Dictation exams (3-4) will be announced in class at least one week in advance. The final dictation exam will be given during the first hour of the final exam time, May 8. Sight singing exams will be by individual appointment during available sign-up times (which may be outside of normal class times, pending student's scheduling) on the day of the exam. Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, at the discretion of the instructor.

 

Class begins promptly at 9:00 AM.  Attendance is taken at 9:05 and directly affects your grade.  Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no later than 30 minutes before class, or by turning in a legitimate written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority within one week of an absence.  Pop-quizes, dictation homework, exams, and in-class singing grades during unexcused absences normally will not be allowed to be made up. It is solely the student's responsibility to obtain all materials, information, assignments from all missed classes, excused or not ,or to schedule make-up quizzes prior to, or within one week following, excused absences. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Cell phones must be turned off during class except for emergencies (please inform instructor).

 

Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. The theory department has graduate assistants that are available to help tutor this class. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours (posted on my door or web site following scheduling of private lessons) or by appointment.  Please ask if there is a question.

 

SMU Course Policies:

Disability Accommodations: Students needing academic accommodations for a disability must first contact Ms. Rebecca Marin, Coordinator, Services for Students with Disabilities (214-768-4557) to verify the disability and establish eligibility for accommodations. They should then schedule an appointment with the professor to make appropriate arrangements. (See University Policy No. 2.4.)


Religious Observance: Religiously observant students wishing to be absent on holidays that require missing class should notify their professors in writing at the beginning of the semester, and should discuss with them, in advance, acceptable ways of making up any work missed because of the absence. (See University Policy No. 1.9.)


 

Excused Absences for University Extracurricular Activities: Students participating in an officially sanctioned, scheduled University extracurricular activity should be given the opportunity to make up class assignments or other graded assignments missed as a result of their participation. It is the responsibility of the student to make arrangements with the instructor prior to any missed scheduled examination or other missed assignment for making up the work. (University Undergraduate Catalogue)  All policies in the Division of Music Handbook apply.

 

Assessment:

Final Grades are derived from a weighted-percentage point system:

·      Class Participation 10%

·      Homework and assignments: 20%

·      Sight Singing Tests (4) 40%

·      Dictation Tests (4) 30%

Attendance Policy:

·      All unexcused absences beyond 2 will lower your final grade by 2 points (1 point = 1%)

·      Late arrivals (after 9:05 AM) beyond 2 will lower your final grade by 1 point

·      After 4 consecutive unexcused absences, you may be dropped from the course without notice or appeal.

 

Assessment of in-class participation is solely at the discretion of the instructor without appeal, and requires you to sing to be heard, contribute positively to the classroom discussions, and behave in a non-disruptive manner.  Disruptive behavior will receive one warning after which the student may be dropped immediately without appeal for subsequent repeat offences.  Dictation homework and exams will be graded on a point system assessing contextual and/or specific accuracy.  Sight Singing exams will be assessed on a point system by the instructor for overall and specific accuracy of given pitch, rhythm, intonation, and if applicable, dynamics and conducting ability.  Tone quality is not assessed.

 
 
MUTH 2229Theory III22229, 2230. Theory III and IV. Continuation of Theory I and II covering the Romantic and 20thcentury repertoires. Emphasis on traditional harmonization exercises, beginning studies in musical form and introduction to current analytical methods. Must be taken in sequence. Fall and spring terms. Prerequisites: MUTH 1130, 1230. Corequisites: MUTH 2129, 2130.

    MUTH 2229.001 - Music Theory III
    T R 9:30 - 10:50 a.m. - Room 2030
    Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: 768-2142
    http:faculty.smu.edu/robfrank
    Office Hours: as posted or by appointment: email Dr. Frank

    Required Texts:

    Mancini & Wick: Theory for Musicians - Second Year
    Other Materials: 8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.
    You should also be enrolled in MUTH 2129 at this time. See me if you are not. Overview of the Course:

    MUTH 2229 is the third semester of a two year music theory program intended for music majors. It is expected that students have successfully completed MUTH 1229-1230. There will be only a brief review of materials from these classes - if you feel you need more review, please see me at once! you may wish to review the materials on the ³Theory on the Web² site: http://www.smu.edu/totw. This class will cover roughly the equivalent of Chapters 14-20 in the text plus basic counterpoint. Materials may be covered in a different sequence than presented in the text. The course will cover this material in classroom lectures, practice and drill, readings from the texts, written exercises, and periodic demonstrations. There will be written quizzes, a mid-term exam, and a final comprehensive exam. Active classroom participation is required. Attendance and punctuality in turning in homework assignments will have a strong impact on your grade. Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, as approved by the instructor. Class begins promptly at 9:30. Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no less than 30 minutes before class, or by turning in a legitimate, written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority. It is the student's responsibility to obtain any materials or assignments or to schedule make-up quizzes from missed classes, excused or unexcused. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. Don't let little problems grow into bigger ones! There will be a graduate assistant assigned to help tutor this class. You are encouraged to contact him or her with questions. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours or by appointment.

     

    Grading: Grades are on a point system and will be based on the following:

      Daily assignments/projects: 40%
      Quizzes 20%
      Mid-term 15%
      Final Exam 15%
      Attendace/class participation (see below) 10%

    2-4 unexcused absences: -5%
    5 or more unexcused absenses: -10%
    2 late arrivals = 1 absense

    This syllabus is subject to oral or written revision by the instructor. Revisions will be posted to this site.

    Students needing academic accommodations for a disability must first contact Ms. Rebecca Marin at 768-4557 then schedule an appointment with the professor to make appropriate arrangements. Religiously observant students wishing to be absent on holidays that require missing class should notify their professors in writing at the beginning of the semester, and should discuss with them, in advance, acceptable ways of making up any work missed because of the absence. Students participating in an officially sanctioned, scheduled University extracurricular activity will be given the opportunity to make up class assignments or other graded assignments missed as a result of their participation. It is the responsibility of the student to make arrangements with the instructor prior to any missed scheduled examination or other missed assignment for making up the work. Students are encouraged to refer to the Student Handbook for violations of the Honor Code regarding academic honesty.

 

MUTH 2230

Theory IV

2

MUTH 2230.001 - Music Theory IV

T TR 9:30 - 10:50 a.m. - Room 1030

Dr. Robert Frank - OFAC 2018 - Office Phone: (214) 768-2142

http://faculty.smu.edu/robfrank - robfrank@smu.edu

Office Hours: as posted or by appointment

 

Required Texts:     Mancini & Wick: Theory for Musicians - Second Year

Other Materials: 8 1/2 x 11 music staff paper, pencils, etc.

 

You should also be enrolled in MUTH 2130.001 at this time. See me if you are not.

 

Overview of the Course:

 

MUTH 2230 is the final semester of a two year music theory program intended for music majors. It is expected that students have successfully completed MUTH 1229-2229. This class will cover roughly the equivalent of Chapters 18-26 in the text. The course will cover this material in classroom lectures, practice and drill, readings from the texts, written exercises, and periodic demonstrations. There will be a significant paper analyzing Wagnerπs Prelude to Tristan und Isolde that will weigh heavily in the homework/projects portion of the grade in the first half of the semester. There may also be required reading assignments and listening/score study in the library. There will be 3-5 written quizzes, a mid-term exam, just before spring break and a final comprehensive exam on Tuesday, May 4 from 11:30-2:30 in this room. Active classroom participation is required. Donπt be shy, everyone has questions and makes mistakes.

 

Attendance and punctuality in turning in homework assignments will have a strong impact on your grade. Homework is due at the beginning of class and late homework will not be accepted except under extenuating circumstances, as approved by the instructor, and may be at reduced credit. Class begins promptly at 9:30. See the policy on attendance listed below. Excused absences require a legitimate excuse and notification by leaving a message on my voice mail or in the main music office no later than 30 minutes before class, or turning in a legitimate written excuse from your appropriate medical, legal, clergical, or university authority. It is the student's responsibility to obtain any materials or assignments or to schedule make-up quizzes from missed classes, excused or unexcused. If there are any extenuating circumstances or special needs that I should be aware of, please feel free to see me at any time. Please do not hesitate to see me in or out of class regarding anything that may interfere with your learning and successful completion of this course. Don't let little problems grow into bigger ones!

 

There are computer programs (MacGamut, Theory on the Web, etc.) available for you to work on your skills. The Graduate Teaching Assistant for this course is Sarah King. You are also always welcome to see me with questions during my office hours or by appointment. Please ask if there is a question.

 

Grading:

Grades are on a point system and will be based on the following:

Ä     Homework/projects/Wagner paper:............................. 40%

Ä     Quizzes (3-5)............................................................... 20%

Ä     Mid-term Exam............................................................ 15%

Ä     Final Exam................................................................... 15%

Ä     Attendance and class participation *............................ 10%

* 3-4 unex. abs. = -5%; 5+ = -10%

 

This syllabus is subject to oral or written revision by the instructor.

 

 
 
MUTH 5330Instrumentation and Arranging3

5330. Instrumentation and Arranging. An overview of the ranges and performing characteristics of orchestral/band instruments and vocalists, with practical application via scoring and arranging for a variety of small instrumental and vocal ensembles. Fall term. Prerequisites: MUTH 2130, 2230.

 

MUTH 5330.001 – Instrumentation and Arranging – Letter Grade

Fall 2007

M-W-F: 2:00- 2:50 PM in Room 2030

Dr. Robert Frank, OFAC 2018

Office Hours W 1:00-2:00 PM and additional hours by appointment or as posted.

(214) 768-2142 - email: robfrank@mail.smu.edu

 

 

Required Texts:     Text: Adler, The Study of Orchestration

 

On Reserve:            CDs of Examples to accompany Adler, The Study of Orchestration

                                 Other scores as needed

 

Other Materials:     8 1/2 x 11 staff paper, black fine tip ink pens, blue pencils, rulers, curves, etc. or students may make use of Finale or other music notation software as approved by the instructor.

 

 

Course Rationale

The study of instrumentation and arranging is perhaps one of the most practical and applicable skills needed by musicians today. The ability to create practical, playable, and artistic transcriptions, arrangements, and original compositions for the full range of standard instruments allows a musician to build a unique and personalized repertoire for themselves and the ensembles in which they perform. Music educators will find daily use for these skills. This course directly applies knowledge covered in MUTH and MUHI courses in what many find the most enjoyable aspect of their musical training: the ability to create new and original works.

 

Course Aims and Learning Outcomes:

This class will cover instrumentation and arranging techniques for chorus/voice and the standard acoustic instruments of the modern orchestra. Lectures and demonstrations will present the general and specific skills needed for writing feasible and effective parts for each instrument/voice. A strong emphasis will be placed on practical considerations facing music educators, composers and arrangers as well as general knowledge of the instruments. This course consists of both an in-depth study of the possibilities, limits, and characteristics of each instrument and voice (instrumentation), and application via in-class projects to the realization of practical, playable, and artistic arrangements. Basic skill using modern notation software, score and part preparation standards, and historical / stylistic orchestration techniques also will be addressed.

 

Course Requirements, Expectations, and Policies

Because aural feedback of the examples you write is an essential part of the learning process, active class attendance and participation by everyone in reading examples is essential. Three or more unexcused absences or an absence during a prearranged demonstration/reading day on your instrument will result in a lowering of your grade as noted below. Excused absences require a legitimate reason (when in doubt, ask, and emergency situations will of course be excused) and notification of the instructor before the beginning of the missed class period. You may call and/or leave a note with the music office or my office voice mail at least 60 minutes before class or see me in advance. Four or more consecutive absences may result in your being dropped from the course at the instructorπs discretion.

If you have questions or special needs, it is your responsibility to ask. Office hour will be available for additional help and the instructor will make every effort to assist students.

Small projects will be assigned throughout the semester. These projects will apply and demonstrate the skills learned. Students are expected to bring their instruments to class for demonstration during lectures pertaining to that instrument. Assignments may include worksheets, essays, mini-projects score analysis, reading assignments from the text or reserve Materials. Periodic quizzes will be given (see below). "Pop" quizzes may be given at any time covering any assigned material.

All students will complete a final project as determined in consultation with the instructor that will be an arrangement or original composition for a mixed group of instruments and/or voices (pending availability of resources for a reading session). This project serves as the final exam. A written proposal of the work to be done, instrumentation, and arranging/transcribing techniques is due Nov. 9th in class. Every effort will be made to have a reading of all projects. Due date for final projects will be determined by ensemble availability and/or final exam time as per the registrar's office. Late/incomplete projects will receive at most 50% credit.

 

Grading:

Grades will be calculated as follows:

      Attendance (see policy below)........................................ 10%

      Homework/class projects/assignments........................... 20%

      Quizzes (4) .................................................................... 20%

      MidTerm Exam............................................................... 20%

      Final Project.................................................................... 30%

Attendance Policy:

                  3-4 unexcused abs. or 1 during project reading/demo day..... -5%

                  5 or more............................................................................. -10%

 

 

 

MUTH 5330: Fall 2007

 

Rough Outline of Class Topics (subject to change as per class needs):

Note: Due to varying class makeup and backgrounds, a specific day-by-day plan of this project-based, upper division course is not practical.

 

Introduction, syllabus review, listening and discussion

Notation/Score layout/terms

String Family

Quiz #1: Strings

Woodwind Family

Quiz #2: Woodwinds and transposition

Readings of Project #1: transcription for strings & WW

Brass Family

Arranging Techniques

review for Mid-term

Mid Term Exam

Percussion Family

Quiz #3: Brass & Percussion

Readings of Project #2: arrangement for small ensemble

Choral/Vocal Scoring

Final Project Proposal due

Arranging/basic orchestration techniques for different levels (Elementary/HS/etc.)

Quiz #4: Choral and Basic Orchestration

Readings of Project #3: choral arrangement/transcription

Final Project

 

Project Grading Criteria:

 

Each project will be evaluated for use of required instruments in correct ranges and performance limitations, as well as according to idiomatic, stylistic, and artistic guidelines as presented in the text and in class. Legibility of score/parts will also count toward the project grade. Projects not ready at the scheduled reading time may receive a 20% reduction in grade and may not receive a reading.

 

Final Project Grading Criteria:

 

10% each for the following:

 

1.     Proposal listing instrumentation, source (a photocopy of the score), brief outline of how the work is to be transcribed/arranged, and approximate duration. (Due Nov. 9th)

2.     Accuracy of transpositions, pitches, etc.

3.     Correct use of articulation, dynamics, idiomatic techniques

4.     Appropriate ranges

5.     Creative and appropriate doublings

6.     Voicing/spacing & voice leading

7.     Accompaniment/arranging

8.     Score layout and notation

9.     Neatness and legibility

10.  Example parts (layout and notation and transposition) Complete parts if reading session can be arranged.

 

 
   NOTE:  Theory Outline and Aural Skills Outlines sent by Dr. Frank are in Data/Syllabi 
 Total15Credit hours not given for each course, but the total was specified for these courses 
   
MUTH 1129, 1130, 1229, 1230, 2129, 2229, 2130, 2230, 5330 = requirements1515
 
 

Southwestern University

http://www.southwestern.edu/departments/music/index.php

http://www.southwestern.edu/departments/music/curriculum.php

http://www.southwestern.edu/departments/music/curriculum.php

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
  1
76-101 FUNDAMENTALS OF SOLFEGE/EAR TRAINING
The development of proficiency in aural skills through dictation and sight singing. Qualified students may place out of this class by examination, but must substitute another hour of coursework for degree requirements. To be taken concurrently with 76-103. (Fall)(FAL)
 
  1
76-111 SOLFEGE/EAR TRAINING I
Continuation of 76-101. To be taken concurrently with 76-113 and 80-113. Prerequisite: Music Theory 76-101 or passage of a qualifying diagnostic examination. (Spring) (FAL)
 
  3
76-113 MUSIC THEORY I
Review and continuation of concepts introduced in Fundamentals of Music Theory. A working knowledge of pitch and rhythm notation and mastery of basic musical concepts such as scales, key signatures, and triad and seventh chord types is assumed. Further work with four-part harmony and harmonic progression. New concepts: cadences, musical forms, non-chord tones, diatonic sevenths, secondary chords, and modulation. To be taken concurrently with Music Literature 80-113 (majors) and 76-111. Prerequisite: Music Theory 76-103 or passage of a qualifying diagnostic examination. (Spring) (FAL)
 
  1
76-121 SOLFEGE/EAR TRAINING II
Continuation of 76-111. To be taken concurrently with 76-123 and Music Literature 80-123. Prerequisite: Music Theory 76-111. (Fall) (FAL)
 
  3
76-123 MUSIC THEORY II
A consideration of functionally tonal chromatic harmony and modulation through analysis and compositional exercises. Larger formal designs (sonata, rondo, concerto, song forms) will be explored in late 18th and 19th century music literature. To be taken concurrently with Music Literature 80-123 (majors) and 76-121. Prerequisite: Music Theory 76-113. (Fall) (FAL)
 
  1
76-131 SOLFEGE/EAR TRAINING III
Continuation of 76-121. To be taken concurrently with 76-223 and 80-223. Prerequisite: Music Theory 76-121. (Spring) (FAL)
 
  3
76-223 MUSIC THEORY III
A study of the contrapuntal styles of the Renaissance and Baroque eras through analysis and compositional exercises. To be taken concurrently with Music Literature 80-223 and 76-131. Prerequisite: Music Theory 76-123. (Spring) (FAL)
 
  3
76-233 MUSIC THEORY IV
Review of chromatic harmony; 20th-century compositional styles. To be taken concurrently with Music Literature 80-233. Prerequisite: Music Theory 76-223. (Fall) (FAL)
 
     
76-103  FUNDAMENTALS OF MUSIC THEORY. A survey of the rudiments of musical notation and analysis, beginning with basics of pitch and rhythm notation: the grand staff, clefs, major and minor scales and key signatures; identification and notation of the basic triad and seventh chord types in tonal harmony, chord inversions, Roman numeral analysis; harmonic progression; and introduction to part writing with triads. Some prior study on voice or an instrument and experience with reading basic musical notation is strongly recommended. This course is a prerequisite to 76-113. Qualified students may place out of this class by examination. To be taken concurrently with 76-101. (Fall) (FAL)  [This is the remedial class and is not listed as a requirement as below] 
 Total16not counting the fundamentals class 
   Music Theory 76-101, 111, 113, 121, 123, 131, 223, 233 (required theory courses) 

Stephen F. Austin University

www.music.sfasu.edu

http://www.music.sfasu.edu/prospective_students/undergrad/pdf/INSTRUMENTAL.pdf

http://www.sfasu.edu/bulletin/docs/general/2008-2009/gen08_web_finearts.pdf

Music Theory Requirements for Music Ed majors: MTC 151, 152,161, 162, 251, 252, 261, 262, 461 [These numbers refer to the line number in the catalog]

Req theory course

Title

Cr. hrs.

Description

 

MUSI 1116

Aural Skills I

1

151. Aural Skills I (MUSI 1116) - One semester hour credit, three hours lab per week. Studies in ear training: sight singing, error detection, 254 Stephen F. Austin State University
keyboard harmony, and melodic, harmonic, contrapuntal, and rhythmic dictation. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 161. Fall.

 

MUSI 1117

Aural Skills II

1

152. Aural Skills II (MUSI 1117) - One semester hour credit, three hours lab per week. Continuation of MTC 151. Prerequisite: MTC 151. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 162. Spring.

 

MUSI 1211

Theory I

2

161. Theory I (MUSI 1211) - Two semester hours, two hours lecture per week. Fundamental functions of musical texture: major and minor tonalities, triads and part writing. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 151. Fall.

 

MUSI 1212

Theory II

2

162. Theory II (MUSI 1212) - Two semester hours, two hours lecture per week. Continuation of MTC 161. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 152. Prerequisite: MTC 161. Spring.

 

MUSI 2116

Aural Skills III

1

251. Aural Skills III (MUSI 2116) - One semester hour credit, three hours lab per week. Continuation of MTC 152. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 261. Prerequisite: MTC 152. Fall.

 

MUSI 2117

Aural Skills IV

1

252. Aural Skills IV (MUSI 2117) - One semester hour credit, three hours lab per week. Continuation of MTC 251. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 262. Prerequisite: MTC 251. Spring.

 

MUSI 2211

Theory III

2

261. Theory III (MUSI 2211) - Two semester hours, two hours lecture per week. Study of 18th- and 19th-century harmonic and counterpoint techniques. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 251. Prerequisite: MTC 162. Fall.

 

MUSI 2212

Theory IV

2

262. Theory IV (MUSI 2212) - Two semester hours, two hours lecture per week. Continuation of MTC 261 including 20th century techniques. Must be taken concurrently with MTC 252. Prerequisite: MTC 261. Spring.

 
 

Music Form and Analysis

2

461. Music Form and Analysis - Exploration and analysis of musical styles and major structural forms. Assimilation of theoretical and historical knowledge of all major periods. Completion of in-depth analysis projects that demonstrate an understanding of theoretical analysis, historical context, research techniques and scholarly writing. Prerequisites: MHL 245, 345, 346.

 
   Counted Form and Analysis as 2 hours - could not find it anywhere 

 

 

Tarleton State University

www.tarleton.edu/~music

http://www.tarleton.edu/~music/documents/Curr_BA_Music_Option_1.pdf

http://www.tarleton.edu/~music/documents/music_courses.pdf

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 

MUSC

  

213-3 Fundamentals of Music. (3-1) Development of music reading,
performance, and listening skills. May be taken by all who desire to develop
basic music skills. Course fee $10. Lab fee $10.

Master Course Syllabus Outline

 

 

Department:  Fine Arts & Communications             Course Prefix/Number:  MUSC 2133

Official Course Title:  Fundamentals of Music

Master Syllabus Approved by Department on:

 

 

I.          Catalog Description:  Development of music reading, performance, and listening skills.  May be taken by all who desire to develop basic music skills.

 

II.        Prerequisites:  None.

 

III.       Expanded Course Description:  Course work includes lectures, discussions, listening exercises, and weekly reading/application assignments.  Intended for all students, this course meets the visual and performing arts core curriculum requirement.

 

IV.       Intended Student Learning Outcomes

 

            A.        Knowledge Outcomes:

1.         the essential parameters of music: pitch, melodic range and contour, harmony, rhythm, meter, tempo, texture, form

2.                  practical application of the technical aspects of  music writing: key signatures, time signatures, interval identification, chord identification                                                  

3.         the four families of instruments in a standard orchestra

4.         a variety of music representing periods in western music

 

 

B.        Skill Outcomes:  Students will be able to:

1.                  aurally identify the time period of recorded western music.

2.                  practically apply knowledge of the structure of rhythm.

3.                  identify and construct both major and minor scales.

4.                  identify and construct key signatures in major keys.

5.                  identify and construct intervals.

6.                  identify and construct major, minor, augmented, and diminished root position triads.

 

            C.        Value Outcomes:  Students will:

1.         understand music’s basic elements and vocabulary.

2.         gain historical perspective.

3.         have the knowledge to become educated consumers of music, making discriminating choices.

 

 

V.        Other

 

            A.        Course Requirements:         

 

1.         Grading/Evaluation Procedures:

                                               Class attendance          30%

                                               Class assignments        30%

                                               Concert attendance      10%

Test #1                                    10%

Test #2                                    10%

                                                Final                            10%

                                               

                                   

                        2.         Attendance Policy:  Required.

 

B.        Required Texts and Recordings:  The Music Kit, Tom Manoff (Workbook       and Rhythm Reader)

 

            C.        Bibliography:  N/A

 

 

MUSC 1474

Theory I

4

147-4 Theory I: Basics of Music. (3-2) Introduction to music fundamentals, staff,
clefs, key signatures, scales, time signatures and notation; meter and
rhythm; chords; harmony; melodic organization and structure; use of
Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI); aural skills. Computer software
used for some written and ear-training assignments. Prerequisite: A passing
grade on the placement examinations in theory and aural skills. Course fee
$10. Lab fee $5.

Master Course Syllabus Outline

 

Department:  Fine Arts & Communications             Course Prefix/Number:  MUSC 1474

Official Course Title:  Theory I: Basics of Music

Master Syllabus Approved by Department on:

 

I.          Catalog Description:  Introduction to music fundamentals, staff, clefs, key signatures, scales, time signatures and notation; meter and rhythm; chords; harmony; melodic organization and structure; use of Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI); aural skills.  Computer software used for some written and ear-training assignments.

 

II.        Prerequisites:  A passing grade on the placement examinations in theory and aural skills.  Lab fee $5.

 

III.       Expanded Course Description:  Course work includes lectures, demonstrations, analyses; as well as reading, listening, and written assignments.  Intended for music majors, but non-majors may also enroll.

 

IV.       Intended Student Learning Outcomes

 

A.        Knowledge Outcomes:  Students will become familiar with the following:

1.         clefs

2.         pitch and rhythmic notation

3.         conventional rhythmic patterns, such as half- and quarter beat values, dotted rhythms

4.         simple and compound intervals

5.         chord quality and inversion

6.         all major and minor scales

7.         non-Western scales and medieval modes

8.         all major and minor key signatures

9.         conventional tempo and dynamic markings

10.       melodic characteristics:  sequences, phrases, and phrase relationships

11.       chordal analysis

12.       categories of non-harmonic tones and cadences

 

B.        Skill Outcomes:  Students will be able to:

1.                  read pitches in four different clefs:  soprano, alto, tenor and bass.

2.                  sight sing melodies containing mostly stepwise motion, but with some tonic and dominant triad leaps.

3.                  read and aurally recognize conventional rhythmic patterns.

4.                  identify and construct all intervals within the octave.

5.                  identify and construct major, minor, augmented, and diminished triads in all positions.

6.                  identify I, IV, and V in four-chord progressions.

7.                  identify and construct both major and minor scales.

8.                  construct non-Western scales and medieval modes.

9.                  identify and construct key signatures in major keys.

10.              visually identify the following non-harmonic tones:  passing, neighboring, escape, and anticipation; as well as appoggiaturas and suspensions.

11.              visually identify perfect authentic, imperfect authentic, plagal, deceptive, and half cadences.

12.              analyze a chorale with roman numerals and figured bass symbols.

 

C.        Value Outcomes:  Students will:

1.         understand music’s basic elements and vocabulary.

2.         begin to acquire musicianship.

3.         be able to analyze triadic music for voice and/or piano.

 

V.        Other

 

A.        Course Requirements:         

 

1.         Grading/Evaluation Procedures:

Homework and computer lab assignments     30%

Lab tests (3 @ 10% each)                               30%

Midterm exam                                                 20%

Final exam                                                       20%

 

2.         Attendance Policy:  Students are allowed three missed classes in theory and two missed classes in lab.

 

3.         Required Texts and Recordings: 

Bruce Benward and Marilyn Saker.  Music in Theory and Practice, (7th

            ed.), Vol. 1, text and workbook.

                                    Bruce Benward and J. Timonthy Kolosick, Ear Training: A Technique

for Listening, (6th ed.).

                                    Robert W. Ottman.  Music for Sight Singing, (6th ed.).

                                   

C.        Bibliography:  N/A

 

 
  4148-4 Theory II: Diatonic Harmony. (3-2) Part writing of figured bass requiring all
diatonic triads and seventh chords; nonharmonic tones and elementary
Course Descriptions 18
M
modulation, harmonization of melodies in eighteenth-century style; aural
skills. Prerequisite: MUSC 147. Course fee $10. Lab fee $5.

Master Course Syllabus Outline

 

Department:  Fine Arts & Communications             Course Prefix/Number:  MUSC 1474

Official Course Title:  Theory II: Diatonic Harmony

Master Syllabus Approved by Department on:

 

I.          Catalog Description:  Part writing of figured bass requiring all diatonic triads and seventh chords; nonharmonic and elementary modulation, harmonization of melodies in eighteenth-century style; aural skills.

 

II.        Prerequisites: MUSC 1474.

 

III.       Expanded Course Description:  Course work includes lectures, demonstrations, analyses; as well as reading, listening, and written assignments.  Intended for music majors, but non-majors may also enroll.

 

IV.       Intended Student Learning Outcomes

 

A.        Knowledge Outcomes:  Students will become familiar with:

1.         voice-leading and part-writing techniques of diatonic music.

2.         common chord progressions.

3.         harmonic rhythm.

4.         harmonization of folk melodies.

5.         seventh chords:  dominant, leading-tone, and non-dominant.

6.         modulation between closely related keys.

7.         secondary dominant and secondary leading-tone chords.

8.         syncopation.

 

B.        Skill Outcomes:  Students will be able to:

1.                  transcribe the melody and underlying harmony of a simple song using computer notation.

2.                  harmonize a given melody with common chord progressions.

3.                  sight sing melodies containing any leap within an octave.

4.                  read and aurally recognize syncopated rhythms.

5.                  construct all seventh chords in all positions.

6.                  identify I, ii, IV, V and vi in brief chord progressions.

7.                  aurally identify the following non-harmonic tones:  passing, neighboring, escape, and anticipation; as well as appoggiaturas and suspensions.

8.                  aurally identify perfect authentic, imperfect authentic, plagal, deceptive, and half cadences.

9.                  compose short works that contain seventh chords, common chord modulations, and secondary chords.

 

C.        Value Outcomes:  Students will:

1.         gain a better appreciation of the craft of composition during the common practice period.

2.         be able to understand more complex types of tonal music.

3.         continue to develop aural skills and musicianship.

 

V.        Other

 

A.        Course Requirements:         

 

1.         Grading/Evaluation Procedures:

Homework and computer lab assignments     30%

Lab tests (3 @ 10% each)                               30%

Midterm exam                                                 20%

Final exam                                                       20%

 

2.         Attendance Policy:  Students are allowed three missed classes in theory and two missed classes in lab.

 

3.         Required Texts and Recordings: 

Bruce Benward and Marilyn Saker.  Music in Theory and Practice, (7th

            ed.), Vol. 1, text and workbook.

                                    Bruce Benward and J. Timonthy Kolosick, Ear Training: A Technique

for Listening, (6th ed.).

                                    Robert W. Ottman.  Music for Sight Singing, (6th ed.).

                                   

C.        Bibliography:  N/A

 
  4247-4 Theory III: Counterpoint. (3-2) Practice in contrapuntal composition in
eighteenth-century tonal styles. A review of Musical Instrument Digital
Interface (MIDI) systems will be presented early in the semester. Computer
software will be used for some written and ear-training assignments.
Prerequisites: MUSC 147, 148. Course fee $10. Lab fee $5.

Master Course Syllabus Outline

 

Department:  Fine Arts & Communications             Course Prefix/Number:  MUSC 2474

Official Course Title:  Theory III:  Counterpoint

Master Syllabus Approved by Department on:

 

I.          Catalog Description: Practice in contrapuntal composition in eighteenth-century tonal styles.  A review of Musical Instrument Digital Interface (MIDI) will be presented early in the semester.  Computer software will be used for some written and ear training assignments.

 

II.        Prerequisites:  MUSC 1474, 1484

 

III.       Expanded Course Description:  Course work includes lectures, demonstrations, and analyses; as well as reading, listening, and written assignments.  Intended for music majors.

 

IV.       Intended Student Learning Outcomes

 

A.        Knowledge Outcomes:  Students will continue to develop aural skills.  They will also become familiar with the:

1.         construction of a single melodic line.

2.         specific techniques associated with single melodies, such as sequences, step progressions, and compound construction.

3.         principles of two-, three-, and four-part counterpoint.

4.         canons and invertible counterpoint.

5.         learned devices, including augmentation, diminution, contrary motion, retrograde, and stretto.

6.         construction of J. S. Bach’s two-part inventions.

7.         construction of J. S. Bach’s three- and four-part fugues.

 

 

B.        Skill Outcomes:  Students will be able to:

1.                  compose melodies that are coherent in terms of key, contour (shape), and rhythm.

2.                  identify sequences, step progressions, and compound melodies in the works they are currently working on in applied lessons.

3.                  compose two-, three-, and four-part counterpoint.

4.                  compose canons and invertible counterpoint.

5.                  apply learned devices to original melodies.

6.         analyze a two-part invention by J. S. Bach.

7.         analyze a three- or four-part fugue by J. S. Bach.

8.         aurally identify all seventh chords.

9.         viio°6 and vii°7 in four-chord progressions.

10.       sing melodies containing intervals within the V7 chord and wide leaps.

11.       identify rhythms with sixteenth-note subdivisions and syncopation.

 

C.        Value Outcomes:  Students will:

1.         understand how counterpoint is present in virtually all music.

2.         have a better grasp of music of the 18th and 19th centuries.

3.         be able to analyze keyboard music from the 18th and 19th centuries.

4.         continue to develop aural skills and musicianship.

 

V.        Other

 

A.        Course Requirements:         

 

1.         Grading/Evaluation Procedures:

Homework and computer lab assignments     30%

Lab tests (3 @ 10% each)                               30%

Midterm exam                                                 20%

Final exam                                                       20%

 

2.         Attendance Policy:  Students are allowed three missed classes in theory and two missed classes in lab.

 

3.         Required Texts and Recordings: 

Kent Kennan, Counterpoint Based on Eighteenth-Century Practice (4th

            ed.)
            Bruce Benward and J. Timonthy Kolosick,
Ear Training: A Technique

for Listening, (6th ed.).

                                    Robert W. Ottman.  Music for Sight Singing, (6th ed.).

                                   

C.        Bibliography:  N/A

 

 
  4248-4 Theory IV: Chromatic Harmony. (3-2) Part writing of figured bass
exercises and melody harmonizations requiring altered chords, 9th, 11th,
and 13th chords; remote modulations, study of sonata, rondo, variation and
other nineteenth-century forms; aural skills. Introduction to analysis of tonal
music according to the theory of structural levels. Prerequisites: MUSC 147,
148, 247. Course fee $10. Lab fee $5.

Master Course Syllabus Outline

 

Department:  Fine Arts & Communications             Course Prefix/Number:  MUSC 2484

Official Course Title:  Theory IV: Chromatic Harmony

Master Syllabus Approved by Department on:

 

I.          Catalog Description:  Part writing of figured bass exercises and melody harmonizations requiring altered chords, 9th, 11th, and 13th chords; remote modulations, study of sonata, rondo, variation and other nineteenth-century forms; aural skills.  Introduction to analysis of tonal music according to the theory of structural levels.

 

II.        Prerequisites: MUSC 1474, 1484, 2474

 

III.       Expanded Course Description:  Course work includes lectures, demonstrations, analyses; as well as reading, listening, and written assignments.  Intended for music majors.

 

IV.       Intended Student Learning Outcomes

 

A.        Knowledge Outcomes:  Students will become familiar with the following:

1.         borrowed chords

2.         Neapolitan 6th chords

3.         augmented 6th chords

4.         altered dominants

5.         chromatic modulation

6.         variation technique

7.         the construction of classical sonata and rondo forms

8.         the defining characteristics of a romantic character piece

9.         basic elements of Schenkerian linear analysis

 

B.        Skill Outcomes:  Students will be able to:

1.                  identify and construct all categories of chromatic harmony.

2.                  analyze a sonata allegro by Mozart or Beethoven.

3.                  compose a theme and set of five variations for piano.

4.                  compose a brief piano piece in the romantic style.

5.                  read and aurally recognize rhythmic patterns with triplet subdivisions and eighth-beat values.

6.                  aurally identify inverted seventh chords.

7.                  identify the correct sonority from a series of triads and seventh chords (all possible positions).

8.                  identify secondary chords, Neapolitan 6ths, and augmented 6ths chords in brief chord progressions.

9.                  aurally identify binary, rounded binary, and ternary forms.

10.              sight sing modulating and modal melodies.

 

C.        Value Outcomes:  Students will:

1.         gain a better understanding of the common formal designs of tonal music.

2.         be able to comprehend and analyze chromatic music.

3.         continue to develop aural skills and musicianship.

4.         gain an appreciation of one of the most sophisticated analytical techniques in use today.

 

V.        Other

 

A.        Course Requirements:         

 

1.         Grading/Evaluation Procedures:

Homework and computer lab assignments     30%

Lab tests (3 @ 10% each)                               30%

Midterm exam                                                 20%

Final exam                                                       20%

 

2.         Attendance Policy:  Students are allowed three missed classes in theory and two missed classes in lab.

 

3.         Required Texts and Recordings: 

Bruce Benward and Marilyn Saker.  Music in Theory and Practice, (7th

            ed.), Vol. 2, text only.

                                    Bruce Benward and J. Timonthy Kolosick, Ear Training: A Technique

for Listening, (6th ed.).

                                    Robert W. Ottman.  Music for Sight Singing, (6th ed.).

                                   

C.        Bibliography:  N/A

 

 
  2349-3 Twentieth Century Theory. (2-1) A study of scales, chords, key centers,
set-theory, polytonality, sound mass, electronic and computer techniques in
analysis and writing. Course fee $10. Lab fee $5.

Master Course Syllabus Outline

 

Department:  Fine Arts & Communications             Course Prefix/Number:  MUSC 3492

Official Course Title:  Twentieth Century Theory

Master Syllabus Approved by Department on:

 

I.          Catalog Description:  A study of scales, chords, key centers, set-theory, polytonality, sound mass, electronic and computer techniques in analysis and writing.

 

II.        Prerequisites: None.

 

III.       Expanded Course Description:  Course work includes lectures, demonstrations, analyses; as well as reading, listening, and written assignments.  Intended for music majors.

 

IV.       Intended Student Learning Outcomes

 

A.        Knowledge Outcomes:  Students will become familiar with:

1.         chromatic mediant relationships.

2.         modes and other scale formations.

3.         polychords and other simultaneities.

4.         bitonality, polytonality, atonality, and pandiatonicism.

5.         nontraditional time signatures, meters, and rhythm.

6.         set theory.

7.         serial procedures.

8.         electronic techniques.

9.         aleatoric, chance, and minimalist techniques.

 

B.        Skill Outcomes:  Students will be able to:

1.                  analyze music based on the organizing principles of 20th-century music.

2.                  compose a character piece for piano in the style of Claude Debussy.

3.                  compose a serial piece in the style of Alban Berg or Ruth Crawford.

 

C.        Value Outcomes:  Students will gain:

1.         a basic understanding of the wide variety of compositional styles that comprise 20th-century music.

2.         an appreciation of 20th-century art music from a theoretical perspective.

 

V.        Other

 

A.        Course Requirements:         

 

1.         Grading/Evaluation Procedures:

Homework assignments                                  30%

3 compositions (@ 5% each)                          15%

Midterm exam                                                 25%

Final exam                                                       30%

 

2.         Attendance Policy:  Attendance is required.  Unexcused absences will result in one point deducted from the student’s overall grade regardless of the situation.

 

3.         Required Text:

Stefan Kostka.  Materials and Techniques of Twentieth-Century Music, (2nd ed.).

                                   

C.        Bibliography:  N/A

 

 
  2448-2 Scoring and Arranging for Ensembles. (2-0) A practical study of the skill
of scoring music for various instrumental and choral groups. Projects in
adapting music from a variety of sources. Emphasis is placed on
transcribing and arranging for elementary, junior, and senior high
ensembles. Prerequisite: MUSC 248 or approval of department head.

Master Course Syllabus Outline

 

Department:  Fine Arts & Communications             Course Prefix/Number:  MUSC 4482

Official Course Title:  Scoring and Arranging for Ensembles

Master Syllabus Approved by Department on:

 

I.          Catalog Description: A practical study of the skill of scoring music for various instrumental and choral groups.  Projects in adapting music from a variety of sources.  Emphasis is placed on transcribing and arranging for elementary, junior, and senior high ensembles.

 

II.        Prerequisites: MUSC 2484 or approval of department head.

 

III.       Expanded Course Description: The intent of this course is to provide students with knowledge of traditional orchestration practices and the ability to read orchestral scores.  In addition, this course provides students the opportunity to gain the practical ability in arranging and scoring for a school band or chorus.  Intended for music majors.

 

IV.       Intended Student Learning Outcomes

 

A.        Knowledge Outcomes:  Students will develop an understanding of:

1.         the different families of instruments and voices, including their ranges, timbre and special effects.

2.         transposing instruments.

3.         standard terminology.

4.         notational symbols found in scores.

5.         how instruments of the band and orchestra are used within a composition.

6.         the methods of scoring voices and instruments in an effective and artistic manner.

 

B.        Skill Outcomes:  Students will be able to

1.         read and understand band, choir and orchestra scores.

2.         score idiomatically for standard instruments.

2.         arrange solo pieces for a variety of ensembles at the secondary level.

4.         reinforce the formal structure of music with changes in instrumentation and orchestration.

5.         utilize current music technology to produce and print musical score

 

C.        Value Outcomes:  Students will gain a deeper understanding of:

 

1.         instruments.

2.         attributes that cause and affect the sounds that the instruments and voice can produce, singly and in combination with each other. 

3.         how sounds and their combinations can be manipulated in the compositional process.

 

V.        Other

 

A.        Course Requirements:         

 

1.         Grading/Evaluation Procedures:

Students receive a grade for each of the five units based on workshetts, scoring projects, and unit quizzes.  These five grades are then averaged equally for the final grade in the course.

 

2.         Attendance Policy:  Students are expected to attend all classes.

 

3.         Required Text:

Brad Hansen, The Essentials of Instrumentation.

 

C.        Bibliography:  N/A

 
     
     

Texas A&M University - Commerce

www7.tamu-commerce.edu/music

http://www.tamu-commerce.edu/music/currentstudents/

http://catalog.tamu-commerce.acalog.com/content.php?catoid=3&navoid=78

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
   

All music majors must pass with a grade of C or better a four-semester sequence of basic theory and analysis (Mus 114/115, 125, 215, 225) and aural skills (Mus 117, 127, 217, 227) as part of the Music Core.  In their first semester of music study, all freshmen take a diagnostic exam.  Based upon the results of the test, the entering freshmen students take 4 hours of Fundamental Theory (Mus 114) or 3 hours of Theory I (Mus 115); then, at the conclusion of the first semester, all freshmen music majors—regardless of their initial class assignment—must pass the Theory I final exam before proceeding in the theory sequence to Theory II (Mus 125) in their second semester.  Similarly, music majors who transfer to A&M-Commerce who have not completed the 12 semester hours of theory take a music theory diagnostic exam and complete the prescribed theory sequence.  All upper division music majors must complete one semester of Analysis of Music Form (Mus 316, 2 hours) and Counterpoint (Mus 318, 2 hours) or Orchestration/Arranging (Mus 416, 2 hours).

 
  4MUS 114 - Fundamental Theory
Hours: Four

Theory for students whose placement scores indicate insufficient background for Theory I.

When Offered (1)
 
 
  3MUS 115 - Theory I
Hours: Three

A study of fundamentals, chords, keys, voice leading, harmonic progression, inversions, cadences, phrases and periods. Prerequisite Pass placement test for 115 or Theory 114 with a grade of “C” or better. Corequisite Concurrent enrollment with Music 117.

Texas Common Course Number (MUSI 1311)
When Offered (1, 2)
 
  1MUS 117 - Ear Training I
Hours: One Lecture Lab/ Clock Hours (2 lab)

Fundamentals of music through sight singing, ear training and the incorporation of movable solemnizations. Studies involve elementary sight singing, dictation of melodic and harmonic intervals and dictation of rhythm and melody.
 
  3MUS 125 - Theory II
Hours: Three

A study of non-chord tones and seventh chords. Prerequisite Music 115 with a grade of “C” or better. Corequisite Concurrent enrollment with Mus 117.
 
  1MUS 127 - Ear Training II
Hours: One Lecture Lab/ Clock Hours (2 lab)

A course designed to enable students to sight-sing and take dictation in complex rhythms and melodies. Prerequisite Music 117 with a grade of “C” or better.

This is online at

http://www.tamu-commerce.edu/music/currentstudents/mus127/downloads/DruhanSyllabus.pdf

but will have to be retyped

 
  3MUS 215 - Theory III
Hours: Three

A study of secondary functions, modulation, mode mixture, Neapolitan chord and augmented sixth chords. Prerequisite Music 125 with a grade of “C” or better. Corequisite Concurrent enrollment with Music 217.
 
  1MUS 217 - Ear Training III
Hours: One Lecture Lab/ Clock Hours (2 lab)

A course designed to enable students to hear, sing, and Notate complex rhythms, modulating melodies, and harmonies. Prerequisite Music 125 and 127 with a grade of “C” or better.
 
  3MUS 225 - Theory IV
Hours: Three

A study of augmented sixth chords, enharmonic spellings and modulations, chromatic harmony in the late nineteenth century and An Introduction to twentieth-century practices. Prerequisite Music 215 with a grade of “C” or better. Corequisite Concurrent enrollment with Music 227.
 
   MUS 227 [Assume this is Ear Training IV, although the entire course was missing in the school catalog - perhaps an inadvertent omission because 225 requires concurrent enrollment with 227] 
  2MUS 316 - Analysis of Music Form
Hours: Two

Analysis of musical structure from simple binary and ternary forms, the rondo and sonata-allegro forms, and contrapuntal applications. Prerequisite Music 215 with a grade of “C” or better.
 
  2MUS 318 - Counterpoint
Hours: Two

Principles of contrapuntal writing in the style of J.S. Bach and his successors in the Eighteenth and Nineteenth Centuries. Prerequisite Music 215 with a grade of “C” or better Concurrent enrollment with Music 225 is permitted when necessary.

OR

MUS 416 - Orchestration/Arranging
Hours: Two

Arranging for various vocal/instrumental ensemble combinations. Prerequisite Music 215 with a grade of “C” or better.
 

 
     
     

Texas A&M University - Corpus Christi

http://music.tamucc.edu/

http://catalog.tamucc.edu/catalog09/undergraduate/liberal_arts1.pdf

http://catalog.tamucc.edu/catalog09/undergraduate/courses_descriptions.pdf

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

Teacher Certification Common Music Core

Note that the first course in the
Musicianship sequence (MUSI 1312) requires a passing score on the Music Department
Theory Fundamentals Placement Exam OR prior completion of MUSI 1311 with a grade of
“C” or better. Similarly, the first course in the Aural Training sequence (MUSI 1117) requires
a passing score on the Music Department Theory Fundamentals Placement Exam OR prior
completion of MUSI 1116 with a grade of “C” or better.

MUSI 1312, 2311, 2312 Musicianship II, III, IV

MUSI 1117, 2116, 2117 Aural Training II, III, IV

MUSI 3346 Form and Analysis of Tonal Music

MUSI 4346 Orchestration and Arranging

MUSI 1307 Elements of Musical Style (Meets core curriculum Fine Arts

requirement)

 
  1MUSI 1116 (MUSI 1116) 1 sem. hr.
AURAL TRAINING I
A companion course to MUSI 1311, designed to
strengthen the understanding of theoretical principles
through the development of aural perception and skills;
exercises in melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic dictation;
and drill in sight singing.
 
  1MUSI 1117 (MUSI 1117) 1 sem. hr.
AURAL TRAINING II
Continuation of MUSI 1116; a companion course to
MUSI 1312. Prerequisite: Passing score on the Music
Department Theory Fundamentals Placement Exam OR
prior completion of MUSI 1116 and MUSI 1311 with
grades of “C” or better.
 
  3MUSI 1311 (MUSI 1311) 3 sem. hrs.
MUSICIANSHIP I
First principles of chord progression and phrase
harmonization. Theory assessment required prior to
enrollment.
 
  3MUSI 1312 (MUSI 1312) 3 sem. hrs.
MUSICIANSHIP II
Continuation of MUSI 1311, with a study of more
advanced chord structures and their placement within the
phrase through written exercises, analysis, and correlated keyboard projects. Prerequisite: Passing score on the
Music Department Theory Fundamentals Placement
Exam OR prior completion of MUSI 1311 and MUSI
1116 with grades of “C” or better.
 
  1MUSI 2116 (MUSI 2116) 1 sem. hr.
AURAL TRAINING III
Continuation of MUSI 1117; a companion course to MUSI
2311. Designed to further the understanding of advanced
theoretical principles and techniques through related aural
exercises, dictation, and sight singing. Prerequisite: Prior
completion of MUSI 1117 and MUSI 1312 with a grade
of “C” or better.
 
  1MUSI 2117 (MUSI 2117) 1 sem. hrs.
AURAL TRAINING IV
Continuation of MUSI 2116; a companion course to MUSI
2312. Prerequisite: Prior completion of MUSI 2116 and
MUSI 2311 with a grade of “C” or better.
 
  3MUSI 2311 (MUSI 2311) 3 sem. hrs.
MUSICIANSHIP III
Continuation of MUSI 1312. A broad summary of
classical and chromatic harmony, explored through
written exercises, analysis, and. correlated keyboard
drill. Prerequisite: Prior completion of MUSI 1312 and
MUSI 1117 with a grade of “C” or better.
 
  3MUSICIANSHIP IV
Continuation of MUSI 2311. An exploration of 20thcentury
techniques through written exercises, analysis,
and correlated keyboard drill. Prerequisite: Prior
completion of MUSI 2311 and MUSI 2116 with a grade
of “C” or better.
 
  3MUSI 3346. 3 sem. hrs.
FORM AND ANALYSIS OF TONAL MUSIC
Analysis of the melodic and harmonic design of tonal
music, including the aural and visual analysis of scores
for piano, voice, chamber ensembles, and orchestra.
Prerequisite: Prior completion of MUSI 2312 and MUSI
2117 with a grade of “C” or better.
 
  3MUSI 4346. 3 sem. hrs.
ORCHESTRATION AND ARRANGING
The compass, timbre, and techniques of arranging and/
or orchestration for instruments and/or voices. Practical
experience in arranging for orchestra, band, and other
instrumental and vocal combinations. Prerequisite: Prior
completion of MUSI 2312 and MUSI 2117 with grades
of “C” or better.
 
   Note:  this seems to fall under theory, but is not counted as theory core by the department, even though it is a required course. 

Music History and Literature
MUSI 1307 (MUSI 1307) 3 sem. hrs.
ELEMENTS OF MUSICAL STYLE
A survey of selected western and non-western musical
styles, based upon the analysis of the characteristic use
of the elements of music. Required for music majors and
recommended for non-majors with a significant high
school music background. Satisfies the university core
curriculum requirement in fine arts.

 
     

Texas A&M University - Kingsville

http://www.tamuk.edu/music/

http://www.tamuk.edu/music/DegreePlans/Degree%20Plans/index.htm

http://www.tamuk.edu/music/student/coursesoffered.html

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

MUSI 1316* (3), 1116* (1), 1317 (3), 1117 (1), 2316 (3), 2116 (1), 2317 (3), 2117 (1), 3312 (3), 4318 (3), 3314 (3) = TOTAL HOURS 21 * MEANS NOT REQUIRED FOR THE DEGREE

 
   1116. Introduction to Basic Aural Training. (MUSI 1116) 1(0-2)
Introduction to aural skills fundamentals including emphasis on melodic, harmonic dictation, and sight-singing of music of various ethnic origins and historical style periods.
 
   1316.  Introduction to Basic Musicianship. 3(3-0)
Introduction to music fundamentals and skills including pitch recognition in various clefs, rhythm competency, basic harmonic construction and recognition, harmonic and melodic usage in various historical style periods
 
  31317. Basic Musicianship. 3(3-0)
Introduction to the fundamental elements of music (e.g. pitch, intensity, duration, and timbre), and their interrelationship as the foundation of tonal harmonic structure. Prerequisite: MUSI 1316 with a grade of C or better or a satisfactory score on the departmental Placement Exam (Music Theory).
 
  11117.  Basic Aural Training.  (MUSI 1117) 1(0-2)
Emphasis on dictation and sight-singing of music of various ethnic origins and historical periods.  Prerequisite:  MUSI 1116 with a grade of C or better, or a satisfactory score on the departmental Placement Exam (Music Theory).
 
  32316-2317.  Intermediate Musicianship.    6(3-0)
Continuation of MUSI 1317.
 
  3  
  12116-2117. Intermediate Aural Training. (MUSI 2116) 2(0-2)
Continuation of MUSI 1117.

 
 
  1  
  33312.  Orchestration.  3(3-0)
A continuation and practical application of elements of Music Theory and Aural Training.  Study of the compass, techniques, and color of the instruments of the orchestra and band, and their combinations.  Projects in scoring in full orchestra, band, and small ensembles.
 
  34318.  Analytical Techniques I.  3(3-0)
Aural and visual analysis techniques in all musical styles.  All elements in music; form, vocal, piano, chamber, and full orchestra scores.
 
  33314.  Composition.  3(3-0)
The practical application of creative principles in analysis and original writing of the smaller forms.  The course will include 18th Century counterpoint:  two, three, and four part writing, canon, fugue, and double counterpoint.  Prerequisites:  MUSI 2316, MUSI 2217.
 
 Total21Only place so far that requires composition 
     

Texas Christian University

www.music.tcu.edu

http://catalog.tcu.edu/undergraduate/1726.htm

http://catalog.tcu.edu/undergraduate/3461.htm

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

Music Theory (20 hours)

MUSI 10201
Elementary Ear Training

MUSI 10203
Elementary Theory

MUSI 10211
Elementary Ear Training

MUSI 10213
Elementary Theory

MUSI 20201
Advanced Ear Training

MUSI 20203
Advanced Theory

MUSI 20211
Advanced Ear Training

MUSI 20213
Advanced Theory

MUSI 30202
Form and Analysis

MUSI 30312
Orchestration

 

 
  1MUSI 10201 - Elementary Ear Training

Melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic dictation; sight-singing
 
 
  3MUSI 10203 - Elementary Theory

Musical notation and definitions, intervals, scales and keys. Emphasis on writing four-voice exercises in major and minor keys using triads and dominant sevenths. Harmonic analysis. Keyboard harmony
 
 
  1MUSI 10211 - Elementary Ear Training

Prerequisite: MUSI 10201. Continuation of MUSI 10201
 
 
  3MUSI 10213 - Elementary Theory

Prerequisite: MUSI 10203. Continuation of MUSI 10203, including study of suspensions and other non-chord tones, the remaining diatonic seventh chords and secondary functions. Harmonic analysis, as well as study of cadences, phrases and periods. Keyboard harmony.
 
 
  1MUSI 20201 - Advanced Ear Training

Prerequisite: MUSI 10211. Increasingly difficult melodic and rhythmic dictation. Harmonic dictation including seventh chords and modulations. Sight-singing of single line, two-voice, and four-voice music
 
 
  3MUSI 20203 - Advanced Theory

Prerequisite: MUSI 10213. Modulatory techniques, simple binary and ternary forms, modal mixture, and chromatic chords. Harmonic analysis and compositional exercises. Keyboard harmony
 
 
  1MUSI 20211 - Advanced Ear Training

Prerequisite: MUSI 20201. Continuation of MUSI 20201
 
 
  3MUSI 20213 - Advanced Theory

Prerequisite: MUSI 20203. Continuation of MUSI 20203, including tonal harmony in the late 19th century and an introduction to 20th century practice. Harmonic analysis and compositional exercises. Keyboard harmony
 
 
  2MUSI 30202 - Form and Analysis

Prerequisites: MUSI 20211, 20213. Structural analysis of simple and compound part forms, rondo, sonata and fugue. Emphasis on the standard designs found in instrumental music from Bach on
 
 
  2MUSI 30312 - Orchestration

Prerequisites: MUSI 20211, 20213. Practical consideration of techniques, capabilities and effective uses of orchestral and band instruments in various combinations. Arranging and scoring
 
 
 Total20  
     

Texas State University - San Marcos

www.finearts.txstate.edu/music

http://www.music.txstate.edu/prospectivestudents/degreeplans/degreemusicstudies.html

http://www.music.txstate.edu/resources/courses/undergradcourses.html

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

Introduction to Music Technology (MU 1150)
Aural Learning I-IV (MU 1210, MU 1212, MU 2260, MU 2262)
Music Theory I-IV (MU 1211, MU 1213, MU 2261, MU 2263)
Survey of Music Literature (MU 2303)
History and Analysis of Music (MU 3315, MU 3316)
 

 
   

1312 Essential Musicianship [this could be the remedial class]

(3-0) Detailed instruction in fundamentals of music theory, including but not limited to notation, meters, scales, key signatures, intervals, and chords. This course is designed primarily for music majors and minors.
 
   

1150 Introduction to Music Technology [required, but I probably won't count it]

(1-0) Introduction to current computer applications in music. Including MIDI and sequencing, notation, internet communication, and digital audio.
 
  1

1210 (MUSI 1216) Aural Learning I

(0-2) The course materials from Music Theory I as applied through lessons in singing, playing, and music dictation. Prerequisite: MU 1312 with a grade of “C” or higher or pass by exam.
 
  3

1211 (MUSI 1211) Music Theory I

(3-0) A comprehensive study of the materials of counterpoint and harmony. The study is made through listening and observation of the literature; lessons in application include activities in musical writing and analysis. Prerequisite: MU 1312 with a grade of “C” or higher or pass by exam.
 
  1

1212 (MUSI 1217) Aural Learning II

(0-2) The course materials from Music Theory II as applied through lessons in singing, playing, and music dictation. Prerequisites: MU 1210, 1211 with a grade of “C” or higher.
 
  3

1213 (MUSI 1212) Music Theory II

(3-0) A comprehensive study of the materials of counterpoint and harmony. The study is made through listening and observation of the literature; lessons in application include activities in musical writing and analysis. Prerequisites: MU 1210, 1211 with a grade of “C” or higher.
 
  1

2260 (MUSI 2216) Aural Learning III

(0-2) The course material from Music Theory III as applied through lessons in singing, playing, and music dictation. Prerequisites: MU 1212, 1213 with a grade of “C” or higher.
 
 
  3

2261 (MUSI 2211) Music Theory III

(3-0) A continuation of the comprehensive approach used in Music Theory I and II, with an emphasis upon traditional forms and harmony using altered chords. Lessons in application include activities in composition and analysis. Prerequisites: MU 1212, 1213, MUSP 1108W with a grade of “C” or higher (or equivalents).
 
 
  1

2262 (MUSI 2217) Aural Learning IV

(0-2) The course materials from Music Theory IV as applied through lessons in singing, playing, and music dictation. Prerequisites: MU 2260, 2261 with a grade of “C” or higher.
 
 
  3

2263 (MUSI 2212) Music Theory IV

(3-0) A continuation of the comprehensive approach used in Music Theory I, II, and III, with an emphasis upon traditional forms and harmony, and twentieth century materials. Lessons in application include activities in composition and analysis. Prerequisites: MU 1150, 2260, 2261, MUSP 1110W with a grade of “C” or higher (or equivalents).
 
 
   

3315, 3316 History and Analysis of Music

(3-0) A comprehensive musicianship approach to the study of music from the earliest times to the present using techniques of stylistic and structural analysis. Prerequisites: MU 2303 or consent of instructor.
[not sure if this should be counted as analysis, or strictly music history]
 
 Total16If music history comprehensive musicianship and music technology are not counted.  They do have regular courses in Form and Analysis and Orchestration, but are not required of music ed majors 
     

Texas Tech University

www.depts.ttu.edu/music

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/officialpublications/catalog/01_curriculum/VPA_MusicProfEd_Vocal.gif

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/officialpublications/courses/MUSI.php

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Cr. hrs.

Description

 

MUTH 1101

Developmental Aural Skills

 

MUTH 1101: Developmental Aural Skills (taken concurrently with  MUTH 1103 if required by results of placement exam) 1101. Developmental Aural Skills (1). For music majors or with consent of instructor. Developmental diction, sight singing, and keyboard skills.

[This is the remedial course]

 

 

MUTH 1103

Elementary Aural Skills I

1

MUTH 1103: Elementary Aural Skills I

In this course, you will develop sightsinging and dictation skills necessary for the performance and teaching of tonal music MUTH 1103 focuses primarily on rhythmic performance, but also includes exercises that drill intervals, scales, triads, and simple melodies. (from linked syllabus)  1103. [MUSI 1116, 1216, 1316] Elementary Aural Skills I (1:0:2). Prerequisite: Placement test; corequisite: MUTH 1303. For music majors or with consent of instructor. Dictation, sight-singing, and keyboard skills.

MUTH 1103: Elementary Aural Skills I

Prerequisites: Concurrent enrollment in MUTH1303 required.

Required Texts:

• Gary S. Karpinski, Manual for Ear Training and Sight Singing. New York: W.

W. Norton & Company, 2007. [Available in the bookstore.]

• Gary S. Karpinski and Richard Kram, Anthology for Sight Singing. New York:

W. W. Norton & Company, 2007. [Available in the bookstore.]

Course Content: In this course, you will develop sightsinging and dictation skills

necessary for the performance and teaching of tonal music. MUTH 1103 focuses

primarily on rhythmic performance, but also includes exercises that drill intervals, scales,

triads, and simple melodies.

Course Purpose: The purpose of the course is to develop a “seeing ear” and a “hearing

eye.” Over the course of the semester, you will develop the ability to translate sound into

notation and vice versa. Sightsinging and dictation skills are of paramount importance to

the aspiring professional musician. Sightsinging improves your ability to sight-read on

your instrument; dictation facilitates error-checking, transcription, and a host of other

activities. MUTH 1103 is required of all music majors, and it lays the groundwork for the

subsequent three semesters of the aural skills sequence. The skills developed in MUTH

1103 are intended to complement the skills being developed concurrently in MUTH 1303.

This course is required of all undergraduate music majors.

Core Curriculum Objective: The objective of the visual and performing arts in a core

curriculum is to expand students' knowledge of the human condition and human cultures,

especially in relation to behaviors, ideas, and values expressed in works of human

imagination and thought. Through study in disciplines such as the visual and performing

arts, students will engage in critical analysis, form aesthetic judgments, and develop an

appreciation for arts as fundamental to the health and survival of any society.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 1103, you will be able to:

• Perform a variety of rhythmic patterns at sight while conducting

• Know and be able to demonstrate basic conducting patterns

• Sing major and minor scales, intervals, and triads using solfege.

• Identify types of intervals, triads and seventh chords by ear

• Notate short melodic and harmonic dictation exercises

• Sing short tonal melodies

• Improvise in a variety of tonal and rhythmic contexts

2

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily sightsinging and dictation quizzes

• Homework assignments

• A variety of in-class activities

• Sightsinging midterm and final exam

Criteria for Grading: Your final grade will be determined as follows:

• Dictation quizzes: 40%

• Homework assignments: 10%

• Sightsinging quizzes: 25%

• Sightsinging final: 15%

• Sightsinging midterm: 10%

An excessive number of missed classes can lower your final grade by as much as one

letter grade. Three unexcused absences will lower your grade by a sign (ex. from a B+ to

a B, from a C- to a D+); five or more unexcused absences will lower your grade by a

letter (ex. from C to D).

Grading scale: 90-100% = A; 80-89% = B; 70-79% = C; 60-69% = D; below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend).

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1

quiz grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup sightsinging quiz; a

student with an unexcused absence should not ask for one. No dictation quizzes will be

made up.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless

arrangements are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises,

students must notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled

exam time. Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no

exceptions to this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

3

ADA Compliance http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.22.pdf

Any student who, because of a disability, may require special arrangements in order to

meet the course requirements should contact the instructor as soon as possible to make

any necessary arrangements. Students should present appropriate verification from

Student Disability Services during the instructor’s office hours. Please note instructors

are not allowed to provide classroom accommodations to a student until appropriate

verification from Student Disability Services has been provided. For additional

information, you may contact the Student Disability Services office at 335 West Hall or

806-742-2405.

Academic Integrity http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.12.pdf

It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a spirit of complete honesty

and high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to present as their own any work

not honestly performed is regarded by the faculty and administration as a most serious

offense and renders the offenders liable to serious consequences, possibly suspension.

“Scholastic dishonesty” includes, but it not limited to, cheating, plagiarism, collusion,

falsifying academic records, misrepresenting facts, and any act designed to give unfair

academic advantage to the student (such as, but not limited to, submission of essentially

the same written assignment for two courses without the prior permission of the

instructor) or the attempt to commit such an act.

a. “Cheating” includes, but is not limited to:

(1) Copying from another student’s test paper;

(2) Using during a test materials not authorized by the person giving the test;

(3) Failing to comply with instructions given by the person administering the test;

(4) Possession during a test of materials that are not authorized by the person giving the

test, such as class notes or specifically designed “crib notes.” The presence of textbooks

constitutes a violation only if they have been specifically prohibited by the person

administering the test.

(5) Using, buying, stealing, transporting, or soliciting in whole or in part the contents of

an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program;

(6) Collaborating with or seeking aid or receiving assistance from another student or

individual during a test or in conjunction with other assignment without authority;

(7) Discussing the contents of an examination with another student who will take the

examination;

(8) Divulging the contents of an examination for the purpose of preserving questions for

use by another when the instructor has designated that the examination is not to be

removed from the examination room or not to be returned to or kept by the student;

(9) Substituting for another person or permitting another person to substitute for oneself

to take a course, a test, or any course-related assignment;

4

(10) Paying or offering money or other valuable thing to or coercing another person to

obtain an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program, or

information about an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer

program;

(11) Falsifying research data, laboratory reports, and/or other academic work offered for

credit; and

(12) Taking, keeping, misplacing, or damaging the property of the university or of another

if the student knows or reasonably should know that an unfair academic advantage would

be gained by such conduct.

b. “Plagiarism” includes, but is not limited to, the appropriation of, buying, receiving as a

gift, or obtaining by any means material that is attributable in whole or in part to another

source, including words, ideas, illustrations, structure, computer code, other expression

and media, and presenting that material as one’s own academic work being offered for

credit.

c. “Collusion” includes, but is not limited to, the unauthorized collaboration with another

person in preparing academic assignments offered for credit or collaboration with another

person to commit a violation of any section of the rules on scholastic dishonesty.

d. “Falsifying academic records” includes, but is not limited to, altering or assisting in the

altering of any official record of the university and/or submitting false information or

omitting requested information that is required for or related to any academic record of

the university. Academic records include, but are not limited to, applications for

admission, the awarding of a degree, grade reports, test papers, registration materials,

grade change forms, and reporting forms used by the Office of the Registrar. A former

student who engages in such conduct is subject to a bar against readmission, revocation of

a degree, and withdrawal of a diploma.

e. “Misrepresenting facts” to the university or an agent of the university includes, but is

not limited to, providing false grades or resumes; providing false or misleading

information in an effort to receive a postponement or an extension on a test, quiz, or other

assignment for the purpose of obtaining an academic or financial benefit for oneself or

another individual; or providing false or misleading information in an effort to injure

another student academically or financially.

Last Day to drop a course: The 45th class day is the last day to drop a course.

Student Absence for Observance of Religious Holy Day

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.19.pdf

"Religious holy day" means a holy day observed by a religion whose places of worship

are exempt from property taxation under Texas Tax Code §11.20.

A student who intends to observe a religious holy day should make that intention known

in writing to the instructor prior to the absence. A student who is absent from classes for

the observance of a religious holy day shall be allowed to take an examination or

complete an assignment scheduled for that day within a reasonable time after the absence.

5

Absence due to officially approved trips – The Texas Tech University Catalog states that

the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed.

Civility in the Classroom

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/CampusCrime/documents/CivilityInTheClassroom.pdf

Students are expected to assist in maintaining a classroom environment that is conducive

to learning. In order to assure that all students have the opportunity to gain from time

spent in class, unless otherwise approved by the instructor, students are prohibited from

engaging in any other form of distraction. Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall

result, minimally, in a request to leave class.

Student Handbook and Code of Conduct

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/publications/2008_2009_Handbook_and_Code.pdf

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with

erasers!) for use in class and for written assignments.

_____________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment (due next class)

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction

sing major scale with solfege

2. Chapters 1-5

sing Warm-Up No. 1, Line 1 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p.12, Exx 2.1-2.4

3. Chapters 1-5

sing Warm-Up No. 1, Line 2 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p. 14, Exx 3.1 and 3.2

4. Chapters 1-5

sing Warm-Up No. 1, Line 3 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p. 20, Exx. 4.1-4.4

5. Chapters 1-5

sing Warm-Up No. 1, Line 4 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p. 23, Exx. 5.1 and 5.2

6. Chapters 6-10

sing Warm-Up No. 2, Line 1 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p. 34, Exx. 7.1 and 7.2

6

7. Chapters 6-10

sing Warm-Up No. 2, Line 2 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p. 38, Exx. 8.1 and 8.2

8. Chapters 6-10

sing Warm-Up No. 2, Line 3 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p. 42, Exx. 9.1 and 9.2

9. Chapters 6-10

sing Warm-Up No. 2, Line 4 (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p. 46, Exx. 10.1 and 10.2

10. Chapters 11-14

sing Anthology, pp. 10-13

dictation: Manual, p. 52, Exx. 11.1 and 11.2

11. Chapters 11-14

sing Anthology, pp. 14-17

dictation: Manual, p. 55, Exx. 12.1 and 12.2

12. Chapters 11-14

sing Anthology, pp. 18-21

dictation: Manual, p. 63, Exx. 14.1 and 14.2

13. Chapters 11-14

14. Sightsinging Midterm Exam

15. Chapters 15 and 16

sing Anthology, pp. 22-23

dictation: Manual, p. 67, All

16. Chapters 15 and 16

sing Anthology, pp. 24-25

dictation: Manual, p. 73, Exx. 16.1 and 16.2

17. Chapters 15 and 16 sing Anthology, pp. 26-27

dictation: Manual, p. 73, Exx. 16.3 and 16.4

18. Chapter 17: Minor Keys

sing melodic and harmonic minor scales

dictation: Manual, p. 81, 17.1 and 17.2

19. Chapter 17: Minor Keys

sing 1st half of Warm-Up No. 1 in minor

dictation: Manual, p. 81, 17.3 and 17.4

20. Chapter 17: Minor Keys

sing 2nd half of Warm-Up No. 1 in minor

dictation: Manual, p. 81, 17.5 and 17.6

21. Chapter 17: Minor Keys

sing Anthology, pp. 30-33

22. Chapter 18: Chromatic Lower Neighbors

sing Anthology, pp. 34-35

dictation: Manual, p. 84

23. Chapter 18: Chromatic Lower Neighbors

sing Anthology, p. 36

dictation: Manual, p. 84

24. Chapters 19: More About the Minor Mode

sing 1st half of Warm-Up No. 2 in minor

dictation: Manual, p. 90, 19.1 and 19.2

25. Chapters 19: More About the Minor Mode

sing 2nd half of Warm-Up No. 2 in minor

dictation: Manual, p. 90, 19.3 and 19.4

26. Chapters 19: More About the Minor Mode

sing Anthology, pp. 37-38

dictation: Manual, p. 90, 19.5-19.6

27. Chapters 19: More About the Minor Mode

sing Anthology, pp. 39-40

28. review Practice!

29. Sightsinging Final Exam

 

 

MUTH 1104

Elementary Aural Skills II

1

MUTH 1104: Elementary Aural Skills II     

In this course, you will develop sightsinging and dictation skills necessary for the performance and teaching of tonal music.  MUTH 1104 focuses primiarily on melodic performance, melodic and harmonic dictation. (from linked syllabus)  1104. [MUSI 1117, 1217, 1317] Elementary Aural Skills II (1:0:2). Prerequisite: Completion of MUTH 1303 and 1103 with a grade of C or better, or equivalent. Corequisite: MUTH 1304. Dictation, sight-singing, and keyboard skills.

MUTH 1104: Elementary Aural Skills II

Prerequisites: Completion of MUTH1103 and MUTH1303 with a C or better, or

equivalent. Concurrent enrollment in MUTH1304 required.

Required Texts:

• Gary S. Karpinski, Manual for Ear Training and Sight Singing. New York: W.

W. Norton & Company, 2007. [Available in the bookstore.]

• Gary S. Karpinski and Richard Kram, Anthology for Sight Singing. New York:

W. W. Norton & Company, 2007. [Available in the bookstore.]

Course Content: In this course, you will develop sightsinging and dictation skills

necessary for the performance and teaching of tonal music. MUTH 1104 focuses

primarily on melodic performance, melodic and harmonic dictation.

Course Purpose: The purpose of the course is to develop a “seeing ear” and a “hearing

eye.” Over the course of the semester, you will develop the ability to translate sound into

notation and vice versa. Sightsinging and dictation skills are of paramount importance to

the aspiring professional musician. Sightsinging improves your ability to sight-read on

your instrument; dictation facilitates error-checking, transcription, and a host of other

activities. MUTH 1104 is required of all music majors, and it lays the groundwork for the

subsequent two semesters of the aural skills sequence. The skills developed in MUTH

1104 are intended to complement the skills being developed concurrently in MUTH

1304. This course is required of all undergraduate music majors.

Core Curriculum Objective: The objective of the visual and performing arts in a core

curriculum is to expand students' knowledge of the human condition and human cultures,

especially in relation to behaviors, ideas, and values expressed in works of human

imagination and thought. Through study in disciplines such as the visual and performing

arts, students will engage in critical analysis, form aesthetic judgments, and develop an

appreciation for arts as fundamental to the health and survival of any society.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 1104, you will be able to:

• Perform a variety of rhythmic patterns at sight while conducting

• Know and be able to demonstrate basic conducting patterns

• Sing major and minor scales, intervals, and triads using solfege.

• Identify types of intervals, triads and seventh chords by ear

• Notate short melodic and harmonic dictation exercises

• Sing short tonal melodies

• Improvise in a variety of tonal and rhythmic contexts

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily sightsinging and dictation quizzes

• Homework assignments

• A variety of in-class activities

• Sightsinging midterm and final exam

Criteria for Grading: Your final grade will be determined as follows:

• Dictation quizzes: 40%

• Homework assignments: 10%

• Sightsinging quizzes: : 25%

• Sightsinging final: 15%

• Sightsinging midterm: 10%

An excessive number of missed classes can lower your final grade by as much as one

letter grade. Three unexcused absences will lower your grade by a sign (ex. from a B+ to

a B, from a C- to a D+); five or more unexcused absences will lower your grade by a

letter (ex. from C to D).

Grading scale: 90-100% = A; 80-89% = B; 70-79% = C; 60-69% = D; below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend). Homework assignments and Sight

singing quizzes missed due to an excused absence must be turned in no later than one

week from the date of the students return to class. It is the students responsibility to turn

in the missed homework within that time period or a grade of 0 will be given. It is also

the students responsibility to schedule a time with the instructor to make up the sight

singing exam within the allotted time or a grade of 0 will be given. Missed dictation

quizzes will not be made up.

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1

quiz grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup sightsinging quiz; a

student with an unexcused absence should not ask for one. No dictation quizzes will be

made up.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless

arrangements are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises,

students must notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled

exam time. Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no

exceptions to this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

ADA Compliance http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.22.pdf

Any student who, because of a disability, may require special arrangements in order to

meet the course requirements should contact the instructor as soon as possible to make

any necessary arrangements. Students should present appropriate verification from

Student Disability Services during the instructor’s office hours. Please note instructors

are not allowed to provide classroom accommodations to a student until appropriate

verification from Student Disability Services has been provided. For additional

information, you may contact the Student Disability Services office at 335 West Hall or

806-742-2405.

Academic Integrity http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.12.pdf

It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a spirit of complete honesty

and high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to present as their own any work

not honestly performed is regarded by the faculty and administration as a most serious

offense and renders the offenders liable to serious consequences, possibly suspension.

“Scholastic dishonesty” includes, but it not limited to, cheating, plagiarism, collusion,

falsifying academic records, misrepresenting facts, and any act designed to give unfair

academic advantage to the student (such as, but not limited to, submission of essentially

the same written assignment for two courses without the prior permission of the

instructor) or the attempt to commit such an act.

a. “Cheating” includes, but is not limited to:

(1) Copying from another student’s test paper;

(2) Using during a test materials not authorized by the person giving the test;

(3) Failing to comply with instructions given by the person administering the test;

(4) Possession during a test of materials that are not authorized by the person giving the

test, such as class notes or specifically designed “crib notes.” The presence of textbooks

constitutes a violation only if they have been specifically prohibited by the person

administering the test.

(5) Using, buying, stealing, transporting, or soliciting in whole or in part the contents of

an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program;

(6) Collaborating with or seeking aid or receiving assistance from another student or

individual during a test or in conjunction with other assignment without authority;

(7) Discussing the contents of an examination with another student who will take the

examination;

(8) Divulging the contents of an examination for the purpose of preserving questions for

use by another when the instructor has designated that the examination is not to be

removed from the examination room or not to be returned to or kept by the student;

(9) Substituting for another person or permitting another person to substitute for oneself

to take a course, a test, or any course-related assignment;

(10) Paying or offering money or other valuable thing to or coercing another person to

obtain an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program, or

information about an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer

program;

(11) Falsifying research data, laboratory reports, and/or other academic work offered for

credit; and

(12) Taking, keeping, misplacing, or damaging the property of the university or of

another if the student knows or reasonably should know that an unfair academic

advantage would be gained by such conduct.

b. “Plagiarism” includes, but is not limited to, the appropriation of, buying, receiving as a

gift, or obtaining by any means material that is attributable in whole or in part to another

source, including words, ideas, illustrations, structure, computer code, other expression

and media, and presenting that material as one’s own academic work being offered for

credit.

c. “Collusion” includes, but is not limited to, the unauthorized collaboration with another

person in preparing academic assignments offered for credit or collaboration with another

person to commit a violation of any section of the rules on scholastic dishonesty.

d. “Falsifying academic records” includes, but is not limited to, altering or assisting in the

altering of any official record of the university and/or submitting false information or

omitting requested information that is required for or related to any academic record of

the university. Academic records include, but are not limited to, applications for

admission, the awarding of a degree, grade reports, test papers, registration materials,

grade change forms, and reporting forms used by the Office of the Registrar. A former

student who engages in such conduct is subject to a bar against readmission, revocation

of a degree, and withdrawal of a diploma.

e. “Misrepresenting facts” to the university or an agent of the university includes, but is

not limited to, providing false grades or resumes; providing false or misleading

information in an effort to receive a postponement or an extension on a test, quiz, or other

assignment for the purpose of obtaining an academic or financial benefit for oneself or

another individual; or providing false or misleading information in an effort to injure

another student academically or financially.

Last Day to drop a course: The 45th class day is the last day to drop a course.

Student Absence for Observance of Religious Holy Day

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.19.pdf

"Religious holy day" means a holy day observed by a religion whose places of worship

are exempt from property taxation under Texas Tax Code §11.20.

A student who intends to observe a religious holy day should make that intention known

in writing to the instructor prior to the absence. A student who is absent from classes for

the observance of a religious holy day shall be allowed to take an examination or

complete an assignment scheduled for that day within a reasonable time after the absence.

Absence due to officially approved trips – The Texas Tech University Catalog states that

the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed.

Civility in the Classroom

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/CampusCrime/documents/CivilityInTheClassroom.pdf

Students are expected to assist in maintaining a classroom environment that is conducive

to learning. In order to assure that all students have the opportunity to gain from time

spent in class, unless otherwise approved by the instructor, students are prohibited from

engaging in any other form of distraction. Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall

result, minimally, in a request to leave class.

Student Handbook and Code of Conduct

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/publications/2008_2009_Handbook_and_Code.pdf

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness: Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with erasers!)

for use in class and for written assignments.

________________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment Due

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction; Chapters 20 and 21

2. Chapters 20 and 21 sing Anthology, pp. 41-42

dictation: Manual, p. 93, exx. 20.1 and 20.2

3. Chapters 22 and 25 sing Anthology, pp. 50-51

dictation: Manual, pp. 96-97, exx. 21.1 and 21.2

4. Chapters 22 and 25 sing Anthology, pp. 62-63

dictation: Manual, p. 101, exx. 22.1 and 22.2

5. Chapter 26: The C Clefs sing Anthology, pp. 66-67

dictation: Manual, p. 118, exx. 25.1 and 25.2

6. Chapter 26: The C Clefs sing Anthology, pp. 68-69

dictation: Manual, p. 121, exx. 26.1 and 26.2

7. Chapters 27 and 28 sing Anthology, pp. 74-75

dictation: Manual, p. 121, exx. 26.3 and 26.4

8. Chapters 27 and 28 sing Anthology, pp. 80-81

dictation: Manual, p. 124, exx. 27.1 and 27.2

9. Chapters 30 and 31 sing Anthology, pp. 90-91

dictation: Manual, pp. 128-129 , exx. 28.1 and 28.2

10. Chapters 30 and 31 sing Anthology, pp. 100-101

dictation: Manual, p. 136, exx. 30.1 and 30.2

11. Chapters 32 and 34 sing Anthology, pp. 106-107

dictation: Manual, p. 139, exx. 31.1 and 31.2

12. Chapters 32 and 34 sing Anthology, pp. 110-111

dictation: Manual, p. 143, exx. 32.1 and 32.2

13. Midterm Exam

14. Chapter 34 dictation: Manual, p. 151, exx. 34.1 and 34.2

15. Chapters 35 and 36 sing Warm-Up No. 2 in major (memorized)

dictation: Manual, p.154, exx. 36.1 and 36.2

16. Chapters 37 and 38 sing Anthology, pp. 117-118

dictation: Manual, p.156, exx. 36.3 and 36.4

17. Chapters 37 and 38 sing Anthology, pp. 120-121

dictation: Manual, p.160, exx. 37.1 and 37.2

18. Chapters 39 and 40 sing Anthology, pp. 122-123

dictation: Manual, pp. 165-166, All

19. Chapters 39 and 40 sing Anthology, pp. 126-127

dictation: Manual, p. 171, exx. 40.6 and 40.7

20. Chapters 41 and 42 sing Anthology, pp. 128-129

dictation: Manual, p. 171, exx. 41.5 and 41.6

21. Chapters 41 and 42 sing Anthology, pp. 136-137

dictation: Manual, p. 175, exx. 41.7 and 41.8

22. Chapters 43 and 44 sing Anthology, pp. 148-149

dictation: Manual, p. 179, exx. 42.5 and 42.6

23. Chapters 43 and 44 sing Anthology, pp. 156-157

dictation: Manual, p. 183, exx. 43.5 and 43.10

24. Chapters 45 and 46 sing Manual, p. 187, no. 2

dictation: Manual, p. 188, exx. 44.1 and 44.2

25. Chapters 45 and 46 sing handout, lines 1-4

dictation: Manual, p. 193, exx. 46..1 and 46.2

26. review sing handout, lines 1-4

dictation: Manual, p. 198, exx. 47.1 and 47.2

27. review sing handout, lines 5-7

dictation: Mnaual, p. 203, exx. 47.3 and 47.4

28. review

29. Final Exam (April 28th, by individual appointment)

 

 

MUTH 1303

Elementary Music Theory I

3

MUTH 1303: Elementary Music Theory I   1303. [MUSI 1311] Elementary Music Theory I (3:3:0). Prerequisite: Placement test; corequisite: MUTH 1103. For music majors or with consent of instructor. Melody, rhythm, and diatonic harmony.

MUTH 1303: Elementary Music Theory I

Corequisites: Concurrent enrollment in MUTH1103 required.

Required Text:

• Kostka, Stefan & Dorothy Payne. Tonal Harmony with an Introduction to

Twentieth-Century Music, 6th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2008. [BUY BOTH

THE TEXTBOOK AND THE WORKBOOK; both are available in the

bookstore.]

• Course Packet for MUTH 1303 [Available at CopyTech]

Course Content: This course introduces basic theoretical concepts dealing with commonpractice

melody, harmony, and voice leading, and demonstrates their analytical and

compositional uses.

Course Purpose: The purpose of this course is to enable you to read, write, and

comprehend the fundamental elements of common-practice harmony. These skills are

essential to the aspiring performer, composer, and teacher. MUTH 1303 lays the

groundwork for the subsequent three semesters in the harmony sequence. The skills

acquired in MUTH 1303 are intended to complement the skills being developed

concurrently in MUTH 1103. This course is required of all undergraduate music majors.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of this course, you should be able to:

• Read music in treble, bass, alto, and tenor clefs.

• Identify and write scales, key signatures, intervals, triads, and seventh chords

• Compose short pieces in first- and second-species counterpoint

• Understand the fundamentals of partwriting and be able to write simple four-part

exercises using root-position triads

• Understand the fundamentals of harmonic function and progression

• Demonstrate any of the above on the piano

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily written quizzes

• Homework assignments

• A variety of in-class activities

• Midterm and final examinations

Criteria for Grading: Students are responsible for all material covered in class and

assigned for homework. Grading will be weighted as follows:

• Assignments and Quizzes = 50%

• Midterm = 25%

• Final = 25%

Grading Scale: 90-100% = A, 80-89 = B, 70-79 = C, 60-69 = D, below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend).

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1 quiz

grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup quiz; a student with an

unexcused absence should not ask for one.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless arrangements

are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises, students must

notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled exam time.

Messages left at the SOM are dated and timed. There will be no exceptions to this exam

policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

ADA Compliance http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.22.pdf

Any student who, because of a disability, may require special arrangements in order to

meet the course requirements should contact the instructor as soon as possible to make

any necessary arrangements. Students should present appropriate verification from

Student Disability Services during the instructor’s office hours. Please note instructors

are not allowed to provide classroom accommodations to a student until appropriate

verification from Student Disability Services has been provided. For additional

information, you may contact the Student Disability Services office at 335 West Hall or

806-742-2405.

Academic Integrity http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.12.pdf

It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a spirit of complete honesty

and high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to present as their own any work

not honestly performed is regarded by the faculty and administration as a most serious

offense and renders the offenders liable to serious consequences, possibly suspension.

“Scholastic dishonesty” includes, but it not limited to, cheating, plagiarism, collusion,

falsifying academic records, misrepresenting facts, and any act designed to give unfair

academic advantage to the student (such as, but not limited to, submission of essentially

the same written assignment for two courses without the prior permission of the

instructor) or the attempt to commit such an act.

a. “Cheating” includes, but is not limited to:

(1) Copying from another student’s test paper;

(2) Using during a test materials not authorized by the person giving the test;

(3) Failing to comply with instructions given by the person administering the test;

(4) Possession during a test of materials that are not authorized by the person giving the

test, such as class notes or specifically designed “crib notes.” The presence of textbooks

constitutes a violation only if they have been specifically prohibited by the person

administering the test.

(5) Using, buying, stealing, transporting, or soliciting in whole or in part the contents of

an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program;

(6) Collaborating with or seeking aid or receiving assistance from another student or

individual during a test or in conjunction with other assignment without authority;

(7) Discussing the contents of an examination with another student who will take the

examination;

(8) Divulging the contents of an examination for the purpose of preserving questions for

use by another when the instructor has designated that the examination is not to be

removed from the examination room or not to be returned to or kept by the student;

(9) Substituting for another person or permitting another person to substitute for oneself

to take a course, a test, or any course-related assignment;

(10) Paying or offering money or other valuable thing to or coercing another person to

obtain an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program, or

information about an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer

program;

(11) Falsifying research data, laboratory reports, and/or other academic work offered for

credit; and

(12) Taking, keeping, misplacing, or damaging the property of the university or of another

if the student knows or reasonably should know that an unfair academic advantage would

be gained by such conduct.

b. “Plagiarism” includes, but is not limited to, the appropriation of, buying, receiving as a

gift, or obtaining by any means material that is attributable in whole or in part to another

source, including words, ideas, illustrations, structure, computer code, other expression

and media, and presenting that material as one’s own academic work being offered for

credit.

c. “Collusion” includes, but is not limited to, the unauthorized collaboration with another

person in preparing academic assignments offered for credit or collaboration with another

person to commit a violation of any section of the rules on scholastic dishonesty.

d. “Falsifying academic records” includes, but is not limited to, altering or assisting in the

altering of any official record of the university and/or submitting false information or

omitting requested information that is required for or related to any academic record of

the university. Academic records include, but are not limited to, applications for

admission, the awarding of a degree, grade reports, test papers, registration materials,

grade change forms, and reporting forms used by the Office of the Registrar. A former

student who engages in such conduct is subject to a bar against readmission, revocation of

a degree, and withdrawal of a diploma.

e. “Misrepresenting facts” to the university or an agent of the university includes, but is

not limited to, providing false grades or resumes; providing false or misleading

information in an effort to receive a postponement or an extension on a test, quiz, or other

assignment for the purpose of obtaining an academic or financial benefit for oneself or

another individual; or providing false or misleading information in an effort to injure

another student academically or financially.

Last Day to drop a course: The 45th class day is the last day to drop a course.

Student Absence for Observance of Religious Holy Day

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.19.pdf

"Religious holy day" means a holy day observed by a religion whose places of worship

are exempt from property taxation under Texas Tax Code §11.20.

A student who intends to observe a religious holy day should make that intention known

in writing to the instructor prior to the absence. A student who is absent from classes for

the observance of a religious holy day shall be allowed to take an examination or

complete an assignment scheduled for that day within a reasonable time after the absence.

Absence due to officially approved trips – The Texas Tech University Catalog states that

the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed.

Civility in the Classroom

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/CampusCrime/documents/CivilityInTheClassroom.pdf

Students are expected to assist in maintaining a classroom environment that is conducive

to learning. In order to assure that all students have the opportunity to gain from time

spent in class, unless otherwise approved by the instructor, students are prohibited from

engaging in any other form of distraction. Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall

result, minimally, in a request to leave class.

Student Handbook and Code of Conduct

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/publications/2008_2009_Handbook_and_Code.pdf

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness: Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with erasers!)

for use in class and for written assignments.

Abbreviations KP = Kostka/Payne (textbook); WB = workbook

______________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment Due

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction, Keyboard, Clefs

2. Scales and Key Signatures written: WB, Exx. 1-1 and 1-2

3. Intervals written: WB, Ex. 1-3

4. Intervals, Consonance and Dissonance written: WB, Exx. 1-4 and 1-5

5. Meter written: WB, Ex. 1-6

6. Meter written: WB, Ex. 2-1

7. Triads and Seventh Chords written: WB, Ex. 2-4; reading: KP, pp. 41-57

8. Triads and Seventh Chords written: TBA

9. Inversion and Figured Bass written: WB, Ex. 3-1 and 3-2

10. Inversion and Figured Bass written: WB, Exx. 3-3

11. Diatonic Chords in Major and Minor Keys written: WB, Ex. 3-4; reading: KP, pp. 59-70

12. Diatonic Chords in Major and Minor Keys written: WB, Ex. 4-1

13. Cantus Firmus written: WB, Ex. 4-2

14. Counterpoint: First Species written: compose two cantus firmi

15. Counterpoint: First Species written: compose two cantus firmi

16. Counterpoint: First Species written: Counterpoint Assignment 1

17. Counterpoint: First Species written: Counterpoint Assignment 2

18. Counterpoint: First Species written: Counterpoint Assignment 3

19. Review written: Counterpoint Assignment 4

20. Midterm Exam

21. Principles of Voice Leading reading: KP, pp. 71-84

22. Principles of Voice Leading written: WB, Ex. 5-2

23. Principles of Voice Leading written: WB, Ex. 5-3

24. Root Position Part Writing reading: KP, pp. 88-102

25. Root Position Part Writing written: WB, Ex. 6-1

26. Root Position Part Writing written: WB, Ex. 6-2

27. Root Position Part Writing written: WB, Ex. 6-3

28. Root Position Part Writing written: WB, Ex. 6-4, pp. 47-48

29. Writing for Transposing Instruments written: WB, Ex. 6-4, pp. 49-50

30. Writing for Transposing Instruments written: WB, Ex. 6-5, pp. 51-52

31. Writing for Transposing Instruments written: WB, Ex. 6-5, pp. 53-54

32. Harmonic Progression written: handout; reading: KP, pp. 103-122

33. Harmonic Progression written: WB, Ex. 7-1, pp. 55-56

34. Harmonic Progression written: WB, Ex. 7-1, pp. 57-58

35. Counterpoint: Second Species written: WB, Ex. 7-1, pp. 59-60

36. Counterpoint: Second Species written: Counterpoint Assignment 5

37. Counterpoint: Second Species written: Counterpoint Assignment 6

38. Counterpoint: Second Species written: Counterpoint Assignment 7

39. Counterpoint: Second Species written: Counterpoint Assignment 8

40. Review written: TBA

Written Final Exam: December 9th, 4:30-7:00 pm in M122

 

 

MUTH 1304

Elementary Music Theory II

3

MUTH 1304: Elementary Music Theory II

1304. [MUSI 1312] Elementary Music Theory II (3:3:0). Prerequisite: Completion of MUTH 1303 and 1103 with a grade of C or better, or equivalent. Corequisite: MUTH 1104. Melody, rhythm, and diatonic harmony.
 

MUTH 1304: Elementary Music Theory II

Prerequisites: Concurrent enrollment in MUTH1104 required.

Required Text:

• Kostka, Stefan & Dorothy Payne. Tonal Harmony with an Introduction to

Twentieth-Century Music, 6th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2008. [BUY BOTH

THE TEXTBOOK AND THE WORKBOOK; both are available in the

bookstore.]

Course Content: This course will help you develop a deeper understanding of basic

theoretical concepts dealing with common-practice melody, harmony, and voice leading,

and will enable you to demonstrate their analytical and compositional uses.

Course Purpose: This course expands upon the materials presented in MUTH 1303.

Fundamentals of harmony, melody, and voice leading are examined through a variety of

compositional and analytical exercises. These skills are essential to the aspiring

performer, composer, and teacher, as they provide a deeper understanding of how music

is organized. MUTH 1304 lays the groundwork for the subsequent two semesters in the

harmony sequence. The skills acquired in MUTH 1304 are intended to complement the

skills being developed concurrently in MUTH 1104. This course is required of all

undergraduate music majors.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 1304, you should be able

to:

• Compose short pieces in third and fourth-species counterpoint

• Compose three and four-part exercises using all diatonic triads and seventh chords

in all inversions

• Realize a figured bass that includes all diatonic triads and seventh chords

• Identify the most common types of cadences, phrases, and periods and compose

simple examples of each

• Identify the most common types of non-chord tones and include them in

composition exercises

• Demonstrate any of the above on the piano

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily written quizzes

• Homework assignments

• A variety of in-class activities

• Midterm and final examinations

Criteria for Grading: Students are responsible for all material covered in class and

assigned for homework. Grading will be weighted as follows:

• Assignments and Quizzes = 40%

• Midterm = 20%

• Final = 40%

Grading Scale: 90-100% = A, 80-89 = B, 70-79 = C, 60-69 = D, below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend).

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1 quiz

grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup quiz; a student with an

unexcused absence should not ask for one.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless arrangements

are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises, students must

notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled exam time.

Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no exceptions to

this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

ADA Compliance http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.22.pdf

Any student who, because of a disability, may require special arrangements in order to

meet the course requirements should contact the instructor as soon as possible to make

any necessary arrangements. Students should present appropriate verification from

Student Disability Services during the instructor’s office hours. Please note instructors

are not allowed to provide classroom accommodations to a student until appropriate

verification from Student Disability Services has been provided. For additional

information, you may contact the Student Disability Services office at 335 West Hall or

806-742-2405.

Academic Integrity http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.12.pdf

It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a spirit of complete honesty

and high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to present as their own any work

not honestly performed is regarded by the faculty and administration as a most serious

offense and renders the offenders liable to serious consequences, possibly suspension.

“Scholastic dishonesty” includes, but it not limited to, cheating, plagiarism, collusion,

falsifying academic records, misrepresenting facts, and any act designed to give unfair

academic advantage to the student (such as, but not limited to, submission of essentially

the same written assignment for two courses without the prior permission of the

instructor) or the attempt to commit such an act.

a. “Cheating” includes, but is not limited to:

(1) Copying from another student’s test paper;

(2) Using during a test materials not authorized by the person giving the test;

(3) Failing to comply with instructions given by the person administering the test;

(4) Possession during a test of materials that are not authorized by the person giving the

test, such as class notes or specifically designed “crib notes.” The presence of textbooks

constitutes a violation only if they have been specifically prohibited by the person

administering the test.

(5) Using, buying, stealing, transporting, or soliciting in whole or in part the contents of

an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program;

(6) Collaborating with or seeking aid or receiving assistance from another student or

individual during a test or in conjunction with other assignment without authority;

(7) Discussing the contents of an examination with another student who will take the

examination;

(8) Divulging the contents of an examination for the purpose of preserving questions for

use by another when the instructor has designated that the examination is not to be

removed from the examination room or not to be returned to or kept by the student;

(9) Substituting for another person or permitting another person to substitute for oneself

to take a course, a test, or any course-related assignment;

(10) Paying or offering money or other valuable thing to or coercing another person to

obtain an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program, or

information about an unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer

program;

(11) Falsifying research data, laboratory reports, and/or other academic work offered for

credit; and

(12) Taking, keeping, misplacing, or damaging the property of the university or of another

if the student knows or reasonably should know that an unfair academic advantage would

be gained by such conduct.

b. “Plagiarism” includes, but is not limited to, the appropriation of, buying, receiving as a

gift, or obtaining by any means material that is attributable in whole or in part to another

source, including words, ideas, illustrations, structure, computer code, other expression

and media, and presenting that material as one’s own academic work being offered for

credit.

c. “Collusion” includes, but is not limited to, the unauthorized collaboration with another

person in preparing academic assignments offered for credit or collaboration with another

person to commit a violation of any section of the rules on scholastic dishonesty.

d. “Falsifying academic records” includes, but is not limited to, altering or assisting in the

altering of any official record of the university and/or submitting false information or

omitting requested information that is required for or related to any academic record of

the university. Academic records include, but are not limited to, applications for

admission, the awarding of a degree, grade reports, test papers, registration materials,

grade change forms, and reporting forms used by the Office of the Registrar. A former

student who engages in such conduct is subject to a bar against readmission, revocation of

a degree, and withdrawal of a diploma.

e. “Misrepresenting facts” to the university or an agent of the university includes, but is

not limited to, providing false grades or resumes; providing false or misleading

information in an effort to receive a postponement or an extension on a test, quiz, or other

assignment for the purpose of obtaining an academic or financial benefit for oneself or

another individual; or providing false or misleading information in an effort to injure

another student academically or financially.

Last Day to drop a course: The 45th class day is the last day to drop a course.

Student Absence for Observance of Religious Holy Day

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.19.pdf

"Religious holy day" means a holy day observed by a religion whose places of worship

are exempt from property taxation under Texas Tax Code §11.20.

A student who intends to observe a religious holy day should make that intention known

in writing to the instructor prior to the absence. A student who is absent from classes for

the observance of a religious holy day shall be allowed to take an examination or

complete an assignment scheduled for that day within a reasonable time after the absence.

Absence due to officially approved trips – The Texas Tech University Catalog states that

the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed.

Civility in the Classroom

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/CampusCrime/documents/CivilityInTheClassroom.pdf

Students are expected to assist in maintaining a classroom environment that is conducive

to learning. In order to assure that all students have the opportunity to gain from time

spent in class, unless otherwise approved by the instructor, students are prohibited from

engaging in any other form of distraction. Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall

result, minimally, in a request to leave class.

Student Handbook and Code of Conduct

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/publications/2008_2009_Handbook_and_Code.pdf

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness: Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with erasers!)

for use in class and for written assignments.

Abbreviations KP = Kostka/Payne (textbook); WB = workbook

________________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment Due

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction/Third-Species Counterpoint

2. Third-Species Counterpoint written: Counterpoint Assignment 9

3. Third-Species Counterpoint written: Counterpoint Assignment 10 (to turn in)

4. Third-Species Counterpoint written: Counterpoint Assignment 11

5. Fourth-Species Counterpoint written: Counterpoint Assignment 12 (to turn in)

6. Fourth-Species Counterpoint written: Counterpoint Assignment 13

7. Fourth-Species Counterpoint written: Counterpoint Assignment 14 (to turn in)

8. Fourth-Species Counterpoint written: Counterpoint Assignment 15

9. Triads in First Inversion written: Counterpoint Assignment 16 (to turn in)

10. Triads in First Inversion written: WB, pp. 61-62; reading: KP, pp. 123-142

11. Triads in First Inversion written: WB, p. 63 (to turn in)

12. Triads in First Inversion written: WB, pp. 65-66

13. Triads in First Inversion written: WB, pp. 67-68 (to turn in)

14. Triads in Second Inversion written: WB, p. 69; reading: KP, pp. 143-154

15. Triads in Second Inversion written: WB, pp. 71-72 (to turn in)

16. Triads in Second Inversion written: WB, pp. 73-74

17. Triads in Second Inversion written: WB, pp. 75-76 (to turn in)

18. Review written: WB, p. 77

19. Midterm Exam

20. Cadences, Phrases, and Periods reading: KP, pp. 155-180

21. Cadences, Phrases, and Periods written: WB, pp. 79-80

22. Cadences, Phrases, and Periods written: WB, pp. 81-84 (to turn in)

23. Non-Chord Tones 1 written: WB, pp. 85-86; reading: KP, pp. 181-195

24. Non-Chord Tones 1 written: WB, pp. 87-88

25. Non-Chord Tones 1 written: WB, pp. 89-90 (to turn in)

26. Non-Chord Tones 2 written: WB, pp. 91-92; reading: KP, pp. 197-208

27. Non-Chord Tones 2 written: WB, pp. 93-94

28. Non-Chord Tones 2 written: WB, pp. 95-96 (to turn in)

29. The V7 Chord written: WB, pp. 97; reading: KP, pp. 211-228

30. The V7 Chord written: WB, pp. 99-100

31. The V7 Chord written: WB, pp. 101-102 (to turn in)

32. The V7 Chord written: WB, pp. 103-104

33. The V7 Chord written: WB, pp. 107-109 (to turn in)

34. The II7 and VII7 Chords written: WB, pp. 111-114; reading: KP, pp. 229-242

35. The II7 and VII7 Chords written: WB, pp. 117-118

36. The II7 and VII7 Chords written: WB, pp. 119-122 (to turn in)

37. Other Diatonic Seventh Chords written: WB, pp. 123-124; reading: KP, pp. 243-256

38. Other Diatonic Seventh Chords written: WB, pp. 125-126

39. Other Diatonic Seventh Chords written: WB, pp. 127-130 (to turn in)

40. Review written: TBA

Written Final Exam: see http://www.depts.ttu.edu/officialpublications/ClassSchedule/FinalExams.php

 

MUTH 2103

Intermediate Aural Skills I

1

MUTH 2103: Intermediate Aural Skills I   2103. [MUSI 2116, 2216] Intermediate Aural Skills I (1:0:2). Prerequisite: Completion of MUTH 1304 and 1104 with a grade of C or better, or equivalent. Corequisite: MUTH 2303. Dictation, sight-singing, and keyboard skills.

MUTH 2103: Intermediate Aural Skills I

Prerequisites: Completion of MUAP1124, MUTH1104, and 1304 with a C or better, or

equivalent. Concurrent enrollment in MUAP2123 and MUTH2303 required.

Required Texts:

• Robert Ottman, Music for Sight Singing, 6th ed. Upper Saddle River, NY:

Prentice Hall Inc., 2003. [Available in the bookstore.]

MacGamut 2003 User Disk [Available in the bookstore.]

Course Content: In this course, you will develop sightsinging and dictation skills

necessary for the performance and teaching of tonal music. MUTH 2103 focuses

primarily on the introduction of chromaticism in harmonic and melodic contexts.

Course Purpose: The purpose of the course is to develop a “seeing ear” and a “hearing

eye.” Over the course of the semester, you will develop the ability to translate sound into

notation and vice versa. Sightsinging and dictation skills are of paramount importance to

the aspiring professional musician. Sightsinging improves your ability to sight-read on

your instrument; dictation facilitates error-checking, transcription, and a host of other

activities. MUTH 2103 is required of all music majors, and it lays the groundwork for the

subsequent semester of the aural skills sequence. The skills developed in MUTH 2103

are intended to complement the skills being developed concurrently in MUTH 2303. This

course is required of all undergraduate music majors.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 2103, you will be able to:

• Perform a variety of rhythmic patterns at sight while conducting

• Know and be able to demonstrate basic conducting patterns

• Sing major and minor scales, intervals, and triads using solfege.

• Identify aurally size and quality of intervals, and quality of triads and seventh

chords

• Notate short melodic and harmonic dictation exercises, some of which modulate

• Sing short tonal melodies that feature increased chromaticism

• Improvise in a variety of tonal and rhythmic contexts

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily sightsinging and dictation quizzes

• MacGamut ear-training software (see below)

• A variety of in-class activities

• Sightsinging midterm and final exam

Criteria for Grading: Your final grade will be determined as follows:

• Dictation quizzes: 40%

• Sightsinging quizzes and homework assignments: 25%

• Sightsinging final: 15%

• Sightsinging midterm: 10%

• MacGamut: 10%

An excessive number of missed classes can lower your final grade by as much as one

letter grade. Three unexcused absences will lower your grade by a sign (ex. from a B+ to

a B, from a C- to a D+); five or more unexcused absences will lower your grade by a

letter (ex. from C to D).

Grading scale: 90-100% = A; 80-89% = B; 70-79% = C; 60-69% = D; below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend).

MacGamut: MacGamut software is designed to develop the aural skills of the student,

while at the same time providing feedback to an instructor. The student’s work is saved

each time the student exits the program in what is called a startup file (it has a file

extension of “.mgs”). Assignments are to be submitted as startup files attached to an

email message sent to the instructor. The student will also need to download the presets

file “MUTH 2103 Presets.mgp” from the TTU Theory Website. Startup files and presets

files are explained in the readme.txt file on the macgamut disk itself.

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1

quiz grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup sightsinging quiz; a

student with an unexcused absence should not ask for one. No dictation quizzes will be

made up.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless

arrangements are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises,

students must notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled

exam time. Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no

exceptions to this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

Absence due to religious observance: The Texas Tech University Catalog states that a

student who is absent from classes for the observance of a religious holy day will be

allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment scheduled for that day within

a reasonable time after the absence. (p.49) (Note: prior notification to the instructor is no

longer required.)

Absence due to officially approved trips: The Texas Tech University Catalog states

that the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed. (p.48)

Academic Honesty: It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a

spirit of complete honesty and a high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to

present as their own any work that they have not honestly performed is regarded by the

faculty and administration as a serious offense and renders the offenders liable to serious

consequences, possibly suspension (TTU Catalog 49). See p. 49 in the Texas Tech

University Catalog for definitions of cheating and plagiarism.

ADA Statement: Any student who because of a disability may require special

arrangements in order to meet course requirements should contact the instructor as soon

as possible to make any necessary accommodations. Student should present appropriate

verification from AccessTECH. No requirement exists that accommodations be made

prior to completion of this approved university procedure.

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with erasers!)

for use in class and for written assignments.

Last day to drop a class: The 45th day of the semester is the last day to drop a class.

________________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment

_______________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree #4)

2. Chap. 13: Chromaticism I Sequences with Chromatic Tones, #1

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree #4)

3. Chap. 13: Chromaticism I Sequences with Chromatic Tones, #2

Dictation: harmonic (V7/V, any inv.)

4. Chap. 13: Chromaticism I Sequences with Chromatic Tones, #3

Dictation: harmonic (V7/V, any inv.)

5. Chap. 13: Chromaticism I Sousa, “Washington Post March”

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree b7)

6. Chap. 13: Chromaticism I Chopin, Fantasie-Impromptu

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree b7)

7. Chap. 15: Chromaticism I Handel, from Judas Maccabeus

Dictation: harmonic (+ viio7/V, any inv.)

8. Chap. 15: Syncopation Ottman, #843

Dictation: harmonic (+ viio7/V, any inv.)

9. Chap. 15: Syncopation Ottman, #848-849

Dictation: melodic (syncopation)

10. Chap. 15: Syncopation Ottman, #852

Dictation: melodic (syncopation)

11. Chap. 15: Syncopation Beethoven, Symphony No. 9, III

Dictation: harmonic (all secondary functions)

12. Chap. 15: Syncopation Berlioz, Roman Carnival Overture

Dictation: harmonic (all secondary functions)

13. Chap. 15: Syncopation Foster, “Beautiful Dreamer”

Dictation: TBA

14. Midterm Exam

15. Chap. 14: Chromaticism II Beethoven, Symphony No. 3, IV

Dictation: melodic (modulating to V)

16. Chap. 14: Chromaticism II Sequences with Chromatic Tones, #4

Dictation: melodic (modulating to V)

17. Chap. 14: Chromaticism II Sequences with Chromatic Tones, #5

Dictation: harmonic (modulating to V)

18. Chap. 14: Chromaticism II Mozart, Clarinet Quintet, IV

Dictation: harmonic (modulating to V)

19. Chap. 14: Chromaticism II Wagner, Tannhäuser, III

Dictation: melodic (other modulations)

20. Chap. 14: Chromaticism II Beethoven, Symphony No. 5, II

Dictation: melodic (other modulations)

21. Chap. 16: Triplets and Duplets Duplet and Triplet Sequences, #1

Dictation: harmonic (other modulations)

22. Chap. 16: Triplets and Duplets Duplet and Triplet Sequences, #2

Dictation: harmonic (other modulations)

23. Chap. 16: Triplets and Duplets Duplet and Triplet Sequences, #3

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree b6)

24. Chap. 16: Triplets and Duplets Verdi, Aida, I

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree b6)

25. Chap. 16: Triplets and Duplets Duplet and Triplet Sequences, #4

Dictation: harmonic (mixture)

26. Chap. 16: Triplets and Duplets Duplet and Triplet Sequences, #5

Dictation: harmonic (mixture)

27. review

28. Final Exam

 

 

MUTH 2104

Intermediate Aural Skills II

1

MUTH 2104: Intermediate Aural Skills II   2104. [MUSI 2117, 2217] Intermediate Aural Skills II (1:0:2). Prerequisite: Completion of MUTH 2303 and 2103 with a grade of C or better, or equivalent. Corequisite: MUTH 2304. Dictation, sight-singing, and keyboard skills.

MUTH 2104: Intermediate Aural Skills II

Prerequisites: Completion of MUAP2123, MUTH 2103, and 2303 with a C or better, or

equivalent. Concurrent enrollment in MUAP2124 and MUTH 2304 required.

Required Texts:

• Robert Ottman, Music for Sight Singing, 6th ed. Upper Saddle River, NY:

Prentice Hall Inc., 2003. [Available in the bookstore.]

MacGamut 2003 User Disk [Available in the bookstore.]

Course Content: In this course, you will develop sightsinging and dictation skills

necessary for the performance and teaching of tonal music. MUTH 2104 continues to

explore chromaticism in harmonic and melodic contexts.

Course Purpose: The purpose of the course is to develop a “seeing ear” and a “hearing

eye.” Over the course of the semester, you will develop the ability to translate sound into

notation and vice versa. Sightsinging and dictation skills are of paramount importance to

the aspiring professional musician. Sightsinging improves your ability to sight-read on

your instrument; dictation facilitates error-checking, transcription, and a host of other

activities. MUTH 2104 is required of all music majors, and it is the capstone of the aural

skills sequence. The skills developed in MUTH 2104 are intended to complement the

skills being developed concurrently in MUTH 2303. This course is required for all

undergraduate music majors.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 2104, you will be able to:

• Perform a variety of rhythmic patterns at sight while conducting

• Know and be able to demonstrate basic conducting patterns

• Sing modal, chromatic, and non-tonal melodies at sight

• Identify aurally size and quality of intervals, and quality of triads and seventh

chords

• Take melodic and harmonic dictation including chromatically altered chords and

non-tonal materials

• Improvise in a variety of musical contexts

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily sightsinging and dictation quizzes

• MacGamut ear-training software (see below)

• A variety of in-class activities

• Sightsinging midterm and final exam

Criteria for Grading: Your final grade will be determined as follows:

• Dictation quizzes: 40%

• Sightsinging quizzes and homework assignments: 25%

• Sightsinging final: 15%

• Sightsinging midterm: 10%

• MacGamut: 10%

An excessive number of missed classes can lower your final grade by as much as one

letter grade. Three unexcused absences will lower your grade by a sign (ex. from a B+ to

a B, from a C- to a D+); five or more unexcused absences will lower your grade by a

letter (ex. from C to D).

Grading scale: 90-100% = A; 80-89% = B; 70-79% = C; 60-69% = D; below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend).

MacGamut: MacGamut software is designed to develop the aural skills of the student,

while at the same time providing feedback to an instructor. The student’s work is saved

each time the student exits the program in what is called a startup file (it has a file

extension of “.mgs”). Assignments are to be submitted as startup files attached to an

email message sent to the instructor. The student will also need to download the presets

file “MUTH 2104 Presets.mgp” from the TTU Theory Website. Startup files and presets

files are explained in the readme.txt file on the macgamut disk itself.

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1

quiz grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup sightsinging quiz; a

student with an unexcused absence should not ask for one. No dictation quizzes will be

made up.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless

arrangements are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises,

students must notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled

exam time. Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no

exceptions to this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

Absence due to religious observance: The Texas Tech University Catalog states that a

student who is absent from classes for the observance of a religious holy day will be

allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment scheduled for that day within

a reasonable time after the absence. (p.49) (Note: prior notification to the instructor is no

longer required.)

Absence due to officially approved trips: The Texas Tech University Catalog states

that the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed. (p.48)

Academic Honesty: It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a

spirit of complete honesty and a high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to

present as their own any work that they have not honestly performed is regarded by the

faculty and administration as a serious offense and renders the offenders liable to serious

consequences, possibly suspension (TTU Catalog 49). See p. 49 in the Texas Tech

University Catalog for definitions of cheating and plagiarism.

ADA Statement: Any student who because of a disability may require special

arrangements in order to meet course requirements should contact the instructor as soon

as possible to make any necessary accommodations. Student should present appropriate

verification from AccessTECH. No requirement exists that accommodations be made

prior to completion of this approved university procedure.

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness: Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with erasers!)

for use in class and for written assignments.

Last day to drop a class: The 45th day of the semester is the last day to drop a class.

________________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree b2)

2. Chap. 19: The Neapolitan Schumann, “Und wüssten die Blumen”

Dictation: melodic (scale-degree b2)

3. Chap. 19: The Neapolitan Chopin, Mazurka, Op. 7, No. 2

Dictation: harmonic (Neapolitans)

4. Chap. 19: The Neapolitan Bach, Mass in B minor, Kyrie

Dictation: harmonic (Neapolitans)

5. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Ottman, #972-981

Dictation: harmonic (Augmented-6th Chords)

6. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Ottman, #982-990

Dictation: harmonic (Augmented-6th Chords)

7. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Ottman, #1011 (conduct mm. 5-6 as one bar in 3/2)

Dictation: melodic (changing meters)

8. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Ottman, #991-994

Dictation: melodic (changing meters)

9. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Schumann, “Hör ich das Liedchen klingen”

Dictation: harmonic (modulation)

10. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Brahms, Symphony No. 3, III

Dictation: harmonic (modulation)

11. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Rimsky-Korsakov, Scheherazade, II

Dictation: melodic (assymetrical meters)

12. Chap. 17: Changing Time Signatures Beethoven, Symphony No. 4, II

Dictation: melodic (assymetrical meters)

13. Midterm Exam

14. Chap. 19: Remote Modulations

Dictation: melodic (modulation)

15. Chap. 19: Remote Modulations Brahms, Die “Mainacht”

Dictation: melodic (modulation)

16. Chap. 19: Remote Modulations Wagner, Lohengrin, I

Dictation: harmonic (modulation)

17. Chap. 20: Medieval Modes Dorian, Phrygian, Lydian, and Mixolydian modes

Dictation: harmonic (modulation)

18. Chap. 20: Medieval Modes Ottman, pp. 339-346 (Lydian and Mixolydian)

Dictation: scale identification

19. Chap. 20: Medieval Modes Ottman, pp. 339-346 (Dorian and Phyrgian)

Dictation: scale identification

20. Chap. 20: Medieval Modes Mussorgsky, Boris Godunov, I

Dictation: (012), (024), (036), (048)

21. Chap. 21: Twentieth-Century Melody Nelson, “Stolen Moments” (sing and play bass line!)

Dictation: (012), (024), (036), (048)

22. Chap. 21: Twentieth-Century Melody pentatonic, whole-tone, and octatonic scales

Dictation: + (027)

23. Chap. 21: Twentieth-Century Melody Ives, “The Cage” ; whole-tone melodies

Dictation: + (027)

24. Chap. 21: Twentieth-Century Melody Stravinsky, The Firebird; octatonic melodies

Dictation: + (037), (014)

25. Chap. 21: Twentieth-Century Melody TBA

Dictation: + (037), (014)

26. Chap. 21: Twentieth-Century Melody TBA

Dictation: melodic (modal)

27. review

Dictation: melodic (modal)

28. Final Exam

 

 

MUTH 2303

Intermediate Music Theory I

3

MUTH 2303: Intermediate Music Theory I   2303. [MUSI 2311] Intermediate Music Theory I (3:3:0). Prerequisite: Completion of MUTH 1304 and 1104 with a grade of C or better, or equivalent. Corequisite: MUTH 2103. Diatonic and chromatic harmony.

MUTH 2303: Intermediate Music Theory I

Prerequisites: Completion of MUAP1124, MUTH1104, and MUTH1304 with a C or

better, or equivalent. Concurrent enrollment in MUAP2123 and MUTH2103 required..

Required Text:

• Kostka, Stefan & Dorothy Payne. Tonal Harmony with an Introduction to

Twentieth-Century Music, 5th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003. [BUY BOTH

THE TEXTBOOK AND THE WORKBOOK; both are available in the

bookstore.]

Course Content: This course introduces basic theoretical concepts dealing with commonpractice

melody, harmony, and voice leading, and demonstrates their analytical and

compositional uses.

Course Purpose: The purpose of this course is to enable you to read, write, and

comprehend the fundamental elements of common-practice harmony. These skills are

essential to the aspiring performer, composer, and teacher. MUTH 2303 expands upon

the harmonic vocabulary presented in MUTH 1303 and 1304. The skills acquired in

MUTH 2303 are intended to complement the skills being developed concurrently in

MUTH 2103. This course is required of all undergraduate music majors.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 2303, you should be able

to:

• Identify secondary-functioning chords and incorporate them into written exercises

• Identify various diatonic modulatory techniques and incorporate them into written

exercises

• Analyze and compose short pieces in binary and ternary form

• Identify modally mixed harmonies and incorporate them into written exercises

• Demonstrate any of the above on the piano

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily written quizzes

• Homework assignments

• A variety of in-class activities

• Midterm and final examinations (both written and keyboard performance)

Criteria for Grading: Students are responsible for all material covered in class and

assigned for homework. Grading will be weighted as follows:

• Assignments and Quizzes = 50%

• Midterm = 25%

• Final = 25%

There will be a midterm keyboard skills exam and a final keyboard skills exam to be

given along with the written midterm and final exams; the midterm keyboard skills exam

will constitute 20% of the total midterm exam grade and the final keyboard skills exam

will constitute 20% of the total final exam grade.

Grading Scale: 90-100% = A, 80-89 = B, 70-79 = C, 60-69 = D, below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend).

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1

quiz grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup quiz; a student with

an unexcused absence should not ask for one.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless

arrangements are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises,

students must notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled

exam time. Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no

exceptions to this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

Absence due to religious observance: The Texas Tech University Catalog states that a

student who is absent from classes for the observance of a religious holy day will be

allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment scheduled for that day within

a reasonable time after the absence. (p.49) (Note: prior notification to the instructor is no

longer required.)

Absence due to officially approved trips: The Texas Tech University Catalog states

that the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed. (p.48)

Academic Honesty: It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a

spirit of complete honesty and a high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to

present as their own any work that they have not honestly performed is regarded by the

faculty and administration as a serious offense and renders the offenders liable to serious

consequences, possibly suspension (TTU Catalog 49). See p. 49 in the Texas Tech

University Catalog for definitions of cheating and plagiarism.

ADA Statement: Any student who because of a disability may require special

arrangements in order to meet course requirements should contact the instructor as soon

as possible to make any necessary accommodations. Student should present appropriate

verification from AccessTECH. No requirement exists that accommodations be made

prior to completion of this approved university procedure.

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness: Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with erasers!)

for use in class and for written assignments.

Last day to drop a class: The 45th day of the semester is the last day to drop a class.

Abbreviations KP = Kostka/Payne (textbook); WB = workbook

________________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment Due

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction/ Secondary Functions 1

2. Secondary Functions 1 reading: KP, pp. 245-261

3. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 135-136

4. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 137-138

5. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 139-140

6. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 141-142

7. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 143-144

8. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, p. 145

9. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, p. 148

reading: KP, pp. 263-287

10. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 149-152

11. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 153-154

12. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 155-156

13. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 157-158

14. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 159-160

15. Midterm Exam

16. Keyboard Skills Midterm Exam

17. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations reading: KP, pp. 289-303

18. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 163-164

19. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 165-166, 171-172 omit D

20. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 167-170

21. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 172-173

22. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 175-176

reading: KP, pp. 305-321

23. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 179-180

24. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 181-182

25. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 183-184

26. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, p. 185

reading: KP, pp. 323-339

27. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 192-193

28. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 188-190

29. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 191

30. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 187, 194, 195

31. Mode Mixture reading: KP, pp. 343-358

32. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 197-198

33. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 199-200

34. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 201-204

35. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 205-206

36. Mode Mixture written: WB, p. 207

37. Review written: TBA

38. Review written: TBA

39. Review written: TBA

40. Review written: TBA

41. Keyboard Skills Final Exam

Written Final Exam: see http://www.depts.ttu.edu/officialpublications/SFSKEDEXAMS.html

 

 

MUTH 2304

Intermediate Music Theory II

3

MUTH 2304: Intermediate Music Theory II   2304. [MUSI 2312] Intermediate Music Theory II (3:3:0). Prerequisite: Completion of MUTH 2303 and 2103 with a grade of C or better, or equivalent. Corequisite: MUTH 2104. Diatonic and chromatic harmony; survey of twentieth-century techniques.

MUTH 2303: Intermediate Music Theory I

Prerequisites: Completion of MUAP1124, MUTH1104, and MUTH1304 with a C or

better, or equivalent. Concurrent enrollment in MUAP2123 and MUTH2103 required..

Required Text:

• Kostka, Stefan & Dorothy Payne. Tonal Harmony with an Introduction to

Twentieth-Century Music, 5th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill, 2003. [BUY BOTH

THE TEXTBOOK AND THE WORKBOOK; both are available in the

bookstore.]

Course Content: This course introduces basic theoretical concepts dealing with commonpractice

melody, harmony, and voice leading, and demonstrates their analytical and

compositional uses.

Course Purpose: The purpose of this course is to enable you to read, write, and

comprehend the fundamental elements of common-practice harmony. These skills are

essential to the aspiring performer, composer, and teacher. MUTH 2303 expands upon

the harmonic vocabulary presented in MUTH 1303 and 1304. The skills acquired in

MUTH 2303 are intended to complement the skills being developed concurrently in

MUTH 2103. This course is required of all undergraduate music majors.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 2303, you should be able

to:

• Identify secondary-functioning chords and incorporate them into written exercises

• Identify various diatonic modulatory techniques and incorporate them into written

exercises

• Analyze and compose short pieces in binary and ternary form

• Identify modally mixed harmonies and incorporate them into written exercises

• Demonstrate any of the above on the piano

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress towards the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily written quizzes

• Homework assignments

• A variety of in-class activities

• Midterm and final examinations (both written and keyboard performance)

Criteria for Grading: Students are responsible for all material covered in class and

assigned for homework. Grading will be weighted as follows:

• Assignments and Quizzes = 50%

• Midterm = 25%

• Final = 25%

There will be a midterm keyboard skills exam and a final keyboard skills exam to be

given along with the written midterm and final exams; the midterm keyboard skills exam

will constitute 20% of the total midterm exam grade and the final keyboard skills exam

will constitute 20% of the total final exam grade.

Grading Scale: 90-100% = A, 80-89 = B, 70-79 = C, 60-69 = D, below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend).

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1

quiz grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup quiz; a student with

an unexcused absence should not ask for one.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless

arrangements are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises,

students must notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled

exam time. Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no

exceptions to this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

Absence due to religious observance: The Texas Tech University Catalog states that a

student who is absent from classes for the observance of a religious holy day will be

allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment scheduled for that day within

a reasonable time after the absence. (p.49) (Note: prior notification to the instructor is no

longer required.)

Absence due to officially approved trips: The Texas Tech University Catalog states

that the person responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the

instructors of the departure and return schedule in advance of the trip. The student may

not be penalized and is responsible for the material missed. (p.48)

Academic Honesty: It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a

spirit of complete honesty and a high standard of integrity. The attempt of students to

present as their own any work that they have not honestly performed is regarded by the

faculty and administration as a serious offense and renders the offenders liable to serious

consequences, possibly suspension (TTU Catalog 49). See p. 49 in the Texas Tech

University Catalog for definitions of cheating and plagiarism.

ADA Statement: Any student who because of a disability may require special

arrangements in order to meet course requirements should contact the instructor as soon

as possible to make any necessary accommodations. Student should present appropriate

verification from AccessTECH. No requirement exists that accommodations be made

prior to completion of this approved university procedure.

Incompletes: The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of documented

emergencies or illness, and then only when permission has been obtained from the

instructor, no later than one week before the final class meeting.

Preparedness: Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with erasers!)

for use in class and for written assignments.

Last day to drop a class: The 45th day of the semester is the last day to drop a class.

Abbreviations KP = Kostka/Payne (textbook); WB = workbook

________________________________________________________________________

Session/Class Topic Assignment Due

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction/ Secondary Functions 1

2. Secondary Functions 1 reading: KP, pp. 245-261

3. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 135-136

4. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 137-138

5. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 139-140

6. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 141-142

7. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, pp. 143-144

8. Secondary Functions 1 written: WB, p. 145

9. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, p. 148

reading: KP, pp. 263-287

10. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 149-152

11. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 153-154

12. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 155-156

13. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 157-158

14. Secondary Functions 2 written: WB, pp. 159-160

15. Midterm Exam

16. Keyboard Skills Midterm Exam

17. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations reading: KP, pp. 289-303

18. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 163-164

19. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 165-166, 171-172 omit D

20. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 167-170

21. Common-Chord Diatonic Modulations written: WB, pp. 172-173

22. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 175-176

reading: KP, pp. 305-321

23. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 179-180

24. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 181-182

25. Some Other Modulatory Techniques written: WB, pp. 183-184

26. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, p. 185

reading: KP, pp. 323-339

27. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 192-193

28. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 188-190

29. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 191

30. Binary and Ternary Forms written: WB, pp. 187, 194, 195

31. Mode Mixture reading: KP, pp. 343-358

32. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 197-198

33. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 199-200

34. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 201-204

35. Mode Mixture written: WB, pp. 205-206

36. Mode Mixture written: WB, p. 207

37. Review written: TBA

38. Review written: TBA

39. Review written: TBA

40. Review written: TBA

41. Keyboard Skills Final Exam

Written Final Exam: see http://www.depts.ttu.edu/officialpublications/SFSKEDEXAMS.html


 

 

MUTH 3303

Form and Analysis

3

MUTH 3303: Form and Analysis  

3303. Form, Analysis, and Synthesis (3:3:0). Prerequisite: Completion of MUTH 2304 and 2104 with a grade of C or better or equivalent. The analysis and synthesis of Classical, Romantic, Impressionist, and Contemporary styles, including harmonic and nonharmonic practices and the principles of both small and large part-forms. May be an individual study course.
 

MUTH 3303: Form, Analysis, and Synthesis

Instructor: Dr. Santa

________________________________________________________________________

Class Hours: 10-11:50 pm, MTWRF, M248

Office Hours: 9-10 am, MTWRF, M236

Phone: 742-2270, ext. 273

E-mail: matthew.santa@ttu.edu theory website: http://courses.ttu.edu/musictheory/

Prerequisites: Completion of MUAP2124, MUTH2104, and MUTH2304 with a C or

better, or equivalent.

Course Content: This course covers musical forms from the Baroque Period to the 20th

Century. It also covers score reading and listening strategies.

Course Purpose: The purpose of this course is to develop a deeper understanding of

musical forms from the Baroque Period to the 20th Century, to synthesize the

interrelationships of fields both inside and outside of music, and to further develop

listening strategies and score reading through expanded means of critical thinking and

logical reasoning.

Expected Learning Outcomes: Upon completion of MUTH 3303, you should be able to

do the following:

• Identify phrase endings and cadence types in music with or without the score.

• Identify modulations in music with or without a score.

• Identify sequence types in music with or without a score.

• Identify musical forms with or without a score.

• Identify formal sections in music with or without a score.

Describe how the delineation of cadence, phrase, sequence, modulation, and form

all depend upon mathematical relationships between pitches, sometimes linked by

proximity (as in a melody or harmony), sometimes linked by salience (as in a key

center or pedal tone), and sometimes linked by harmonic stability (as in a

sequence of chord roots).

Assessment of Learning Outcomes: The following methods will be used to assess your

progress toward the learning outcomes given above:

• Daily written quizzes

• Homework assignments

• A variety of in-class activities

Midterm and final examinations

2

Criteria for Grading: Students are responsible for all material covered in class and

assigned for homework. Grading will be weighted as follows:

Assignments and Quizzes = 20%, Midterm = 30%, Final = 50%

Grading Scale: 90-100% = A, 80-89 = B, 70-79 = C, 60-69 = D, below 60% = F

Assignments: Assignments are due at the beginning of the class session indicated in the

syllabus. Late assignments will not be accepted without an acceptable excuse supported

by documentation. Acceptable excuses are a personal illness, a death in the family, or a

university-sponsored trip. Failure to attend class does not excuse late assignments (leave

them in my mailbox before class if unable to attend). Homework assignments and in-class

quizzes missed due to an excused absence must be turned in no later than one week from

the date of the students return to class. It is the students responsibility to turn in the

missed homework within that time period or a grade of 0 will be given. It is also the

students responsibility to schedule a time with the instructor to make up missed quizzes

within the allotted time or a grade of 0 will be given.

Quizzes: A short quiz will be given in the first five minutes of every class session. 1 quiz

grade = 1 homework grade. A student with an acceptable excuse supported by

documentation (see Assignments above) will be allowed a makeup quiz; a student with an

unexcused absence should not ask for one.

Exams: Exams will not be given outside of the scheduled exam hour unless arrangements

are made with the instructor prior to the exam. If an emergency arises, students must

notify the instructor by calling the School of Music prior to the scheduled exam time.

Messages left at the School of Music are dated and timed. There will be no exceptions to

this exam policy unless the student’s dean notifies the instructor otherwise.

Attendance: Attendance is required. If you are unable to attend class, please leave an

email or phone message for the instructor indicating the reason for your absence. If you

anticipate missing class, you should inform the instructor in advance.

ADA Compliance http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.22.pdf

Any student who, because of a disability, may require special arrangements in order to

meet the course requirements should contact the instructor as soon as possible to make

any necessary arrangements. Students should present appropriate verification from

Student Disability Services during the instructor’s office hours. Please note instructors

are not allowed to provide classroom accommodations to a student until appropriate

verification from Student Disability Services has been provided. For additional

information, you may contact the Student Disability Services office at 335 West Hall or

806-742-2405.

3

Academic Integrity http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.12.pdf

It is the aim of the faculty of Texas Tech University to foster a spirit of complete honesty and high standard

of integrity. The attempt of students to present as their own any work not honestly performed is regarded by

the faculty and administration as a most serious offense and renders the offenders liable to serious

consequences, possibly suspension.

“Scholastic dishonesty” includes, but it not limited to, cheating, plagiarism, collusion, falsifying academic

records, misrepresenting facts, and any act designed to give unfair academic advantage to the student (such

as, but not limited to, submission of essentially the same written assignment for two courses without the

prior permission of the instructor) or the attempt to commit such an act.

a. “Cheating” includes, but is not limited to:

(1) Copying from another student’s test paper;

(2) Using during a test materials not authorized by the person giving the test;

(3) Failing to comply with instructions given by the person administering the test;

(4) Possession during a test of materials that are not authorized by the person giving the test, such as class

notes or specifically designed “crib notes.” The presence of textbooks constitutes a violation only if they

have been specifically prohibited by the person administering the test.

(5) Using, buying, stealing, transporting, or soliciting in whole or in part the contents of an unadministered

test, test key, homework solution, or computer program;

(6) Collaborating with or seeking aid or receiving assistance from another student or individual during a test

or in conjunction with other assignment without authority;

(7) Discussing the contents of an examination with another student who will take the examination;

(8) Divulging the contents of an examination for the purpose of preserving questions for use by another

when the instructor has designated that the examination is not to be removed from the examination room or

not to be returned to or kept by the student;

(9) Substituting for another person or permitting another person to substitute for oneself to take a course, a

test, or any course-related assignment;

(10) Paying or offering money or other valuable thing to or coercing another person to obtain an

unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program, or information about an

unadministered test, test key, homework solution, or computer program;

(11) Falsifying research data, laboratory reports, and/or other academic work offered for credit; and

(12) Taking, keeping, misplacing, or damaging the property of the university or of another if the student

knows or reasonably should know that an unfair academic advantage would be gained by such conduct.

b. “Plagiarism” includes, but is not limited to, the appropriation of, buying, receiving as a gift, or obtaining

by any means material that is attributable in whole or in part to another source, including words, ideas,

illustrations, structure, computer code, other expression and media, and presenting that material as one’s

own academic work being offered for credit.

c. “Collusion” includes, but is not limited to, the unauthorized collaboration with another person in

preparing academic assignments offered for credit or collaboration with another person to commit a

violation of any section of the rules on scholastic dishonesty.

d. “Falsifying academic records” includes, but is not limited to, altering or assisting in the altering of any

official record of the university and/or submitting false information or omitting requested information that is

required for or related to any academic record of the university. Academic records include, but are not

limited to, applications for admission, the awarding of a degree, grade reports, test papers, registration

materials, grade change forms, and reporting forms used by the Office of the Registrar. A former student

who engages in such conduct is subject to a bar against readmission, revocation of a degree, and withdrawal

of a diploma.

e. “Misrepresenting facts” to the university or an agent of the university includes, but is

not limited to, providing false grades or resumes; providing false or misleading

information in an effort to receive a postponement or an extension on a test, quiz, or other

4

assignment for the purpose of obtaining an academic or financial benefit for oneself or another individual;

or providing false or misleading information in an effort to injure another student academically or

financially.

Student Absence for Observance of Religious Holy Day

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/opmanual/OP34.19.pdf

"Religious holy day" means a holy day observed by a religion whose places of worship are exempt from

property taxation under Texas Tax Code §11.20.

A student who intends to observe a religious holy day should make that intention known in writing to the

instructor prior to the absence. A student who is absent from classes for the observance of a religious holy

day shall be allowed to take an examination or complete an assignment scheduled for that day within a

reasonable time after the absence.

Absence due to officially approved trips – The Texas Tech University Catalog states that the person

responsible for a student missing class due to a trip should notify the instructors of the departure and return

schedule in advance of the trip. The student may not be penalized and is responsible for the material

missed.

Civility in the Classroom

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/CampusCrime/documents/CivilityInTheClassroom.pdf

Students are expected to assist in maintaining a classroom environment that is conducive to learning. In

order to assure that all students have the opportunity to gain from time spent in class, unless otherwise

approved by the instructor, students are prohibited from engaging in any other form of distraction.

Inappropriate behavior in the classroom shall result, minimally, in a request to leave class.

Student Handbook and Code of Conduct

http://www.depts.ttu.edu/studentaffairs/publications/2008_2009_Handbook_and_Code.pdf

Incompletes The grade of incomplete is granted only in cases of serious, documented

emergencies, and then only when permission has been obtained from the instructor, no

later than one week before the final class meeting.

Required Texts Matthew Santa, Hearing Form. Lubbock: 24 Keys, 2008. [Available

at Barnes and Noble.]

Course Packet for MUTH 3303 [Available at CopyTech]

One emusic subscription for one month: $9.99 for 30 downloads (but

a free trial is available if you are a first-time user!). To sign up, go to

www.emusic.com.

Preparedness Be sure to have a supply of manuscript paper and pencils (with

erasers!) for use in class and for written assignments.

5

________________________________________________________________________

Class Topic Assignment Due

________________________________________________________________________

1. Introduction; Cadences and Phrases;

Bach, Orchestral Suite No. 2, Air

2. Cadences and Phrases; Bach, Orchestral

Suite No. 2, Badinerie

Homework Assignment 1.1: Bach, “Goldberg”

Variations, “Aria” ; read Chapters 1 & 2

3. Binary and Ternary Forms; Bach,

Orchestral Suite No. 3, Gavotte I

Homework Assignment 3.4: Mozart, Eine kleine

Nachtmusik, III; read Chapter 3

4. Binary and Ternary Forms; Handel, Giulio

Cesare, I/6, “L’empio” (BA, NOE)

Homework Assignment 3.2: Handel, Giulio

Cesare, I/5, “Non disperar”

5. Sonata Form; Mozart, Symphony No. 40

in G Minor, I

Homework Assignment 3.3: Bach, Orchestral Suite

No. 3, Gavotte II; read Chapter 4

6. Sonata Form; Beethoven, Piano Sonata No.

1 in F Minor, I

Homework Assignment 4.4: Mozart, Eine kleine

Nachtmusik, I

7. Sonata Form; Beethoven, Symphony No. 5

in C Minor, I

Homework Assignment 4.2: Beethoven, Symphony

No. 3, I, Development

8. Variation Forms; Bach, Mass in B Minor,

“Crucifixus”

Homework Assignment 4.3: Haydn, Symphony

No. 103, I; read Chapter 5

9. Variation Forms; Brahms, Variations on a

Theme by Haydn

Homework Assignment 5.1: Brahms, Symphony

No. 4, IV

10. Review; Purcell, Dido and Anaeas, “When

I Am Laid in Earth”

Homework Assignment 5.2: Mozart, Piano Sonata,

K. 331, I

11. MIDTERM EXAM

12. Imitative Forms; Bach, Two-Part

Inventions, No. 1 in C Major

Homework: read Chapter 6

13. Imitative Forms; Bach, WTC, Book I,

Fugue in F Major

Homework Assignment 6.1: Bach Two-Part

Inventions, No. 13 in A Minor

14. Imitative Forms; Haydn, Symphony No.

101, IV, mm. 189-232

Homework Assignment 6.2: Bach, WTC, Book II,

Fugue in E Minor

15. Imitative Forms; Beethoven, String

Quartet, Op. 131, I

Homework Assignment 6.3: Bach, WTC, Book I,

Fugue in B Major

16. Concerto Forms; Vivaldi, The Four

Seasons, Concerto No. 2 (“Summer”), I

Homework Assignment 6.4: Handel, Messiah, Part

I, Overture; read Chapter 7

17. Concerto Forms; Bach, Brandenburg

Concerto No. 1, I

Homework Assignment 7.1: Vivaldi, The Four

Seasons, Concerto No. 4 (“Winter”) , I

18. Concerto Forms; Brahms, Concerto for

Violin in D Major, Op. 77, I

Homework Assignment 7.2: Mozart, Piano

Concerto in D, K. 107, I (not on emusic)

19. Rondo; Haydn, Sonata No. 50 in D Major,

Hob. XVI/37, III

Homework Assignment 7.3: Mozart, Piano

Concerto in Eb, K. 271, I; read Chapter 8

20. Sonata-Rondo; Beethoven, Piano Sonata,

Op. 13, III (“Pathétique”)

Homework Assignment 8.1: Mozart, Symphony

No. 35, IV

21. Sonata-Rondo; Beethoven, Symphony No.

2, IV

Homework Assignment 8.5: Mozart, Eine kleine

Nachtmusik, III

22. Review Homework Assignment 8.6: Mozart, Eine kleine

Nachtmusik, IV

Final Exam: June 27th, 8:00-10:30 am, M248

6

Assignment Schedule

DATE ASSIGNMENT DUE ON THAT DATE

Thursday, 5/28 Assignment 1.1: Bach, “Goldberg” Variations, “Aria”

Friday, 5/29 Assignment 3.4: Mozart, Eine kleine Nachtmusik, III

Monday, 6/1 Assignment 3.2: Handel, Giulio Cesare, I/5, “Non disperar”

Tuesday, 6/2 Assignment 3.3: Bach, Orchestral Suite No. 3, Gavotte II

Wednesday, 6/3

Assignment 4.4: Mozart, Eine kleine Nachtmusik, I

Thursday, 6/4

Assignment 4.2: Beethoven, Symphony No. 3, I, Development

Friday, 6/5

Assignment 4.3: Haydn, Symphony No. 103, I

Monday, 6/8

Assignment 5.1: Brahms, Symphony No. 4, IV

Tuesday, 6/9 Assignment 5.2: Mozart, Piano Sonata, K. 331, I

Wednesday, 6/10 MIDTERM

Friday, 6/12 Assignment 6.1: Bach Two-Part Inventions, No. 13 in A Minor

Monday, 6/15

Assignment 6.2: Bach, WTC, Book II, Fugue in E Minor

Tuesday, 6/16 Assignment 6.3: Bach, WTC, Book I, Fugue in B Major

Wednesday, 6/17

Assignment 6.4: Handel, Messiah, Part I, Overture

Thursday, 6/18 Assignment 7.1: Vivaldi, The Four Seasons, Concerto No. 4

(“Winter”) , I

Friday, 6/19 Assignment 7.2: Mozart, Piano Concerto in D, K. 107, I (not on

emusic)

Monday, 6/22 Assignment 7.3: Mozart, Piano Concerto in Eb, K. 271, I

Tuesday, 6/23 Assignment 8.1: Mozart, Symphony No. 35, IV

Wednesday, 6/24

Assignment 8.5: Mozart, Eine kleine Nachtmusik, II

Thursday, 6/25 Assignment 8.6: Mozart, Eine kleine Nachtmusik, IV

Saturday, 6/27

FINAL EXAM, 8:00-10:30 am in M248

 
 Total19not counting the remedial course 
     

 

Texas Wesleyan University

department.txwes.edu/mus

http://music.txwes.edu/music/documents/Handbook-revisedFall2007_000.doc

http://music.txwes.edu/CourseDescriptions.htm

 

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
   1105. Music Theory Preview 1 hour
Summer workshop designed to enhance music reading and knowledge of
fundamental music skills. Includes rhythm studies, clef reading, keys and
key signatures, intervals, triads, and seventh chords. Particularly useful as a
preparation for MUS 1202 Music Theory I.
 
  20256. Music Theory Fundamentals 2 hours
An introduction to the fundamentals of music theory for the beginning
music student. Music reading ability not required as a prerequisite.
 
  21201. Aural Skills I 2 hours
Prerequisite: Freshman placement examination
The study of melody, harmony, and rhythm through dictation and
sightsinging.
 
  21202. Music Theory I 2 hours
Prerequisite: Freshman placement examination
Techniques of music analysis, with an emphasis on part-writing, harmonic,
melodic, and rhythmic patterns.
 
  21203. Aural Skills II 2 hours
Prerequisite: MUS 1201 (A transfer student must have consent of instructor)
Second semester of applied skills in elementary melodic, harmonic, and
rhythmic dictation and sightsinging techniques.
 
  21204. Music Theory II 2 hours
Prerequisite: MUS 1202 (A transfer student must have consent of instructor)
Study of chromatic harmony from secondary function to augmented sixth
chords, plus modulation techniques.
 
   2201. Aural Skills III 2 hours
Prerequisite: MUS 1203 (A transfer student must have consent of instructor)
Applied skills in advanced melodic, harmonic, and rhythmic dictation and
sightsinging.
 
   2202. Music Theory III 2 hours
Prerequisite: MUS 1204 (A transfer student must have consent of instructor)
An introduction to the music and analytic methods of music since 1900.
 
  3MUS CAP4321 Studies in the Theory of Music (Form & Analysis or Music since 1900) 

4321. Studies in the Theory of Music 3 hours
Prerequisite: Attainment Division status, MUS 2103
One in a sequence of four upper-level Attainment Division courses
required for all Bachelor of Arts in Music degree candidates. Variable
topics related to the theory of music.

 

 
  3  MUS CAP3322 Studies in the Creation of Music (Orchestration/Arranging)  3322. Studies in the Creation of Music 3 hours
Prerequisite: Attainment Division status, MUS 2103
One in a sequence of four upper-level Attainment Division courses
required for all Bachelor of Arts in Music degree candidates. Variable
topics related to the creative process in music.

 
 
     
 Total16Not counting the Music Theory Preview.  These requirements were from a MMHandbook last revised in 2007 with a total hour requirement of 143 
     
     
     

Texas Woman's University

http://www.twu.edu/soa/music/

http://www.twu.edu/soa/music/ba_degree.html

http://www.twu.edu/academics/GenCAT2007-09.pdf

 

 

Req theory course

Title

Credit hours

Description

 
  1MU 1521. (MUSI 1116) Aural Skills I. Sight-singing and ear training for
music reading and analysis. Concurrent enrollment with MU 1523. Two laboratory
hours a week. Credit: One hour.
 
  3MU 1523. (MUSI 1311) Music Theory I. Basic elements of music and music
writing, beginning harmonic, melodic, and rhythmic principles. Concurrent enrollment
with MU 1521. Three lecture hours a week. Credit: Three hours.
 
  1

MU 1531. (MUSI 1117) Aural Skills II. Sight-singing and ear training for

music reading and analysis. Concurrent enrollment with MU 1533. Two laboratory

hours a week. Credit: One hour.

 
  3

MU 1533. (MUSI 1312) Music Theory II. Continuation of MU 1523 with

emphasis on part-writing procedures within the diatonic system. Concurrent

enrollment with MU 1531. Three lecture hours a week. Credit: Three hours.

 
  1MU 2521. (MUSI 2116) Aural Skills III. Sight-singing and ear training for
music reading and analysis. Concurrent enrollment with MU 2523. Two laboratory
hours a week. Credit: One hour.
 
  3MU 2523. (MUSI 2311) Music Theory III. Detailed studies of music theory
with emphasis on modulation and secondary harmony. Keyboard harmony, sight
singing, and ear training. Concurrent enrollment with MU 2521. Three lecture
hours a week. Credit: Three hours.
 
  1MU 2531. (MUSI 2117) Aural Skills IV. Sight-singing and ear training for
music reading and analysis. Concurrent enrollment with MU 2533. Two laboratory
hours a week. Credit: One hour
 
  3**MU 2533. (MUSI 2312) Music Theory IV. Continuation of MU 2523 with
emphasis on altered and expanded harmonies and non-tonal practices. Concurrent
enrollment with MU 2531. Three hours of lecture a week. Credit: Three hours.
 
  2MU 4512. Instrumental Arranging. Detailed study of characteristics of all
instruments and scoring problems involved in mixed ensemble. Prerequisite: MU
2523 and 2533. Two lecture hours a week. Credit: Two hours.
 
     
 Total18  
     

University of Houston

www.music.uh.edu

http://www.music.uh.edu/academics/undergraduate_degrees.html

http://www.music.uh.edu/academics/undergraduate.html

 

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/  (Andrew Davis' personal web page)

Course archive is at  http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/#courses

 

Req theory course

Title

Cr. hrs.

Description

 
  3

Fundamentals of Music (MUSI 1300) Syllabus  (Andrew Davis)

1300: Fundamentals of Music
Cr. 3. (3-0). Primarily for nonmusic majors. Does not require any musical background. Does not fulfill any degree requirement for music major. An introduction to music through a study of its melodic, rhythmic, and harmonic elements.

course: MUSI 1300: Fundamentals of Music

time: M T W Th 8:00–10:30am

location: MSM 116

course web site: http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300

(this page). You are expected to monitor the web site regularly for assignments, updates to the course schedule,

and announcements and other news items not communicated

in class or through email. Details of assignments may or may

not be posted in class—you are expected to obtain the

assignment and any related instructions online.

Note that I will use your official email address on file with the

registrar's office to communicate with you by email. If you

don't have the correct address on file, or you don't have that

address set to forward to an account you read regularly, you

won't receive any email communication from me. You're

responsible for ensuring that your email address on file is

correct so that you receive communication about the course.

If you need instructions on how to do this, you may follow

this link (which will require the same username and password

used to access the "information for current students" page on

the school of music's web site, www.music.uh.edu--email me

if you need this information.

PROFESSOR INFORMATION

professor: Andrew Davis, Director of Graduate Studies and

Assistant Professor of Music Theory

office: MSM 152

office phone: 713 743 3294

email: adavis at uh.edu. **This is the best way to contact

me.

official web page:

http://www.music.uh.edu/people/davis.html

personal web page: http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5 (with links

to courses and other useful information)

musi 1300 syllabus Page 1 of 5

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/index.html 8/14/2008

office hours: by appointment unless I specify otherwise.

note also: Dr. Corey Tu (email) will teach the course in my

place on Monday, Tuesday, and Wednedsay, July 7–9. See

the schedule for more information.

COURSE DESCRIPTION AND LEARNING OUTCOMES

The course is designed to provide a basic understanding of

the technical language of music in order that students may

gain enjoyment and appreciation of music encountered in

everyday surroundings, and may gain the foundation

necessary for further study of music and the theory of music

at the college level. Students will become fluent in music

notation, principles of rhythm and meter (and its associated

notation), and principles of pitch organization in music (scale

collections, intervals, chords and harmonies, etc.). No

musical background is assumed.

REQUIRED MATERIALS

Robert Nelson and Carl Christensen, Foundations of Music,

7th ed. (Schirmer, 2006). With a CD. This is available at the

University Bookstore, 126 University Center, 713 748 0923;

additional purchase options are available online (here). Note

that some of the latter options do not include the course CD,

which is required (see item A here).

You should also bring pencils, erasers, and music manuscript

paper to class. Manuscript paper is useful for taking notes

and is necessary for some of the homework assignments; this

is available at any music shop or at the campus bookstore.

You may want to consider a spiral-bound manuscript

notebook.

EVALUATION

notes on grading:

*your lowest assignment grade (only one) will be dropped

assigments and

quizzes:* 50%

midterm exam: 20%

final exam: 20%

drill participation on

the course CD:** 5%

class participation

(discussion, questions,

etc.):*** 5%

musi 1300 syllabus Page 2 of 5

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/index.html 8/14/2008

when the final grade is computed.

**at the end of the semester I will ask you to turn in your

scores earned while using the course CD. I will award points

if the scores you submit demonstrate that you spent a good

deal of time outside class working on drill exercises not

assigned for homework. See this page for more information.

*** I will award points in your final grade if you exhibited a

willingness to contribute to the class discussions by asking

and answering questions and generally improving the class

environment.

Final grade distribution will be according to the standard scale

of percentages, as follows:

ASSIGNMENTS AND QUIZZES

Expectations for the course include keeping up with the

assigned daily work. In that sprit:

Assignments are due at the beginning of class on the date

indicated, and the due dates are not negotiable. Late

assignments will be accepted for full credit only with a

written, valid excuse. LATE ASSIGNMENTS WILL BE

ACCEPTED FOR PARTIAL CREDIT ONLY THROUGH THE START

OF THE NEXT CLASS MEETING, AND WITH A PENALTY OF

ONE LETTER GRADE FOR EACH DAY THE ASSIGNMENT IS

LATE. Note that you are responsible for the work assigned in

class even if you are absent from class, and that the

assignment is still due on the date indicated—you should

check the schedule online to see what material was assigned,

and you should obtain notes on the relevant material from a

classmate. Remember that your lowest two assignment

grades will be dropped.

Exams and quizzes also provide a means for your instructor

to test your mastery of the material. Dates for all exams and

quizzes are posted on the course schedule. Make-up exams

will only be given if you provide a written, valid excuse

for why you missed the exam.If you cannot do this, your

grade for the missed exam will be 0. Makeup quizzes are not

A: 92.5–100 A-: 90–92.5

B+: 87.5–

90

B: 82.5–87.5 B-: 80–82.5

C+: 77.5–

80

C: 72.5–77.5 C-: 70–72.5

D+: 67.5–

70

D: 62.5–67.5 D-: 60–62.5

F: below 60

musi 1300 syllabus Page 3 of 5

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/index.html 8/14/2008

given; if you have a legitimate reason for missing the quiz, I

simply won't include it in your final grade computation (it

neither helps nor hurts your grade, in other words—it only

makes the other quizzes for which you do receive grades

count for slightly more weight in your final grade).

ACADEMIC DISHONESTY

You are expected to do your own work on all assignments,

quizzes, and exams unless instructed differently; any work

you hand in at any time should be your own unless you are

assigned to do otherwise. Problems with academic dishonesty

will be handled according to the procedures outlined in the

undergraduate student handbook and in the undergraduate

course catalog. Please note that the mere suspicion of

academic dishonesty is enough to initiate official action;

please do not put yourself in the position of having to deal

with this kind of situation.

DISABILITIES

If you have a disability that affects your capacity to complete

assignments, quizzes, or exams in a timely manner, please

inform me at the beginning of the semester so that

appropriate arrangements can be made. You will need to

document your disability with the UH Center for Students

with Disabilities (CSD): 100 CSD Building (click here to get a

map), 713 743 5400. The CSD will provide information on

your disability to the instructor, and the instructor and

student will work out a mutually agreeable arrangement

(based on recommendations provided by the CSD) for how to

accommodate the disability.

OTHER INFORMATION

It should be clear that in order to maintain a productive

environment in class students are expected to behave with

courtesy and respect toward their instructor and their

classmates. Students will be dismissed from class if they are

found to be creating excessive disruptions. This includes

disruptions from cell phones: please turn them off.

Last day to drop without the course counting toward

"attempted credits" and last day to drop with no grade:

Thursday 07/10.

Last day to drop or withdraw with a W grade: Wednesday

July 30.

Last updated: 23 July, 2008

URL: http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300

© 2007, Andrew Davis

 

 

Daily schedule

Shortcut to the current week (assuming I remember to keep the link

updated).

NOTES:

-- some files are in .pdf format. To read these, you'll need

the Adobe Acrobat Reader, which you can obtain for free here.

--assignments are listed in the assignment column ON THEIR

DUE DATE; assignments are due at the beginning of class.

--VERY IMPORTANT: I will use your official email address on

file with the registrar's office to communicate with you by

email. If you don't have the correct address on file, or you

don't have that address set to forward to an account you read

regularly, you won't receive any email communication from

me. You're responsible for ensuring that your email address on

file is correct so that you receive communication about the

course. If you need instructions on how to do this, you may

follow this link (which will require the same username and

password used to access the "information for current students"

page on the school of music's web site, www.music.uh.edu--

email me if you need this information.

--INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE COURSE CD

WEEK DATE TOPICS AND HANDOUTS

ASSIGNMENT (due in

class on the day

listed). Please write

the assignment

number on your

paper when you

submit the

assignment.

1

Note regarding week 1: I will be attending a

conference (in Italy, in honor of the 150th

birthday of Italian opera composer Giacomo

musi 1300 schedule Page 1 of 6

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/schedule.html 8/14/2008

Puccini, b. 1858) and lecturing (in Berlin, at the

Freie Universität) abroad this week and will

miss the first few days of class. Dr. Corey Tu

will teach these class meetings in my place. Dr.

Tu has taught msuic theory at the University of

Houston and holds the Doctor of Musical Arts in

Piano Performance from the University of

Houston. I will return in time for week 2 and

will teach all subsequent class meetings. You're

welcome to email me with any questions you

may have.

07/07 course introduction; chapter 1:

pitch, timbre, texture, dynamics,

and articulations

07/08 chapter 2: pitch notation: notes

and rests; staff, letter names,

registers and octaves

using the course cd (this comes

with your textbook)

no assignment due

07/09 continue chapter 2 Assignment 1: CD

tests:

--chapter 2 #2, 20

repetitions, score at

least 90%

--chapter 2 #4, 10

repetitions, score at

least 90%

--chapter 2 #5, 10

repetitions, score at

least 90%

--chapter 2 #6, 20

repetitions, score at

least 90%

--chapter 2 #9, 10

repetitions, score at

least 90%

(course cd instructions)

07/10 Last day to drop without the

course counting toward

"attempted credits" and last

day to drop with no grade

NO CLASS TODAY

no assigment due

2 07/14 chapter 3: simple meters: pulse,

tempo, meter, metric notation,

tempo markings, beats and

subdivisions, conducting

patterns

Assignment 2: CD

tests:

--chapter 2 #s 11, 13,

and 15, 10 repetitions,

score at least 90%

musi 1300 schedule Page 2 of 6

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/schedule.html 8/14/2008

--chapter 2 #22, 20

repetitions, score at

least 90%

(course cd instructions)

07/15 quiz 1: material from week 1

days 1–3 (this was moved

from Monday 07/14)

continue chapter 3

NOTE: when "written

exercises" are assigned

from the textbook,

photocopy the page(s),

do the assignment on

the photocopy, and

submit your work in

class.

Assignment 3:

a) written exercises: p.

32, all

b) CD test: chapter 12

#165; answer 20

questions, score at least

90% (select mastery

level 1 if prompted)

(course cd instructions)

07/16 chapter 4: scales: half steps,

whole steps, sharps, flats, major

scales, key signatures, circle of

fifths, scale degrees and names

Assignment 4: written

exercises: p. 44–46, all

07/17 quiz 2: material from week 2

days 1–3

continue chapter 4

Assignment 5:

a) CD test: chapter 4

#52: 20 repetitions,

score at least 90%

(course cd instructions)

b) written exercises:

pp. 56–57, all

3 07/21 continue chapter 4 Assignment 6: written

exercises: pp. 61–64,

all

07/22 chapter 5: compound meters:

beats and subdivisions,

summary of meters and meter

types

Assignment 7: written

exercises: pp. 70–72,

all

07/23 continue chapter 5 Assignment 8: written

exercises: p. 85, all;

pp. 92–94 written

exercise no. 1; p. 97

written exercise no. 5

musi 1300 schedule Page 3 of 6

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/schedule.html 8/14/2008

07/24 midterm exam: material from

week 1 day 1—week 3 day 2

(material from chapters 1–4;

no compound meter topics—

we'll save this for the final

exam)

chapter 6: minor mode: mode,

minor scales, relative minor,

parallel minor, modulation (tonic

establishment), chromatic scale

no new assignment to

hand in—you can hand

in assignment 8 today if

you want (we discussed

this in class Wednesday

and clarified many

questions).

Also prepare for the

midterm exam: review

the exercises from your

homework and quizzes

4 07/28 continue chapter 6 Assignment 9: written

exercises: pp. 122–23,

only problem 1

07/29 chapter 7: alternative scales:

diatonic modes (church modes),

pentatonic scales

Assignment 10: written

exercises: pp. 123–24,

problems 2 and 3; pp.

127–29, all

07/30 Last day to drop or withdraw

with a W grade

chapter 8: more rhyhtm and

meter topics: syncopation, jazz

and pop rhythms.

Assignment 11: written

assignment (follow this

link for the .pdf file)

07/31 quiz 3: material from week 3

day 4—week 4 day 3

chapter 9: more on intervals:

size, quality, perfect vs.

imperfect, interval inversion,

compound intervals, consonant

vs. dissonant intervals

no assignment due.

5 08/04 continue chapter 9 note (from p. 166):

before doing the

material in this chapter,

you may want to review

whole and half steps—

assignments and CD

drills—from chapter 4.

Assignment 12: written

exercises: p. 168, all;

p. 170, all. (Do not

change the given note

when building

intervals.)

08/05 CLASS CANCELLED:

HURRICANE

08/06 chapter 10: chords: triads, triad

qualities, consonant vs.

dissonant triads, dominant

Assignment 13: written

exercises: pp. 173–74,

all

musi 1300 schedule Page 4 of 6

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/schedule.html 8/14/2008

seventh chord (major-minor

seventh chord), inverted triads,

musical textures, primary vs.

secondary triads, chord

functions and progressions, nonchord

tones

08/07 continue chapter 10 no assignment to turn

in

08/11 continue chapter 10 Assignment 14: written

exercises: pp. 188–90,

all

Wednesday 08/13: final exam. 8–11 am. Same room as regular

class meeting. The exam probably will not take you three hours, but it

may take you two, depending on how fast you work, of course.

NOTE: for the final exam you may bring notes; your notes must fit on

one side of an 8.5x11 (or smaller) sheet of blank paper or manuscript

paper; no photocopied or pre-printed material of any kind will be

permitted, but you may make your own notes on any subject, draw

pictures; etc.; you will only be permitted to use the single sheet of

paper, not the textbook or any other source of diagrams, drawings, etc.

-----

Note I sent by email at 12:10pm Tuesday August 12:

Hi all--I'm really sorry about this, but I'm going to have to have

someone

else proctor the final exam for you tomorrow because I'm unable to be

there.

Everything should be clear--everything on the exam duplicates

questions or

problems you've had on previous exams, quizzes, or homework

assignments; if

there are any serious questions that can't be answered, make a note on

your

exam, take a good guess at how to solve the problem, and I'll deal with

it

fairly when I grade it.

I also have any graded work you turned in to me yesterday; I'll have

the

proctor return this at the exam. All other work you've submitted has

been

returned, so you should have everything.

If you have work to turn in to me, including lists of computer scores for

extra credit, bring all this to the exam and the proctor will deliver it to

me.

Remember the exam starts at 8, in the same room as usual.

Remember also you may bring one 8.5x11 sheet of notes to the exam;

musi 1300 schedule Page 5 of 6

http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300/schedule.html 8/14/2008

all your

notes must be handwritten and all the notes must fit on one side of the

page. No preprinted or photocopied material will be allowed on the

sheet.

I'll also have blank staff paper for you, in case you want to use this as

scrap paper as you work on the exam. Thus it's not necessary for you to

bring anything to the exam other than a pencil and your sheet of notes.

You can contact me by email tomorrow if you have questions about

your exam

grade, final course grade, or other homework grades--or any other

questions,

of course. I should be available by email tomorrow after about 4.

Thanks for being a great class! I had a great time and hope you did too,

and

I hope it was interesting for you and that you learned something new.

AD

Last updated: August 12, 2008

URL: http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1300

Comments: adavis at uh.edu

© 2008, Andrew Davis

musi 1300 schedule Page 6 of 6

http://

 

 
  3

Theory I (MUSI 1310; 3CR) Syllabus  Class schedule  (Andrew Davis)

1310: Theory I
Cr. 3. (3-0). Prerequisite: passing grade on the Theory Entrance Exam. Review of musical rudiments; harmony and voice-leading through submediant and mediant chords; figured bass; cadences and phrase structure; basic analysis; elementary composition.  (Fall)

Music Theory I (MUSI 1310), Fall

2006

Professor: Andrew Davis (email)

Home page and syllabus | Daily schedule

CLASS ROSTERS: see what class you're in

Home page and syllabus

COURSE INFORMATION

course: MUSI 1310: Theory I

time: MWF 8:00–8:50am

location: MSM 108, 110, 112, 116

course web site: http://www.uh.edu/~adavis5/musi1310 (this page). You are expected

to monitor the web site regularly for assignments, updates to the course schedule, and

announcements and other news items not communicated in class or through email.

Details of assignments may or may not be posted in class—you are expected to obtain

the assignment and any related instructions online.

Note on rooms and class logistics: unless instructed otherwise, class will meet with

Professor Davis every Monday in room 108; class will meet Wednesdays and Fridays in

small sections with the teaching assistants in the assigned rooms (see the class rosters

for your TA and room assignments).

PROFESSOR INFORMATION

professor: Andrew Davis, Assistant Professor of Music Theory and Director of Graduate

Studies

office: MSM 152

office phone: 713 743 3294

email: adavis. Domain name uh.edu. **This is the best way to contact me.